Basic Policy on Promoting Green Procurement 
(Provisional Translation) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
February2020 Table of Contents 
 
1. Basic Policy on Promoting Green Procurement by the Government and Incorporated 
Administrative Agencies …………………………………………………………..1 
2. Designated Procurement Items, Evaluation Criteria, and Basic Matters Relating to the 
Procurement of their Purchase……………………………...……...………..……….4 
3. Other Important Matters Regarding Green Procurement…....………….……..……7 
 
Appendix………………………………………………………………………………9 
1. Terminology……………………………………………………………………...9 
2. Paper……………………………………………………………………………9 
3. Stationery……………………………………………………………………….18 
4. Office Furniture, etc………………………………………………………….…28 
5. Imaging Equipment,etc.…………………………………………………….…32 
5-1 Copiers, etc…………………………………………………………………32 
5-2 Printers, etc.……………………………………………………….…….….43 
5-3 Fax Machines……………………………………………………………….52 
5-4 Scanners………………………………………………………………….…56 
5-5 Projectors………………………………………………….…………….….59 
5-6 Cartridges, etc.…………………………………………….…………….… 62 
6. Computers, etc………………………………………………………………….68 
6-1 Computers………………………………………………….……………… 68 
6-2 Magnetic Disc Drive Units…………………………………………………80 
6-3 Displays…………………………………………………………………….83 
6-4 Recording Medias…………………………………………………….……88 
7. Office Equipment, etc………………………………………………………….90 
7-1 Paper Shredders……………………………………………………………90 
7-2 Digital Duplicators...………………………………………………………92 
7-3 Clocks…….……….………….………………………………………….…95 
7-4 Electronic Table Calculators.………………………………………………96 
7-5 Batteries...………………………………………………………………….97 
8. Mobile Telephones, etc.….……………………………………………………99 
9. Home Electronic Appliances…………………………………………………103 
9-1 Electric Refrigerators, etc.………………………………………………103 
9-2 Television Receivers………………………………………………………107 
9-3 Electric Toilet Seats……………………………………………………….111 
9-4 Microwave Ovens..………………………………………………………..113 
10. Air Conditioners, etc....….…………………………………………………….115 
10-1 Air Conditioners..….…………………………………………………….115 
10-2 Gas Heat Pump Air Conditioners……………………………………….119 
10-3 Space Heaters…………….…………………………………...…………120 
11. Water Heaters, etc.………….………………………………………………122 
11-1 Electric Hot Water Supply Systems……………………………………122 
11-2 Gas Water Heaters………….……………………………………………125 
11-3 Oil Water Heaters………….…………………………………………….128 
11-4 Gas Cooking Appliances….…………………………………………….130 
12. Lighting. .…….………………….…………………………………………….133 
12-1 Lighting Equipment……………………………………………………133 12-2 Lamps……………………………………………………………………137 
13. Vehicles, etc.………………………………………………………………......141 
13-1 Vehicles..…………………………………………………………………141 
13-2 Tires.……………………………………………………………………..151 
13-3 Engine Oil……………………………………………………………….152 
14. Fire Extinguishers……………………………………………………………..153 
15. Uniforms and Work Clothes, etc……………………………………….155 
16. Interior Fixtures and Bedding…………………………………………………159 
16-1Curtains, etc……………………………………………………………....159 
16-2 Carpets..….………………………………………………………………162 
16-3 Blankets, etc..……………………………………………………………164 
16-4 Beds...……………………………………………………………………167 
17. Work Gloves…………………………………………………………………..171 
18. Other Textile Products……………………………………………………....172 
18-1 Tents and Sheets…………………………………………………………172 
18-2 Safety Nets……………………………………………………………….174 
18-3 Flags, Advertisement Flags, and Banners, etc.…………………………176 
18-4 Mops..……………………………………………………………………178 
19. Facilities...……………………………………………………………………..180 
20. Stockpiles for Disaster………………………………………………………..191 
20-1 Stockpiles for disaster (Potable Water)…………………………………191 
20-2 Stockpiles for disaster (Foods)………..…………………………………192 
20-3 Stockpiles for disaster (Household items and materials, etc.)…………194 
21. Public-Works Projects.….….………………………………………………….202 
22. Services.……………………………………………………………………….241 
22-1 Energy Conservation Diagnosis…………………………………………241 
22-2 Printing…………………………………………………………………..242 
22-3 Cafeteria..…………………………………….………………………….255 
22-4 Recapped Automobile Tires………………..….…………………………257 
22-5 Automobile Maintenance…………………….…………………………..258 
22-6 Management of Government Office Buildings, etc..…………………….260 
22-7 Transportation and Delivery………………….………………………….284 
22-8 Passenger Transportation….………..…………………………..……….289 
22-9 Illumination Services.….…..………..…………………………..……....293 
22-10 Retail Businesses..……………………….………………………….…294 
22-11 Laundry and Dry Cleaning……….………………………………….…296 
22-12 Installation of Vending Machines…….…………………………….…298 
22-13 Moving Transportation…….…………………………………….…..…304 
22-14 Meeting operation…….….….….….……………………………...……309 
22-15 Providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service …………….....………311 
23. Trash bags, etc.……………………………………………………………….314 
 
  Fields and Items of Designated Procurement Items [22 fields 275 items] 
Paper *Copier paper * Forms * Coated inkjet color printer paper  
* Non coated printing paper * Coated printing paper * Toilet paper  
* Tissue paper 
Stationery * Mechanical pencils * Mechanical pencil lead * Ball-point pens  
* Marking pens * Pencils * Ink pads * Vermilion ink pads  
* Stamp case with inkpad * Stamp case * Official seal  
* Rubber stamp * Date stamp * Rulers * Trays * Erasers  
* Staplers(general-purpose type)  
* Staplers(other than general-purpose type)  
* Staple removers * Clamp-on clip dispensers(main body)  
* Correction tape * Correction fluid * Masking tape  
* Adhesive tapes (cloth tape) * Double sided tapes  
* Book binding tapes * Bookstands * Pen stands * Clip cases  
* Scissors * Magnets (ball) * Magnets (bar) * Tape cutters  
* Hole punchers (manual) * Malt cases (sponge case)  
* Paper turning cream * Pencil sharpeners(manual)  
* Office machine cleaner (wet paper type)  
* Office machine cleaner (liquid type) * Dust blowers * Letter cases  
* Media cases * Mouse pads * Office machine filters (with frame)  
* Paper cutters with round blades * Box cutters * Cutting mats  
* Desk pads * OHP film * Paint brushes * Paints * India ink  
* Glue (liquid)(including refills) * Glue (paste)(including refills)  
* Glue (solid)(including refills) * Glue (tape) * Files * Binders  
* Filing supplies * Photo albums(including refills)  
* Binding string * Card cases * Business envelopes (paper product)  
* Envelopes with windows (paper product) * Graph paper  
* Drafting paper * Notebooks  
* Reinforcement labels for hole-punch pages * Adhesive labels  
* Indexes * Self-stick removable notes * Self-stick removable film  
* Blackboard erasers * Whiteboard erasers * Picture frames  
* Waste bins * Recycling boxes * Can and bottle crushers (manual) 
* Name plates (desktop) * Name tags (pin or string)  
* Key hooks * Chalks * Line marking powder* Packing straps 
Office 
Furniture, etc. * Chairs * Desks * Shelves * Storage furniture (without shelf)  
* Low partitions * Coat hangers * Umbrella stands * Bulletin boards  
* Blackboards * Whiteboards 
Imaging 
Equipment, 
etc. * Copiers * Multifunction devices * Upgradeable digital copiers  
* Printers * Multifunction Printers * Fax machines * Scanners  
* Projectors * Toner cartridges * Ink cartridges 
Computers, etc. * Computers * Magnetic disk drive units * Displays  
* Recording medias 
Office 
Equipment, etc. * Paper shredders * Digital duplicators * Clocks  
* Electronic table calculators 
* Disposable batteries and small rechargeable batteries 
Mobile 
Telephones, etc. * Cellular phones  
* PHS * Smart Phones 
Home * Electric refrigerators * Electric freezers  Electronic 
Appliances * Electric refrigerator- freezers * Television Receivers  
* Electric toilet seats * Microwave ovens 
Air 
Conditioners, 
etc. * Air conditioners * Gas heat pump air conditioners  
* Space heaters 
Water Heaters, 
etc. * Heat pump style electric hot water supply system  
* Gas water heaters * Oil water heaters * Gas cooking appliances 
Lighting * LED lighting equipment  
* Illuminated signage using LED as the light source  
* Fluorescent lamps (tube type 40 fluorescent lamps)  
* Light bulb-shaped lamps 
Vehicles * Vehicles * Tires for passenger cars * 2 cycle engine oil 
Fire 
Extinguishers * Fire extinguishers 
Uniforms and 
Work Clothes, 
etc. * Uniforms * Work clothes  
* Caps *Shoes 
Interior 
Fixtures and 
Bedding * Curtains * Cloth blinds * Metal blinds * Tufted carpets  
* Tile carpets * Woven carpets * Needle-punch carpets  
* Blankets * Comforters * Bed frames * Mattresses 
Work Gloves * Work gloves 
Other Textile 
Products * Tents * Tarps * Safety nets * Flags * Advertisement flags  
* Banners * Mops 
Facilities * Solar power generation systems (for public and industrial use)  
* Solar heating systems (for public and industrial use)  
* Fuel cells * Garbage disposals * Water saving equipment  
* Sunlight adjustment film 
Stockpiles for 
Disaster * PET bottled water * Quick cooking rice  
* Non-perishable bread for an emergency * Pilot bread  
* Retort processed food, etc. * Health foods/Nutrition foods  
* Freeze-dried foods * Emergency portable fuel * Portable generators 
* Portable power supply for emergency 
** Blankets ** Work gloves ** Tents ** Tarps  
** Disposable batteries    
Note:**The same items as the other fields 
Public-Works 
Projects Material 
* Treated soil recycled from construction sludge  
* Granulated blast furnace slag for earth work  
* Caisson filler using copper slag  
* Caisson filler using ferro-nickel slag  
* Steel slag for Ground improvement 
* Blast furnace slag aggregate * Ferro-nickel slag aggregate 
* Copper slag aggregate  
* Electric arc furnace oxidizing slag aggregate  
* Recycled heated asphalt compound 
* Asphalt compound with steel slag 
* Warm asphalt compound * Roadbed material with steel slag  
* Recycled aggregate, etc. * Lumber from thinning * Portland blast furnace cement * Fly-ash cement 
* Eco-cement * Water permeable concrete * Steel slag block 
* Spray on concrete with fly-ash * Base-coating paint (anti corrosive) 
* Water based road paint using low volatility organic solvent 
* High solar reflectance paints * High solar reflectance water proof  
* Pavement blocks using recycled material (burnt) 
* Pavement block products using recycled material (precast 
unreinforced concrete products)  
* Bark compost  
* Fermented compost using sewage sludge (sewage sludge compost) 
* LED road illuminations  
* Central divider block manufactured with recycled plastic  
* Ceramic tiles * Heat insulating sash, doors  
* Lumber * Glued laminated timber  
* Plywood * Laminated veneer lumber *Cross Laminated timber 
* Flooring * Particle board  
* Fiberboard * Wood-type cement board  
* Wood-plastic recycled composite 
* Vinyl floor covering  
* Insulation * Lighting control system * Transformers  
* Cold and hot water absorption units  
* Ice thermal storage air conditioning units  
* Gas heat pump air conditioning units * Fan * Pump  
* Recycle unplasticized polyvinyl chloride pipes for sewage or vent  
* Automatic shut off faucets 
* Toilet and urinal equipped with automatic flushing system  
* Toilet bowls  
* Form utilizing recycled material * Plywood form 
[Construction machines] 
* Low-emission construction machines 
* Low-noise construction machines 
[Construction methods] 
* Effective usage of low quality soil 
* Recycling treatment of construction sludge 
* Recycling treatment of concrete masses 
* Road surface recycling method * Roadbed recycling method 
* Slope surfaces greening method using thinning wood or soil  
obtained from construction process 
* Soil cement pillar line wall method of reducing mad 
[Others] 
* Porous pavement * Permeable pavement * Greening of rooftops 
Services * Energy conservation diagnosis * Printing * Cafeteria  
* Recapped automobile tires * Automobile maintenance  
* Management of government office buildings  
* Landscape management * Smoke detectors test * Cleaning  
* Carpet tile cleaning * Treatment of confidential documents 
* Pest prevention  
* Transportation and delivery  * Passenger transportation (Automobiles) 
* Fluorescent illumination services  
* Retail businesses that operate in government buildings, etc. 
* Laundry and dry cleaning  
* Installation of vending machines for beverages  
* Moving Transportation *Meeting Operation 
* Providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service 
Trash Bags, etc. * Plastic Trash Bags 
 1  
 
Basic Policy on Promoting Green Procurement 
 
 
 
This document defines the basic policies for promoting comprehensive and planned 
procurement of materials, components, products and services with low environmental impact 
(hereinafter referred to as “eco-friendly goods”). This is the basic policy of the national 
government (e.g. the Diet, government ministries and agencies, and courts) and corporations 
defined by the government ordinance 556 of the year 2000 specifying corporations 
(hereinafter referred to as “Incorporated Administrative Agencies”) in Article 2, Paragraph 2 
of Act on Promotion of Procurement of Eco-friendly Goods and Services by the State and 
Other Entities. It is hoped that local governments, enterprises, and citizens will also make a 
commitment to the procurement of eco-friendly goods by taking this basic policy into 
consideration. 
The national government shall continue to work in existing dealings to promote 
environmental conservation in coordination with this basic policy. 
 
 
1. Basic Direction for the Promotion of Green Procurement by the Government and 
Incorporated Administrative Agencies 
 
1.1 Background and Significance of the Promotion of Green Procurement 
Current concerns for global warming and waste management, among other environmental 
issues, are rooted in the system of production and consumption, which has promoted mass 
production, mass consumption, and mass waste. In order to address these issues, it is essential 
that we transform our economy and our societies into sustainable ones. This will require a 
commitment by all sectors to reduce environmental impact. We must immediately reduce the 
environmental impact of the goods and services that support our lifestyles and economic 
activities, and promote a shift in demand toward eco-friendly goods. 
In order to shift demand toward eco-friendly goods and services, it is important to not only 
promote the supply of eco-friendly goods and services, but also to promote prioritizing the 
purchase of eco-friendly goods and services. Prioritizing the purchase of eco-friendly goods 
and services will help form markets for these goods and services, which in turn will promote 
their development and, as a result, increased purchase of eco-friendly goods and services. The 
resulting continuous improvement will create a ripple effect in the market. It is necessary for 
all persons to make a strong commitment to prioritize the purchase of eco-friendly goods and 
services as an integral part of their lives. This is the first step toward wider environmental 
conservation activities by the procurement entities. 
The Government and Incorporated Administrative Agencies (hereinafter referred to as 
“the Government”) play a major role in the national economy and have huge influence on the 
other entities. Their role is very important in promoting a ripple effect in the market, by 
prioritizing and popularizing the purchase of eco-friendly goods and services. That is to say, 
the Government’s initiative promoting the planned purchase of eco-friendly goods and 
services will have a priming effect; expanding this commitment to local governments and the 
private sector, promoting the shift in demand toward eco-friendly goods and services in Japan 
as a whole. The promotion of green procurement based on this basic policy conforms to 2 Article 24, “Promotion of Use of Products Contributing to Reduction of Environmental 
Load,” of the Basic Environment Act (Law No.91, 1992), and Article 19, “Promotion of Use 
of Recycled Articles,” of The Basic Act for Establishing a Sound Material-Cycle Society 
(Law No. 110, 2000). 
In addition, global warming is recognized as a problem related to the existence basis of 
human beings, from the magnitude and seriousness of its expected influence, and it is one of 
the most important environmental problems. Therefore, in view of the importance of 
countermeasures against global warming, based on the "Global Warming Countermeasure 
Plan" (Cabinet decision on May 13, 2016)) and "The Government Action Plan "(Cabinet 
decision on May 13, 2016), the State and Other Entities need to take the initiative to procure 
eco-friendly goods. 
 
1.2 Basic Approach toward the Promotion of Green Procurement 
Each fiscal year, each institution of the government (hereinafter referred to as “each 
institution”) shall formulate and publish a green procurement policy in conformance with this 
basic policy and based on Article 7, “Act on Promotion of Procurement of Eco-friendly Goods 
and Services by the State and Other Entities” (Law No. 100, 2000; hereinafter referred to as 
“Act on Promoting Green Procurement”) taking into consideration its budget and planned 
projects and activities for the fiscal year, and shall purchase goods and services during the 
fiscal year based on this green procurement policy.  
Specifically, each institution shall purchase and utilize goods and services based on the 
following philosophy: 
 
(1) In addition to conventional considerations such as price and quality, environmental 
conservation need to be considered when making procurement decisions. This will make 
the reduction of the environmental impact of goods and services an element for a 
successful procurement contract, along with price and quality. The resulting competition 
between enterprises will lead to the popularization of eco-friendly goods. In awareness of 
this, each institution shall consider the possibility to reduce environmental impact in its 
procurement for as wide a range of goods and services as possible, considering the 
business’s promotion for reduction of the environment impact not to mention the 
observance of regulations related to environment.  
 
(2) In view of the maximum reduction of environmental impact, a wide range of 
environmental factors, including global warming, air pollution, waste, and the decrease of 
biodiversity, need to be considered in as holistic a manner as possible. At the same time, 
goods and services must be selected in consideration of the reduction of the environmental 
impact throughout the product lifecycle from resource acquisition to disposal. With 
regards to areas with specific environmental issues such as local air pollution, such local 
environmental issues may be considered with priority in making procurement decisions. 
 
(3) Respecting Article 11 of Act on Green Procurement, each institution shall take care that 
the purchase of environmental goods and services based on Act on Green Procurement 
does not increase the total procurement amount of goods and services. Each institution 
shall strive to use goods and services reasonably in order to keep the total procurement 
amount of goods and services to a minimum. Additionally, each institution shall strive to 
realize the expected reduction of environmental impact of the purchased environmental 
goods and services, considering their long-term use, proper use and separate disposal. 3  
Additionally, each institution shall carefully consider that green procurement does not 
pose unnecessary impediment on international trade, taking compliance with the WTO 
Agreement on Government Procurement (particularly the stipulations of Article 10, 
Technical Specifications and Tender Documentation) into full account.  4 2. Designated Procurement Items, Evaluation Criteria, and Basic Matters Relating to 
the Promotion of the Procurement of Designated Procurement Goods 
 
2.1 Basic Approach 
 
2.1.a Setting Procurement Targets for Goods Meeting the Criteria 
Each fiscal year, each institution shall establish targets of the procurement of goods and 
services meeting the evaluation criteria for each designated procurement item (hereinafter 
referred to as “designated procurement goods”). 
 
2.1.b Character of Evaluation Criteria etc. 
Though it is preferable to take into account the reduction of environmental impact over the 
entire product lifecycle when making green procurement decisions, evaluation criteria for 
each designated procurement item shall be established on clear matters including the use of 
numerical criteria, so as to use them as objective guideline for the actual purchase of 
eco-friendly goods and services. In establishing such matters, from the viewpoint of 
promoting procurement based on higher environmental performance, a plurality of 
reference values are set in the same matter as necessary. 
In establishing such matters, from the viewpoint of promoting procurement based 
on higher environmental performance, a plurality of reference values are set in the same 
matter as necessary. 
Additionally, while each eco-friendly good makes a corresponding contribution toward 
reducing environmental impact, the evaluation criteria are established to clarify the goods and 
services included in the procurement targets set by each institution each fiscal year in its 
procurement policy, and to be used as one of the standard for the promotion of green 
procurement. Therefore, goods and services meeting the evaluation criteria are neither the 
only ones that contribute to environmental conservation, nor the only ones recommended for 
purchase. It is preferable for each institution to strive to purchase goods and services not only 
meeting the evaluation criteria but also contributing to the reduction of environmental impact 
to the greatest extent possible, taking into account a variety of environmental factors over the 
entire product lifecycle in line with Basic Approach toward the Promotion of Green 
Procurement. For the numerical value set in the evaluation criteria, "reference value 1" 
is set as one that indicates higher environmental performance, and "reference value 2" 
is set as the minimum to be satisfied. Each organization shall promote procurement 
based on "reference value 1" as much as possible and it is expected that transition from 
"reference value 2" to" reference value 1" will proceed at an early stage. 
Furthermore, factors which are important for reducing environmental impact but are not 
appropriate to be set as uniform evaluation criteria at the present time are specified as “factors 
for consideration” to be considered in addition to the evaluation criteria when making 
procurement decisions. Each institution should specify the factors for consideration as 
concrete and explicit specifications for each procurement, when applying the factors for 
consideration to their procurement, in order to ensure transparency and fairness to the 
procurement process. 
Because these evaluation criteria are set in terms of reduction of environmental impact, 
needless to say, it is necessary to separately ensure the general matters, such as quality, 
functionality etc., and appropriate price expected to procured goods and services. 
 
  5 2.1.c Revising and Adding Designated Procurement Items and Evaluation Criteria 
The designated procurement items and evaluation criteria shall be revised as appropriate, 
considering the progress of development and popularization of the designated procurement 
goods and accumulation of scientific knowledge.  
Future revisions and additions to the designated procurement items and evaluation criteria 
shall be made in accordance with the appropriate procedures as stipulated in Act on Green 
Procurement, and also incorporate the opinions of experts from the academic and business 
worlds, while ensuring transparency. 
 
2.1.d Approach toward Public Works 
Public works account for a large share of each institution’s procurement, and have a large 
impact on the national economy. Additionally, it is believed that the Government’s initiative 
to conduct public works by methods which contribute to reduce environmental impact 
promote effectively the same approaches conducted by local governments and private 
enterprise. Therefore, public works that contribute to reduction of environmental impact are 
included in designated procurement items relating to services, and this type of procurement 
shall be actively promoted in accordance with the following points. 
As constructions (including architectural structures) as the aim of public works are 
directly linked to the lives of the people, long term safety and functionality of those 
constructions must be ensured. Therefore, special considerations to the strength, durability, 
and functionality of materials as the components of public works are needed, based on the 
specific characteristics of the project concerned. Additionally, it is also taken into account that 
minimizing the costs of public works projects is severely required  from the point of the 
appropriate use of the institution’s budget. More appropriate procurement targets will be 
considered respecting the difference between types of usage of materials due to the objective 
of each project, the purpose of each structure, the difficulty of construction, etc., and the 
limitation of the areas and/or quantities of materials available for public works. 
There are many possible ways to reduce the environmental impact of public works in 
addition to material utilization, such as the construction methods with low environmental 
impact. The issue shall be considered from a holistic viewpoint spanning the entire lifecycle of 
the public works project. 
 
2.2 Designated Procurement Items and Evaluation Criteria 
See Appendix. 
 
2.3 Eco-friendly Goods Other than Designated Procurement Goods 
The procurement of eco-friendly goods other than the designated procurement items shall 
also be promoted by specifying the matters about the wide range of those goods and setting 
concrete procurement targets as far as possible in the procurement policy, considering the 
status of the administrative task or project. 
In particular, as to services category, each institution shall strive to take up services in 
which some of designated procurement goods are used in their own procurement policy even 
if the services are not listed in this basic policy as designated procurement items, because 
those services are thought to have a big potential to reduce environmental load.  
It is also important for each institution to extend its efforts to reduce environmental impact 
to custom built or ordered goods and services beyond ordinary commercially available 
products and services. It is therefore preferable to incorporate those special goods and services 6 into the procurement policy and study the possibility of reducing environmental impact at as 
early a stage as possible, including the planning stages.  
In addition, each institution shall strive to decrease environmental load generated not only 
from the procured goods themselves but also from the procurement process as much as 
possible, requiring the use of fuel-efficient and/or low pollution vehicle, the use of an 
appropriate size vehicle according to the amount of procured goods, simplification of the 
documents to be submitted within the enforceable range.  
  7 3. Other Important Matters Regarding the Promotion of Green Procurement 
 
3.1 About Procurement Promotion System 
Each institution shall establish a system for promoting green procurement. As a rule, this 
system shall be managed by a person with the ability to exercise control over all of the 
institution’s internal green procurement. (In the case of government ministries and agencies, 
the system shall be managed by the equivalent of a Director (Director-General), or higher). 
All organizations belonging to an institution shall participate in the system. Note that 
environmental departments and accounting/procurement departments must independently 
contribute to this process. Each institution shall clearly describe a concrete green procurement 
promotion system in its procurement policy. 
 
3.2 Scope of Procurement Policy Application  
As a rule, the procurement policy shall be applied to all organizations belonging to the 
institution. However, in the case of specific departments where it is not feasible to uniformly 
promote green procurement, a separate procurements policy shall be created for those 
departments, after clearly noting the reasons in the procurement policy. Each institution shall 
clearly note the scope of its application in the procurement policy. 
 
3.3 Publication of Procurement Policy, Summery of Procurement Track Record, and 
Methods Therein 
Publication of procurement targets of environmental goods and services each fiscal year 
through publication of procurement policy assumed to lead the supply of eco-friendly goods 
and services by the enterprises from the demand side. Additionally, in order to successfully 
promote green procurement, it is necessary to accurately grasp the procurement track record, 
which will be reflected to procurement policy, and to show the summery of record in an 
easy-to-understand format to clarify the progress of green procurement objectively. 
 
3.4 Establishment of Committee of Related Government Ministries and Agencies, etc. 
A committee of government ministries and agencies, etc. shall be formed to enhance 
communication between organizations and to study policies for the promotion of green 
procurement so as to facilitate green procurement effectively. 
 
3.5 Employee Training and Other Educational Activities for the Promotion of Green 
Procurement 
Training, seminars, and other educational activities shall be actively implemented to give 
employees, especially those in charge of procurement, a greater awareness and practical 
knowledge concerning the promotion of green procurement. 
 
3.6 Utilization and Provision of Information about Eco-friendly Goods and Services 
A wide variety of information about eco-friendly goods and services is already available, 
including various environmental labels and product environmental information database. 
Therefore, each institution shall try to utilize information from environmental labels provided 
by third-party organization, such as Eco-Mark and Eco-Leaf, while taking into account its 
appropriateness, including reliability of information and transparency of its procedures. And 
each institution shall strive to purchase goods and services which contribute to reduce 
environmental load to the greatest extent possible, referring to the Carbon Offset Attestation 
Label and the Carbon Footprint Mark, which are programs for the reduction of Greenhouse 8 gas emission. The Government shall strive to provide and spread the appropriate information 
about eco-friendly goods and services as to promote the green procurement by the 
governmental organizations, businesses and citizens. Moreover, the business, each institution 
and other concerned parties shall strive to ensure the reliability within the procurement of 
designated procurement goods. 
 
 9 Appendix 
 
1. Terminology 
 
In this Appendix, the terms “evaluation criteria” greference value 1” greference value 2” 
and “factors for consideration” are used with the following meanings: 
 
Evaluation Criteria 
The requirement as “specified procurement goods” stipulated in Article 2, Paragraph 2 of 
Act on Promotion of Procurement of Eco-friendly Goods and Services by the State and 
Other Entities. 
 
Reference value 1 
When multiple criteria to the same matter are set in the evaluation criteria, it is a value of 
higher environmental performance in that matter and is indicated as a criteria to promote 
procurement as much as possible. 
 
Reference value 2  
Indicated as the minimum level standard for procurement at each institution when multiple 
criteria are set for the same items in the evaluation criteria. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
While not criteria required for specified procurement goods, these factors should preferably 
be taken into account when procuring eco-friendly goods. 
 
 
2. Paper 
 Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Printing Paper 
Non coated 
printing paper 
 
Coated printing 
paper Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Fulfill one of the following. 
a. For non coated printing paper, the composite rating obtained 
by using the following numbers in the formula in note 5 is 80 
or higher: content of recycled pulp, pulp certified by forest 
certification system, pulp manufactured with lumber from 
thinning and others, proportion of pulp content that is used in 
accordance with method of material procurement with 
sustainable goals, and degree of bleaching to be used for 
material. 
b. For coated printing paper, the composite rating obtained by 
using the following numbers in the formula in note 5 is 80 or 
higher: content of recycled pulp, pulp certified by forest 
certification system, pulp manufactured with lumber from 
thinning and others, proportion of pulp content that is used in 
accordance with method of material procurement with 
sustainable goals, and amount of coating to be used for 
material. 10 (2) If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used is to 
be in compliance with the regulations concerning forestry in its 
country or geographical area of origin. This does not apply to 
virgin pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained 
from plywood or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, 
or lumber with a small diameter. 
(3) The composite rating and its breakdown (index or additional 
rating, as well as rating for each index item) are readily available 
on website etc. 
(4) Not processed in a way that makes difficult to recycle. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) The recycled pulp content is as high as possible. 
(2) When virgin pulp is used as material, the pulpwood was produced 
from forests that are operated using sustainable methods. The 
content of pulp certified by forest certification system and pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning and others is to be as 
high as possible. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Pulp used in accordance with method of procurement of materials with sustainable 
goals, denotes one of the following: 
a. Pulp used in accordance with policies for procuring pulpwood only from those 
forests which are operated in accordance with the viewpoint to use forest material 
both cyclically and sustainably by maintaining the diverse functions of the forests, 
while not contributing to the deterioration of the forest or the reduction of forest 
area, and which maintain environmental excellence, including preservation of 
biodiversity, and social excellence, including consideration for health and safety of 
workers. 
b. Pulp used in accordance with policies for procuring recycled and unused pulpwood 
that would contribute to the effective application of resources (scrap wood, 
pulpwood derived from construction, lower standard pulpwood (leftover pulpwood 
from forestry, shrubbery, tree root, pulpwood obtained from logs affected by vermin 
and natural disasters, bent material, material with small diameter, etc.) and fiber 
from waste plants). 
2. Lumber from thinning and others denotes lumber from thinning and bamboo. 
3. Index item denotes content of recycled pulp, pulp certified by forest certification system, 
pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and others, proportion of pulp content 
that is used in accordance with method of material procurement with sustainable goals, 
degree of bleaching, and amount of coating to be used for material. Proportion of pulp 
content that is used in accordance with material procurement with sustainable goals 
denotes pulp to be used in accordance with material procurement with sustainable goals, 
with the exception of pulp certified by forest certification system and pulp manufactured 
with lumber from thinning and others. 
4. Composite rating stands for the amount Y1 or Y2 listed in note 5. 11 Index stands for amount per index item for x1, x2, x3, x4 as listed in note 5; Additional 
rating stands for amount per index item for x5, x6 as listed in note 5. 
Rating stands for the amount calculated in accordance with formulas for y1, y2, y3, y4, 
y5 as listed in note 5. 
5. Composite rating, rating, index, and additional rating are to be derived from the 
following: 
Y1 = (y1+y2+y3)+y4 
Y2 = (y1+y2+y3)+y5 
y1 = x1-10 (60x1100) 
y2 = x2+x3 (0x2+x340) 
y3=0.5 × x4 (0x440) 
y4=-x5+75 (60x575, x5<60x5=60, x5>75x5=75) 
y5=-0.5x6+20 (0x610x6=10, 10x620 x6=20,20x630 x6=30, 
x6>30 x6=40) 
 
Y1, Y2 and y1, y2, y3, y4, y5, x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6 stand for the following amount. 
Y1 (composite rating of non coated printing paper): the sum of y1, y2, y3, y4 with the 
amount below decimal point eliminated. 
Y2 (composite rating of coated printing paper): the sum of y1, y2, y3, y5 with the 
amount below decimal point eliminated. 
y1: calculated rating for recycled pulp content, rounded to one decimal place. 
y2: calculated rating for the content of pulp certified by forest certification system 
and pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, rounded to one decimal 
place. 
y3: calculated rating for proportion of pulp content that is used in accordance with 
method of material procurement with sustainable goals, rounded to one decimal 
place. 
y4: calculated sum of degree of bleaching, rounded to one decimal place (not applied 
for colored printing paper or fancy paper (including fine quality of colored paper 
and general colored paper used colorant)). 
5 point adding in case of colored printing paper and fancy paper of Rank A (the 
one not obstructed in recycling to printing paper) that meet the criteria of 
“printing” (refer to printing section), there is no adding point for other paper. 
y5: calculated sum of amount of coating, rounded to one decimal place. 
x1: content ratio of recycled pulp satisfying minimal guarantee (%) 
x2: content ratio of pulp certified by forest certification system (%) 
 x2 = (pulp certified by forest certification system / virgin pulp) × (100-x1) 
x3: content ratio of pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and others (%) 
 x3= (pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and others / virgin pulp) × 
(100-x1) 
x4: content ratio of pulp that satisfy other sustainable goals (%) 
 x4= (pulp that satisfy other sustainable goals / virgin pulp) × (100-x1) 
x5: degree of bleaching (%) 
 Degree of bleaching is to be determined as management standard per each  
product lot at the time of production. Amounts within 3% of management 
standard are to be allowed. When coloring occurs with purposes other than to 12 match the lot color (when bleaching is done intentionally) does not count 
towards additional points. 
x6: amount of coating (g/m2) 
 Amount of coating (coating on both sides) is to be determined as management 
standard per each product lot at the time of production.  
6. When using printing paper for the copiers and the printers, each procurement 
organization must confirm the printability and print quality based on information 
offered by the paper manufacturer making public on the product or websites. 
7. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest where pulpwood 
producing paper originates from is, as for Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in 
accordance with  Clean Wood Act and the Forest Agency’s “Guideline for Verification 
on Legality and Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” For 
other than Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in accordance with the Forest 
Agency’s Guideline. 
8. Confirmation of lumber from thinning to be used for pulp is to be done in accordance 
with “Guidelines for confirming thinning wood chips (February 13, 2009).” 
9. As paper is produced from a mixture of multiple wood chips, it is permissible to take into 
consideration the difficulty of securing the actual proportion for each product during the 
manufacturing process, and use the credit method that is in accordance with “Operation 
guidelines for credit method for pulp certified by forest certification system and pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning (February 13, 2009) ,” stipulated by Ministry 
of Environment. 
Credit method refers to a method whereby the appropriate use of pulp certified by forest 
certification system and pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and others are 
determined for each product, in accordance with the amount of usage for the two types 
of pulp in relation to other types of material used in a given time, without consideration 
for whether or not it is actually used in individual product. 
 
 
Hygienic Paper 
Toilet paper Evaluation Criteria  
100% recycled pulp content 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into account 
ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal. Tissue paper 
 
 
Information Paper 
Copier paper 
 Evaluation Criteria 
(1) The composite rating obtained by using the following numbers in the 
formula in note 5 is 80 or higher: content of recycled pulp, pulp 
certified by forest certification system, pulp manufactured with lumber 
from thinning and others, proportion of pulp content that is used in 
accordance with method of material procurement with sustainable 
goals, degree of bleaching, and weight per unit to be used for material. 
(2) If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used is to be in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry in its country or 13 geographical area of origin. This does not apply to virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a 
small diameter. 
(3) The composite rating and its breakdown (index or additional rating, as 
well as rating for each index item) are listed on the product. When it is 
not possible to list the rating and its breakdown on the product, the 
information is readily available on website, etc., which should be 
clearly noted. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) The recycled pulp content is as high as possible. 
(2) When virgin pulp is used as material, the pulpwood was produced 
from forests that are operated using sustainable methods. The content 
of pulp certified by forest certification system and pulp manufactured 
with lumber from thinning and others is to be as high as possible. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
2. Pulp used in accordance with method of procurement of materials with sustainable 
goals, denotes one of the following: 
a. Pulp used in accordance with policies for procuring pulpwood only from those 
forests which are operated in accordance with the viewpoint to use forest material 
both cyclically and sustainably by maintaining the diverse functions of the forests, 
while not contributing to the deterioration of the forest or the reduction of forest 
area, and which maintain environmental excellence, including preservation of 
biodiversity, and social excellence, including consideration for health and safety 
of workers. 
b. Pulp used in accordance with policies for procuring recycled and unused 
pulpwood that would contribute to the effective application of resources (scrap 
wood, pulpwood derived from construction, lower standard pulpwood (leftover 
pulpwood from forestry, shrubbery, tree root, pulpwood obtained from logs 
affected by vermin and natural disasters, bent material, material with small 
diameter, etc.) and fiber from waste plants). 
3. Lumber from thinning and others denotes lumber from thinning and bamboo. 
4. Index item denotes content of recycled pulp, pulp certified by forest certification 
system, pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and others proportion of pulp 
content that is used in accordance with method of material procurement with 
sustainable goals, degree of bleaching, and weight per unit to be used for material. 
Proportion of pulp content that is used in accordance with material procurement 
with sustainable goals denotes pulp to be used in accordance with material 
procurement with sustainable goals, with the exception of pulp certified by forest 
certification system and pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and others. 
5. Composite rating stands for the amount Y listed in note 5. 
Index stands for amount per index item for x1, x2, x3, x4 as listed in note 5; 
Additional rating stands for amount per index item for x5, x6 as listed in note 5. 14 Rating stands for the amount calculated in accordance with formulas for y1, y2, y3, 
y4, y5 as listed in note 5. 
6. Composite rating, rating, index, and additional rating are to be derived from the 
following: 
Y = (y1+y2+y3)+y4+y5 
y1 = x1-20 (70x1100) 
y2 = x2+x3 (0x2+x330) 
y3 = 0.5 × x4 (0x430) 
y4 = x5+75 (60x575, x5<60x5=60, x5>75x5=75) 
y5 = -2.5x6+170 (62x668, x6<62x6=62, x6>68x6=68) 
Y and y1, y2, y3, y4, y5, x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6 stand for the following amount. 
Y (composite rating): the sum of y1, y2, y3, y4, y5 with the amount below decimal 
point eliminated. 
y1: calculated rating for recycled pulp content, rounded to one decimal place. 
y2: calculated rating for the content of pulp certified by forest certification system 
and pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and others, rounded to one 
decimal place. 
y3: calculated rating for proportion of pulp content that is used in accordance with 
method of material procurement with sustainable goals, rounded to one 
decimal place. 
y4: calculated sum of degree of  bleaching, rounded to one decimal place. 
y5: calculated sum of weight per unit, rounded to one decimal place. 
x1: content ratio of recycled pulp satisfying minimal guarantee (%) 
x2: content ratio of pulp certified by forest certification system (%) 
 x2 = (pulp certified by forest certification system/ virgin pulp) × (100-x1) 
x3: content ratio of pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and others (%) 
 x3 = (pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and others/ virgin pulp) × 
(100-x1) 
x4: content ratio of pulp that satisfy other sustainable goals (%) 
 x4 = (pulp that satisfy other sustainable goals / virgin pulp) × (100-x1) 
x5: degree of bleaching (%) 
 Degree of bleaching is to be determined as management standard per each 
product lot at the time of production. Amounts within 3% of management 
standard are to be allowed. When coloring occurs with purposes other than to 
match the lot color (when bleaching is done intentionally) does not count 
towards additional points. 
x6: weight per unit (g/m2) 
 Weight per unit is to be determined as management standard per each product 
lot at the time of production. Amounts within 5% of management standard are 
to be allowed. 
7. As copy paper with low weight per unit has a relatively high risk of curling, jamming, 
and tearing at the time of copying, it is necessary to pay attention when procuring 
paper with low weight per unit. 
8. When using copier paper for the copiers and the printers, each procurement 
organization must confirm the printability and print quality based on information 
offered by the paper manufacturer making public on the product or website. 
9. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest where pulpwood 
producing paper originates from is, for Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in 15 accordance with “the Act on Promotion of Use and Distribution of Legally-Harvested 
Wood and Wood Products (Act No.48 of 2016. hereinafter “Clean Wood Act”.)” and to 
be conducted in accordance with the Forest Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on 
Legality and Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” For 
other than Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in accordance with the Forest 
Agency’s Guideline. 
10. Confirmation of lumber from thinning to be used for pulp is to be done in accordance 
with the Forest Agency’s “Guidelines for confirming thinning wood chips (February 
13, 2009).” 
11. As paper is produced from a mixture of multiple wood chips, it is permissible to take 
into consideration the difficulty of securing the actual proportion for each product 
during the manufacturing process, and use the credit method that is in accordance with 
“Operation guidelines for credit method for pulp certified by forest certification 
system, and pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning (February 13, 2009),” 
stipulated by Ministry of Environment. 
Credit method refers to a method whereby the appropriate use of pulp certified by 
forest certification system and pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and 
others are determined for each product, in accordance with the amount of usage for the 
two types of pulp in relation to other types of material used in a given time, without 
consideration for whether or not it is actually used in individual product. 
 
 
Forms Evaluation Criteria 
(1) 70% recycled pulp content and no more than approximately 70% 
bleaching. 
(2) If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used is to be in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry in its country or 
geographical area of origin. This does not apply to virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a 
small diameter. 
(3) If coated, coating on both sides totaling no more than 12 g/m2. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a sustainable operation. The 
content of pulp certified by forest certification system and pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning and others are to be as high as 
possible. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Coated inkjet 
color printer 
paper Evaluation Criteria 
(1) At least 70% recycled pulp content. 
(2) If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used is to be in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry in its country or 
geographical area of origin. This does not apply to virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 16 or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a 
small diameter. 
(3) Coating on both sides totaling no more than 20 g/m2, coating on one 
side no more than 12 g/m2. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The recycled pulp content is as high as possible. 
(2) If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a sustainable operation. The 
content of pulp certified by forest certification system and pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning and others is to be as high as 
possible.  
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest where pulpwood producing 
paper originates from is, for Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in accordance with  
Clean Wood Act and  the Forest Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Legality and 
Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” For other than 
Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in accordance with the Forest Agency’s Guideline.  
 
 
 
 Recycled paper and the percentage of recycled paper pulp content 
The definition of recycled paper and relating terms, and the percentage of recycled pulp 
content defining as Evaluation Criteria in each article is as follows. 
 
<The definition of recycled paper and relating terms> 
Recycled paper Post-consumer recycled paper and pre-consumer recycled paper. 
 
Post-consumer 
recycled paper Used paper generated in shops, offices, or homes utilized as a raw material 
for papermaking by paper manufacturers (Papers shipped as a product to 
marketing channel once and returned again are included.). 
Pre-consumer 
recycled paper Paper generated from converting process after the papermaking process 
utilized as a raw material for papermaking by paper manufacturer.  
However, paper used by the paper manufacturers as paper material without 
being shipped as good prescribed hereinafter is excluded: the one generated 
from such as a paper converting factory, paper product factory, printing 
factory and binding factory of paper manufacturer, etc. (include those 
affiliates such as subsidiary companies and related companies) and the one 
when converting at the mills or operational sites that uses paper as raw 
material and also those of generated from in case of converting by other 
business operators commissioned by paper manufacturers before shipping 
products (If the ownership of the paper material has transferred to the third 
party from the proper paper manufacturers, it will be treated as recycled 
paper, except intentionally attempted to handle mill broke as recycled 17 paper.). 
Mill broke The one that corresponds as follows. 
 Paper generated during the paper making process, and directly returned to 
the papermaking process to use as a papermaking material (so called 
Flowing Mill Broke. Wet broke and Dry broke). 
 Paper kept in at the paper mills or operational sites and used as raw 
material (so-called Stored Mill Broke). 
 The one provided for by Proviso in definition of the above-mentioned as 
pre-consumer recycled paper. 
Paper  
manufacture Paper industry (142) specified in a middle classification by a classification 
of Japan Standard Industry Classification (No.175 of the Ministry of 
Internal Affairs and Communications Notification on March 23, 2009), 
classified Paper manufacturing (1421), Corrugated board 
manufacturing (1422), Machine-made Japanese style paper (1423) and 
Hand-made Japanese paper  manufacturing (1424) in the small 
classification. 
Subsidiary 
companies, 
related 
companies, 
and affiliates The one stipulated in each paragraph of Article 8 of Regulations 
Concerning Terminology, Forms, and Preparation Methods of 
Consolidated Financial Statements i1963 Ministry of Finance 
Ordinance No.59jbased on the regulations Article 193 of Financial 
Instruments and Exchange Act (Law No.25, 1948). 
 
<The definition of the percentage of recycled paper pulp content> 
 
The percentage of recycled paper pulp content= 
recycled pulp/(virgin pulp +recycled pulp)~100(%) 
 
Pulp containing 10% moisture is used to measure the weight. 
Mill broke shall not be included in the denominator and numerator, respectively, of the 
calculating formula above. 
 
 
 
 Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the amount of goods of a certain type (in kg) that meets the criteria, to the total 
amount of goods of that type to be purchased in the fiscal year (in kg). 
  18 3. Stationery 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Common to all 
stationery Evaluation Criteria 
With the exception of metals, the primary material meets, of the criteria 
below, (1) for plastic, (2) for wood, and (3) for paper. In addition, items 
whose secondary material includes wood meets (2). Items whose secondary 
material include paper (with the exception of virgin pulp manufactured 
with lumber from thinning, or with recycled wood pieces obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories)  meet (3)b. This does not apply to virgin pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin pulp manufactured by 
using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood or lumber factories, 
material left over from forestry, or lumber with a small diameter. 
 
(1) Recycled plastic makes up no less than 40% in weight of the total 
plastic used or plant based plastics whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed used. If recycled plastic 
consists solely of post-consumer material, the blending ratio shall be no 
less than 20 wt.%. 
(2) Lumber from thinning, recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, or lumber used as raw material that is in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry in its country of 
origin. The pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. 
(3) Fulfill the following. 
a. At least 50% recycled pulp content.  
b. If virgin pulp is used as the raw material for paper, the pulpwood 
used is to be in compliance with the regulations concerning forestry 
in its country or geographical area of origin. This does not apply to 
virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories material left over from forestry, or 
lumber with a small diameter. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The recycled pulp content and recycled plastic content is as high as 
possible. 
(2) Organic solvent, or paint with as low odor as possible is used as 
coating. 
(3) If the primary material is wood, lumber that is used as the raw material 
is to be obtained from a forest that is conducting a sustainable 
operation. Lumber from thinning, or recycled wood pieces obtained 
from plywood or lumber factories are to be excluded. 
(4) If the primary material is paper, and furthermore, if virgin pulp is used, 
pulpwood that is used as the raw material is to be obtained from a forest 
that is conducting a sustainable operation. This does not apply to virgin 
pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a 19 small diameter. 
(5) The content of lumber from thinning and pulp with lumber from 
thinning is to be as high as possible. 
(6) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
(7) If plastic is used for product packaging or stowage, recycled plastic 
shall be used as much as possible, or plant based plastics whose 
reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed shall be 
used as much as possible.  
 
[Notes] Evaluation Criteria and Factors for Consideration listed above 
apply to special procurement items that are included in stationery. For 
special procurement items with specific evaluation criteria (marked with 
), evaluation criteria for that item will be applied in lieu of the evaluation 
criteria listed above. 
Mechanical 
pencils Factors for Consideration  
Its design and operation is such that as low as possible an amount of unused 
lead is left over or un-usable each time the user supplies and replaces the 
lead in the mechanical pencil. 
Mechanical 
pencil lead Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
Ball-point pens Evaluation Criteria 
Meet the Evaluation Criteria common to all stationery and ink cartridges 
are replaceable. 
Marking pens Factors for Consideration  
Consumable parts can be replaced or refilled. 
Pencils  
Ink pads 
 Evaluation Criteria 
If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic makes up no less than 
70% by weight of the total plastic used(excluding consumable parts). If 
recycled plastic consists solely of post-consumer material, the blending 
ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In other cases, the item satisfies the 
Evaluation Criteria common to all stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Ink/fluid is refillable. 
Vermilion ink 
pads Evaluation Criteria 
If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic  makes up no less than 
70% by weight of the total plastic used (excluding consumable parts). If 
recycled plastic consists solely of post-consumer material, the blending 
ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In other cases, the item satisfies the 
Evaluation Criteria common to all stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Ink/fluid is refillable 
Stamp case Factors for Consideration  20 with inkpad Refillable ink 
Stamp case  
Official seal  
Rubber stamp  
Date stamp  
Rulers  
Trays  
Erasers Evaluation Criteria apply to sleeve or case only 
Staplers(genera
l-purpose type) Evaluation Criteria 
If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic  makes up no less than 
70% by weight of the total plastic used (except the mechanical parts). In 
other cases, the item satisfies the Evaluation Criteria common to all 
stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
The items are designed so that any consumable parts can be replaced and, 
after the item’s useful life, it can be easily dismantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and recycling, or the appropriate 
disposal of its separated parts. 
Staplers(other 
than 
general-purpos
e type) Factors for Consideration  
The items are designed so that any consumable parts can be replaced and, 
after the item’s useful life, it can be easily dismantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and recycling, or the appropriate 
disposal of its separated parts. 
Staple 
removers  
Clamp-on clip 
dispensers(mai
n body) Evaluation Criteria 
If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic makes up no less than 
70% by weight of the total plastic used (excluding replaceable parts). If 
recycled plastic consists solely of post-consumer material, the blending 
ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In other cases, the item satisfies the 
Evaluation Criteria common to all stationery. 
Correction tape Evaluation Criteria 
If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic  makes up no less than 
70% by weight of the total plastic used  (excluding replaceable parts). If 
recycled plastic consists solely of post-consumer material, the blending 
ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In other cases, the item satisfies the 
Evaluation Criteria common to all stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Consumable parts can be replaced 
Correction 
fluid Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
Masking tape Evaluation Criteria  
Roll is at least 40% recycled pulp content. If virgin pulp is used as the 
raw material, the pulpwood use is to be in compliance with the regulations 21 concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does 
not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin 
pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Use of soluble and dispersible adhesive in water or in the weak alkaline 
water solution, and no resin laminate processing. 
Adhesive tapes 
(cloth tape) Evaluation Criteria 
Recycled plastic makes up at least 40% of plastic weight for the roll 
(excluding laminate layer). 
Double sided 
tapes Evaluation Criteria 
Rolls are at least 40% recycled pulp content. If virgin pulp is used as the 
raw material, the pulpwood use is to be in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does 
not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin 
pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. 
 
Book binding 
tapes Evaluation Criteria apply to the rolls only. 
Bookstands Evaluation Criteria 
If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic  makes up no less than 
70% by weight of the total plastic used (excluding replaceable parts). If 
recycled plastic consists solely of post-consumer material, the blending 
ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In other cases, the item satisfies the 
Evaluation Criteria common to all stationery. 
Pen stands  
Clip cases  
Scissors Factors for Consideration  
The items are designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and, recycling, or the 
appropriate disposal of its separated parts. 
Magnets (ball)  
Magnets (bar)  
Tape cutters  
Hole punchers 
(manual)  
Malt cases 
(sponge case)  
Paper turning 
cream Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
Pencil 
sharpeners 
(manual) Factors for Consideration  
The items are designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and recycling, or the appropriate 22 disposal of its separated parts. 
Office machine 
cleaner (wet 
paper type) Evaluation Criteria 
Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic makes up no less than 
70% by weight of the total plastic used. If recycled plastic consists solely of 
post-consumer material, the blending ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In 
other cases, the item satisfies the Evaluation Criteria common to all 
stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Refillable contents 
Office machine 
cleaner (liquid 
type) Evaluation Criteria 
Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Refillable contents 
Dust blowers Evaluation Criteria 
Does not use Fluorocarbons. In cases where highly combustible 
materials are used, adequate instruction for its handling should accompany 
the product. 
Letter cases  
Media cases  Evaluation Criteria 
Fulfill at least one of below. 
(1) If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic makes up no less than 
70% by weight of the total plastic used. If recycled plastic consists 
solely of post-consumer material, the blending ratio shall be no less 
than 35 wt.%. In other cases, the item satisfies the Evaluation Criteria 
common to all stationery. 
(2) Cases for CD, DVD and BD should be a slim-type case that is 5mm or 
less in thickness. 
(3) Uses plant based plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load 
has been confirmed. 
Mouse pads  
Office machine 
filters  
(with frame) Evaluation Criteria 
Fulfill at least one of below. 
(1) Meets the Evaluation Criteria common to all stationery, or uses plant 
based plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been 
confirmed. 
(2) Recycled plastic makes up more than 50% of frame weight. 
Paper cutters 
with round 
blades Factors for Consideration 
The items are designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and recycling, or the appropriate 
disposal of its separated parts. 
Box cutters  
Cutting mats Factors for Consideration 
Both sides of the mat can be used. 
Desk pads  23 OHP film Evaluation Criteria 
Fulfill at least one of below. 
(1) Recycled plastic makes up at least 30% of plastic weight. 
(2) OHP film for inkjet printers fulfill either the above criteria or use plant 
based plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been 
confirmed. 
Paint brushes Evaluation Criteria 
If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic makes up no less than 
70% by weight of the total plastic used. If recycled plastic consists solely of 
post-consumer material, the blending ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In 
other cases, the item satisfies the Evaluation Criteria common to all 
stationery. 
Paints Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
India ink Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
Glue (liquid) 
(including 
refills) Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Refillable contents Glue (paste) 
(including 
refills) 
Glue (solid) 
(including 
refills) Evaluation Criteria apply to the container or case only 
Factors for Consideration  
Consumable parts can be replaced Glue (tape) 
Files Evaluation Criteria 
If the primary material excluding metal is paper, it contains at least 70% 
recycled pulp content. If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the 
pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regulations concerning 
forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does not apply to 
virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood or 
lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. Otherwise, the item fulfills at least one of below: 
(1) Meets the Evaluation Criteria common to all stationery. 
(2) Clear holders fulfill either the above criteria or use plant based plastics 
whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Structure allows separation of cover and closing mechanism to enable reuse 
and recycling of components, as well as their separate disposal. 
Binders Evaluation Criteria 
If the primary material excluding metal is paper, it contains at least 70% 
recycled pulp content. If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the 
pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regulations concerning 
forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does not apply to 
virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood or 24 lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. Otherwise, the item meets the Evaluation Criteria common to all 
stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Structure allows separation of cover and closing mechanism to enable reuse 
and recycling of components, as well as their separate disposal. 
Filing supplies  
Photo albums 
(including 
refills)  
Binding string Evaluation Criteria 
Fulfill at least one of below. 
(1) If the primary material is paper, recycled pulp makes up no less than 
70% of it. If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used 
is to be in compliance with the regulations concerning forestry in its 
country or geographical area of origin. This does not apply to virgin 
pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a 
small diameter. 
(2) If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic makes up no less than 
70% by weight of the total plastic used. If recycled plastic consists 
solely of post-consumer material, the blending ratio shall be no less 
than 35 wt.%. In other cases, the item satisfies the Evaluation Criteria 
common to all stationery. 
(3) Otherwise, the item meets the Evaluation Criteria common to all 
stationery. 
 
Card cases  
Business 
envelopes 
(paper product) Evaluation Criteria  
 No less than 40% recycled pulp content. If virgin pulp is used as the raw 
material, the pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does 
not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin 
pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. 
 
Envelopes with 
windows 
(paper product) Evaluation Criteria 
No less than 40% recycled pulp content. If virgin pulp is used as the raw 
material, the pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does 
not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin 
pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. (Criteria regarding recycled pulp content does not apply to 
windows that are made of paper.) 25 For envelopes with windows made of plastic film product, the film 
contains no less than 40% recycled plastic, or use plant based plastics 
whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed.  
Graph paper Evaluation Criteria  
No less than 70% recycled pulp content. If virgin pulp is used as the raw 
material, the pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does 
not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin 
pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. 
Coated paper: both sides totaling no more than 30 g/m2 or meet the 
Evaluation Criteria for “Coated printing paper”.  
Non-coated paper: no more than approximately 70% bleaching. Drafting paper 
Notebooks 
Reinforcement 
labels for 
hole-punch 
pages  Factors for Consideration  
Use of soluble and dispersible adhesive in water or in the weak alkaline 
water solution, and no resin laminate processing. 
Adhesive 
labels  Evaluation Criteria  
If the primary material is paper, recycled pulp makes up no less than 70%  
(excluding the adhesive portion) of it. If virgin pulp is used as the raw 
material, the pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does 
not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin 
pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. Otherwise, the item meets the Evaluation Criteria common to all 
stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Use of soluble and dispersible adhesive in water or in the weak alkaline 
water solution, and no resin laminate processing. Indexes  
Self-stick 
removable 
notes 
Self-stick 
removable film Factors for Consideration 
Use of soluble and dispersible adhesive in water or in the weak alkaline 
water solution. 
Blackboard 
erasers  
Whiteboard 
erasers  
Picture frames  
Waste bins Evaluation Criteria 
If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic makes up no less than 
70% by weight of the total plastic used. If recycled plastic consists solely of 
post-consumer material, the blending ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In 
other cases, the item satisfies the Evaluation Criteria common to all 
stationery. 
Recycling Evaluation Criteria 26 boxes If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic  makes up no less than 
70% by weight of the total plastic used. If recycled plastic consists solely of 
post-consumer material, the blending ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In 
other cases, the item satisfies the Evaluation Criteria common to all 
stationery. 
Can and bottle 
crushers 
(manual)  
Name plates 
(desktop)  
Name tags (pin 
or string)  
Key hooks  
Chalks Evaluation Criteria 
Recycled material makes up no less than 10%. 
Line marking 
powder Evaluation Criteria 
Recycled material makes up no less than 70%. 
Packing straps Evaluation Criteria 
If the primary material is paper, recycled paper makes up 100% of the 
entire item. 
If the primary material is plastic, recycled plastic that utilizes 
post-consumer material makes up no less than 25%. Recycled products 
from pet bottles are excluded. 
Notes:  
1. Stapler (general-purpose type) under consideration in the Evaluation Criteria in this 
section denotes handy-type one that use the No.10 staples by JIS S 6036-2. Stapler 
(other than general-purpose type) denotes other than Stapler (general-purpose type) 
and includes those that do not use staples.  
2. File includes types for paper with holes (flat file, pipe-style file, binder, fastener, 
cap-style file for computer printouts) and types for paper without holes (folder, holder, 
box file, document file, transparent pocket file, scrap book, z-type file, clip file, 
letterhead holder, drawing file, case file, etc.). 
3. Binder includes MP binder, ring binder, etc. 
4. Filing supplies include spine labels, file pockets, and dividers to be used with files and 
binders. 
5. The definition of Recycled paper and The percentage of recycled paper pulp content  
is according to “2. Paper (2) Recycled paper and the percentage of recycled paper pulp 
content” in this Basic Policy. 
6. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.) 
7. Post-consumer material denotes material or product that has been disposed of after 
being used as a product. 
8. Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific analysis and 27 evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
9. Evaluation Criteria for stationery has been determined for products whose primary 
material other than metal is plastic, wood, or paper. Under consideration in the 
evaluation criteria, it does not include products whose primary material is metal and 
does not use plastic, wood, or paper. 
10. Consumable part denotes parts that wear out with use. For replaceable consumable 
parts (i.e. cartridges), the entire replaceable portion is to be excluded from the total 
product weight. For non-replaceable consumable parts (one-way), only the appropriate 
portion (i.e. ink) it to be excluded from denominator and numerator for calculating the 
compounding ratio of recycled material of the product.  
11. Adhesive part denotes the surface of labels, etc. that are treated with a pressure sensitive 
adhesive. The adhesive and the backing paper or material is to be excluded from 
denominator and numerator for calculating the compounding ratio of recycled material 
of the product. 
12. Fluorocarbons under consideration in the Evaluation Criteria for Dust blowers are 
defined as the Fluorocarbons prescribed in Article 2, Paragraph 1 of the Act for 
Rationalized Use and Proper Management of Fluorocarbons, (Act No. 64 of 2001). 
Available materials include Carbon Dioxide, Dimethyl Ether and Hydro-Fluoro-Olefin 
(HFO-1234ze). 
13. Evaluation Criteria for Dust blowers apply to the designated products prescribed in 
Article 2, Paragraph 2 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Proper Management of 
Fluorocarbons (Act No. 64 of 2001). 
14. Media cases under consideration denotes dose for use with CD, DVD and BD. 
15. Evaluation criteria of coated printing paper referred to”2. Paper Coated printing 
paper” in this basic policy. 
16. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest where pulpwood 
producing wood and paper originates from is to be conducted in accordance with the 
Forest Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Legality and Sustainability of Wood 
and Wood Products (February 15, 2006) .” In addition, certification system of forest, 
timber, etc. by prefectures etc. can be utilized for confirmation of legality. 
Regarding raw timber where the contract between the lumber company and the 
processing and marketing companies has been made prior to April 1, 2006, a supplier 
who owns raw materials or products etc. as of April 1, 2006, specifies the raw materials 
or products etc., and reports them in advance to the Forestry Agency once a year, and is 
a specified raw material or product etc. If it is stated in the certificate, the proof that it is 
a legal wood prescribed in the above guidelines is unnecessary. 
The period of time for which this exceptional clause is applicable will be determined in 
consideration with market trend. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of goods of a certain type that meets the criteria, to the total number of 
goods of that type to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
  28 4. Office Furniture, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Chairs 
 
Desks 
 
Shelves 
 
Storage furniture 
(without shelf) 
 
Low partitions 
 
Coat hangers 
 
Umbrella stands 
 
Bulletin boards 
 
Blackboards 
 
Whiteboards Evaluation Criteria  
Shelves and storage furniture comprised primarily of metal should 
fulfill requirements outlined in (1) and (5). For all other products, 
one of the following should be met. Products whose primary 
material aside from metal is plastic, wood and paper should fulfill 
the requirements outlined in (2) and (5), (3) and (5), and (4) and (5), 
respectively. For products that include wood as a non-primary 
material should fulfill (3) a, b and c; products that include paper as a 
non-primary material should fulfill (4) b. 
 
(1) Products included in Table 1 fulfill both a. b. and c. listed below. 
Other products fulfill both b. and c. listed below. 
a. Does not exceed criteria listed in Table 1 for each category. 
b. Ratio of dismantle-possibility into single material is 90% or 
higher. 
c. Takes into account environmentally conscious design noted 
in Table 2 for each evaluation criteria. 
(2) Fulfill one of the following. 
a. Recycled plastic makes up at least 10% by weight. 
b. Plant based plastics whose reduction effect of environmental 
load has been confirmed makes up at least 25% by weight of 
total plastic used and bio-based synthetic polymer rate 
accounts for no less than 10%. 
(3) Fulfill the following d, and a, b or c according to raw materials 
used: 
a. Lumber from thinning, recycled wood pieces obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories 
b. Lumber from thinning is in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of 
origin. 
c. In the cases other than above a. used as the raw material is in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry in its 
country or geographical area of origin.  
d. Discharge rate of formaldehyde from materials is no greater 
than 0.02 mg/m²h, or the equivalent. 
(4) Fulfill the following: 
a. At least 50% recycled pulp content.  
b. If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used 
is to be in compliance with the regulations concerning 
forestry in its country or geographical area of origin.  
c. Above b. does not apply recycled wood pieces obtained 
from plywood or lumber factories, material left over from 
forestry and lumber with a small diameter. 
(5) Supply of the service parts and spare parts shall be continued 
for 5 years or more after the termination of product 
manufacturing. 29  
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Designed for long-term use, taking into account maintenance, 
repair and the replaceability of parts that wear. Designed to 
enable component reuse and easy disassembly for refurbishment 
and recycling, or the appropriate disposal of the separated parts 
after the item’s useful life. Special care taken in the design of 
item’s metal components to enable long-term use, conservation 
of resources, and reuse of materials, based on the evaluation 
criteria of the Act on the Promotion of Effective Utilization of 
Resources (Law No. 48 of 1991). 
(2) Organic solvent, or paint with as low odor as possible such as 
powder paint and water-based paint is used as coating. 
(3) A system for collection and reuse/recycling of used products, 
and a system for the proper disposal of components which 
cannot be reused or recycled is considered. 
(4) If wood is one of the materials used in the product, lumber that is 
used as the raw material is to be obtained from a forest that is 
conducting a sustainable operation. This does not apply to virgin 
pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories. 
(5) If paper is one of the material used in the product, and 
furthermore, if virgin pulp is used, pulpwood that is used as the 
raw material is to be obtained from a forest that is conducting a 
sustainable operation. This does not apply to virgin pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin pulp 
manufactured by lumber using recycled wood pieces obtained 
from plywood or lumber factories. 
(6) Packaging and stowage is made as simple as possible, and takes 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environmental 
impact upon disposal.  
(7) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, 
etc. is considered. 
Notes: 
1. White board under consideration in the evaluation criteria in this section includes all 
types of writing boards excluding chalk boards. 
2. Comprised primarily of metal indicates that metal used for the product comprises 95% 
or more of the total product by weight. 
3. Ratio of dismantle-possibility into single material in Evaluation Criteria (1) will be 
determined using the following formula.   
Ratio of dismantle-possibility into single material = number of parts that can be 
dismantled into a single material / number of parts in the product × 100 
Parts to which one of the following is applicable will not be included when 
calculating ratio of dismantle-possibility into single material. 
(1) Parts used to prevent overturning due to theft, earthquakes or as a part of the 
operating process (including locks, overturning prevention parts, drawer 
guide-rails, etc.). 30 (2) Parts that maintain sections that project from the main product (hinges, drawer 
guide-rails, etc.). 
(3) Accessory bolts used to secure or connect a part that meet the Japan Industrial 
Standards (hereinafter referred to as JIS) or its equivalent.  
4. The definition of Recycled paper and The percentage of recycled paper pulp content  
is according to “2. Paper (2) Recycled paper and the percentage of recycled paper pulp 
content” in this Basic Policy. 
5. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.) 
6. Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific analysis 
and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
7.  Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate denotes the plant based material rate of 
weight, which is included in plant based plastics that account for weight of all plastic. 
8.  Discharge rate of no greater than 0.02 mg/m²h, or the equivalent, denotes the 
following. Office furniture-Desks and Tables that fills standard of JIS S 1031, Office 
furniture-Chairs that fills standard of JIS S1032, Shelves and Racks that fills standard 
of JIS S 1039 and Office furniture-Storage cabinets that fills standard of JIS S 1033 
meet its criteria. 
a. Wood material with a corresponding JIS or Japan Agricultural Standards, whose 
criteria for formaldehyde discharge is regulated, meets the criteria for F. 
b. Wood material that do not qualify for the standards outlined in item (a.) above 
satisfies the below numbers when evaluated according to the method determined 
by JIS A1460. 
Average Maximum 
0.5 mg/L 0.7 mg/L 
9.  Evaluation criteria 3b applies to items subject to Clean Wood Act. 
10.  As for evaluation criteria 4c, in cases other than items subject to the Clean Wood Act, 
does not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces such as obtained from plywood or lumber 
factories, material left over from forestry or lumber with a small diameter. 
11. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest where pulpwood 
producing wood and paper originates from is as follows. 
a. In the case of items subject to Clean Wood Act, Wood-related Entities comply with 
Clean Wood Act, and conducted in accordance with the Forest Agency’s 
“Guideline for Verification on Legality and Sustainability of Wood and Wood 
Products (February 15, 2006) .” 
b. In the case of items other than subject to Clean Wood Act, to be conducted in 
accordance with the above Guideline. In addition, certification system of forest, 
timber, etc. by prefectures etc. can be utilized for confirmation of legality. 
Regarding raw timber where the contract between the lumber company and the 
processing and marketing companies has been made prior to April 1, 2006, a supplier 
who owns raw materials or products etc. as of April 1, 2006, specifies the raw 
materials or products etc., and reports them in advance to the Forestry Agency once a 31 year, and is a specified raw material or product etc. If it is stated in the certificate, the 
proof that it is a legal wood prescribed in the above guidelines is unnecessary. 
The period of time for which this exceptional clause is applicable will be determined 
in consideration with market trend. 
 
 
 
Table 1: Function weight criteria for bookcase shelves and office storage furniture shelves 
comprised primarily of metal 
Categories Criteria 
Shelves of storage furniture (excluding those for special 
purposes such as medical chart storage) 0.1 
Shelves of bookcases, lightweight shelving systems, and 
mid-weight shelving systems 0.1 
Notes: 
The formula for calculating the function weight criteria to use for shelves is as follows: 
Function weight criteria = shelf weight (kg) / shelf resistance load (kg) 
 
 
Table 2: Items for environmentally conscious design concerning bookcases and storage 
furniture comprised primarily of metal 
Purpose Evaluation items Evaluation criteria 
Design with 
consideration for 
reduction Reduction of raw material use Use of raw material is reduced. 
Reduction of weight, use of 
light-weight material Reduction of weight, use of light-weight 
material is taken into consideration for 
parts and material. 
Design with 
consideration for 
recycling Use of recyclable material Material that can be recycled is used. 
Consideration for the ease of 
separating and dismantling 
reusable parts Assembly takes into consideration the 
ease of separating and dismantling 
reusable parts. 
All other parts can be easily taken apart. 
Use as recycled resource Material used in the synthetic resin 
portion is listed. 
Design takes into consideration 
separation of material. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of goods of a certain type that meet the criteria, to the total number of 
goods of that type to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
  32 5. Imaging Equipment, etc. 
5-1.Copiers, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Copiers 
 
Multifunction 
devices  
 
Upgradeable 
digital copiers Evaluation Criteria 
<Common Criteria> 
(1) The papers which meet the criteria for specified procurement goods 
are acceptable if the papers belong to the specified procurement items. 
(2) Fulfills one of the following. 
a. Copiers, multifunction devices, and upgradeable digital copiers   
(hereinafter referred to as copiers, etc.) with consideration for 
reuse. 
b. Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the 
standard content rate. 
(3) At least one of the parts more than 25g is made of recycled plastic 
parts or reused plastic parts. 
(4) Systems for the collection of used device, recovery of parts and/or 
material recycling are put in place. In addition, for parts that cannot be 
reused or recycled from the collected equipment, after being reduced 
etc., they are properly processed and not simply landfilled. 
  
<Individual Criteria> 
1. Copiers and Upgradeable digital copiers (including Copiers and 
Upgradeable digital copiers with consideration for reuse.) 
a. Monochrome copiers and upgradeable digital monochrome 
copiers (excluding large format devices) meet the standards of the 
applicable category in Table 1-1. 
b. Color copiers and upgradeable digital color copiers (excluding 
large format devices) meet the standards of the applicable category 
in Table 1-2. 
c. Large format copiers or upgradeable large format digital copiers 
meet the standards of the applicable category in Table 1-3. 
2. Multifunction devices (excluding inkjet type.) 
a. Monochrome multifunction devices (excluding large format 
devices) meet standards of the applicable category in Tables 2-1, 3 
and 4.  
b. Color multifunction devices (excluding large format devices) meet 
standards of the applicable category in Table 2-2, Tables 3 and 4. 
c. Large format multifunction devices meet standards of the 
applicable category in Table 5. 
d. Monochrome multifunction devices and professional 
monochrome multifunction devices with consideration for reuse 
(excluding large format devices.) meet standards of the applicable 
category shown in Table 6-1. 
e. Color multifunction devices and professional color multifunction 
devices (excluding large format devices.) meet standards of the 
applicable category shown in Table 6-2. 
f. Large format multifunction devices with consideration for reuse, 33 meet standards of the applicable category shown in Table 1-3. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Batteries do not include cadmium alloys, zinc alloys, or mercury 
alloys. This requirement does not have to be met, if batteries including 
these substances are collected, reused, or recycled without failure, 
and/or properly processed. 
(2) Design takes into consideration the reuse of components, based on the 
evaluation criteria of the Act on the Promotion of Effective Utilization 
of Resources. Especially, if the components include rare metals, 
reusing them should be taken into consideration when designing the 
products. 
(3) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment and reuse. 
. 
(4) Paper-saver features are equipped. 
(5) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
(6)  A system for collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Multifunction Devices denote products that have one or more function of print, 
scan, or fax in addition to copier function. 
2. Professional Multifunction Devices means devices that satisfy all of the 
following items (a) to (f), and among the following items related to functions (g) 
to (m), meet five or more for color devices, four or more for monochrome device. 
a. Supports paper with basis weight greater than or equal to 141g m2 
b. A3 - capable 
c. If product is monochrome, monochrome product speed equal to or 
greater than 86 imp (for the product speed, see Note 1 in Table 1-1 
below) 
d. If product is color, color product speed equal to or greater than 50 ipm 
e. Print resolution of 600 x 600 dots per inch or greater for each color 
f. Weight of the base model greater than 180kg 
g. Paper capacity equal to or greater than 8,000 sheets 
h. Digital front end 
i. Hole punch 
j. Perfect binding or ring binding (or similar, such as tape or wire binding, 
but not staple saddle stitching 
k. Dynamic random access memory(DRAM)equal to or greater than 
1,024MB 
l. Third party color certification 
m. Compatible with coated paper 
3.Copiers, etc. with consideration for reuse denotes those machines created through a 
system for which reuse is accounted for during manufacture, and refers to 
Reproducing machines and Partial reuse type machine.  34 Reproducing machines denotes products that are produced by disassembling, 
cleaning, and repairing used products, replacing those parts that are not of the 
same quality as a new one or do not meet a set criteria, and assembling them on 
an exclusive line.  
Partial reuse type machine denotes products that are produced by disassembling, 
cleaning, and repairing used products, and assembling those parts that can be 
guaranteed the same quality as a new one on an assembly line that is the 
equivalent of a new product. 
4. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, 
polybrominated biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
5. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard 
rate provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical 
substances for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified 
chemical substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for 
calculation, and standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the 
standard is allowed are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the 
above JIS. Handling of other accessories is to be determined in accordance with JIS 
C 0950. 
6. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or 
the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.). 
7. For evaluation criteria <common items> (3) , apply to devices that fall under the 
Specified Reuse Industry of the Resource Effective Utilization Promotion Act. 
8. Material recycling denotes recycling materials into materials. It does not include 
energy recovery, degradation to oil, gasification, use as feedstock of reduction 
reaction in the blast-furnace and of coke furnace. 
9. Large format devices include those designed for A2 size media and larger, including 
those designed to accommodate continuous-form media at a width of 406 
millimeters (mm) or wider. 
10. Rare metals refers to the 31 types of metals (the seventeen rare earth elements are 
considered as one metal type) specified at the Special Meeting for the 
Comprehensive Assessment of Rare Metals at the Mining Panel of the Ministry of 
Economy, Trade and Industry. 
11. Copiers, etc. with consideration for reuse may not be guaranteed to have a stable 
product supply, due to the fact that their production involves recovery of used 
material, which is supplied to its production only after a strict quality inspection. For 
the purposes of procurement in the case where each organization requires bidding 
conditions other than the fact that it is a specified procurement, it is necessary to 
make a note of (2) a and b in the Common Criteria. 
12. For the procurement of copiers, etc. that involves consumables that is comprised of 
an independent toner container, and when it fulfills Evaluation Criteria (5) of “toner 
cartridge” titled “Chemical safety of toner is confirmed,” they will be handled in the 
same way as specified procurements. 
13. As for Evaluation Criteria <Common Criteria> (1), as a precondition, papers are 
required not to have negative effect on the machine, and are able to be used for the 
print quality without trouble. 35 14. Due to the considerable amount of time necessary until the recovery of used 
products, individual criteria for copiers, etc. with consideration for reuse will be 
considered specified procurements if they fulfill appropriate criteria outlined in 
Tables 6-1 to 6-6.  This is until products that fulfill criteria will be supplied in the 
market outlines in Tables 1-1, 1-2. The time period will be determined based on the 
observation of the market trends. 
15. Regarding the criteria for power consumption, etc., in evaluation criteria (1) 
<Individual Criteria> for Multifunction devices, transitional measures shall be 
provided for one year in the fiscal year of 2020 and during this period, “Basic Policy 
on Promoting Green Procurement policy on “Multifunction devices” (determined by 
the Cabinet on February 8, 2019) shall be regarded as satisfying the corresponding 
evaluation criteria by satisfying the criteria such as the amount of power 
consumption, etc. 
 
 
 
 
Table 1-1: Standards for Energy Consumption for Monochrome copiers and 
Upgradeable digital monochrome copiers (including Copiers and Upgradeable digital 
copiers with consideration for reuse, excluding large format devices) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm 5 0.3 
Not applied 5 < ipm 20  0.04 × ipm+0.1 
20 < ipm 24  0.06 × ipm-0.3 24 < ipm 30 Integral to the base product 
or optional accessory 30 < ipm <37  0.11 × ipm-1.8 37  ipm 40 
Integral to the base product 40 < ipm 65  0.16 × ipm-3.8 
65 < ipm 90  0.2 × ipm-6.4 
90 < ipm  0.55 × ipm-37.9 
Notes: 
1. Product speed is the maximum, nominal, and one side print speed when the black and 
white image is generated, and the ipm speed calculated in all cases is rounded off to the 
nearest integer. 1ipm (number of images for each amount) is equal to single A4 size or 
8.5” x 11” sheet printed on one side. If the maximum claimed speeds differ when 
producing images on A4 size or 8.5” x 11” paper the higher of two shall be used. Same 
applies for all Tables except Table7 below. 
2. Products for A3-capable (Standard format products with a paper path width equal to or 
greater than 275 mm.) are a 0.3kWh/wk allowance standards of the applicable 
category in the Tables. Same applies for Tables 1-2, 6-1, and 6-2 below. 
3. Measuring method for standard energy consumption shall be measured in accordance 
with “International ENERGY STAR Program Requirements, Product Specification for 
Imaging Equipment, Eligibility Criteria Version 2.0.” Same applies for Tables 1-2, 6-1 
and 6-2 below. 
 
 36 Table 1-2: Standards for Energy Consumption for Color copiers and Upgradeable 
digital color copiers (including Copiers and Upgradeable digital copiers with 
consideration for reuse, excluding large format devices) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm  10  1.3 
Not applied 10 < ipm  15  0.06×ipm+0.7 
15 < ipm  19  0.15×ipm-0.65 19 < ipm  30 Integral to the base product 
or optional accessory  30 < ipm <35  0.2×ipm-2.15 35  ipm 75 Integral to the base product  75 < ipm  0.7×ipm-39.65 
 
 
 
Table 1-3 : Standards for Time required to switch into sleep, Energy consumption of 
base marking engine at sleep and Energy consumption at standby for Large format 
copiers and Large format upgradeable digital copiers (including Large format copiers 
and Large format multifunction devices with consideration for reuse.) 
Product speed 
(ipm) Time required to 
switch into sleep Energy consumption 
of base marking 
engine at sleep Energy consumption at 
standby 
ipm 30 30 minutes  8.2W  0.5W 30 < ipm 60 minutes 
Notes:  
1. Sleep denotes the energy saving mode into which the machine will switch after a set 
time of inactivity without turning off the power. Same applies for Tables 3, 4, 5 and 7 
below. 
2. The standard of the power consumption at sleep is calculated, adding the sleep mode 
power allowances for functional adders listed in Table 7 to the energy consumption of 
base marking engine at sleep in this table, to judge to meet the standard. 
3. Measuring method for energy consumption shall be measured in accordance with 
“International ENERGY STAR Program Product Requirements, Product Specification 
for Imaging Equipment, Eligibility Criteria Version 2.0.” 
 
 
 
  37 Table2-1 : Standard energy consumption for Monochrome multifunction devices 
 (excluding large format devices) 
Product speed(ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm20 0.263 Not applied  20<ipm24 0.018×ipm-0.115 24<ipm40 Integral to the base product 
and print function is initial 
setting 40<ipm60 0.016×ipm-0.033 
60<ipm80 0.037×ipm-1.314 
80<ipm 0.086×ipm-5.283 
Notes: 
1. For products that can handle A3 size paper, 0.05kWh is added to the standard for each 
category. Same applies for Table 2-2. 
2. For products set with Wi-Fi at the time of shipment, the standard for each category will 
be added 0.1 kWh to the standard. Same applies for Table 2-2. 
3. The method for measuring the standard power consumption is based on “International 
Energy Star Program Requirements Product Standards for Imaging Equipment Test 
Methods for Judging Energy Use of Imaging Equipment” (revised in December 2018). 
Same applies for Table 2-2. 
 
 
 
Table2-2 : Standard energy consumption for Color multifunction devices (excluding 
Large format devices.) 
Product speed(ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm19 0.254 Not applied 
ipm=20 
Integral to the base product 
and print function is initial 
setting 20<ipm40 0.024×ipm-0.250 
40<ipm60 0.011×ipm+0.283 
60<ipm80 0.055×ipm-2.401 
80<ipm 0.118×ipm-7.504 
 
  38 Table 3 : Standard for recovery time 
Product 
speed 
(ipm) Short default  Long default 
Time to 
sleep 
Ts(minute) Recovery time 
(second) Time to 
sleep(minute) Recovery time (second) 
0<ipm5 0<Ts5 
min(0.42×ipm+5,30) 5<Ts 
min(0.51×ipm+15,60) 5<ipm10 0<Ts10 10<Ts15 
10<ipm20 0<Ts10 10<Ts20 
20<ipm30 0<Ts10 10<Ts30 
30<ipm40 0<Ts10 10<Ts45 
40<ipm 0<Ts15 15<Ts45 
1.  Recovery time(second)Tact1|Tact0 
 
Table4: Standards for Time to sleep for Monochrome multifunction devices or Color 
multifunction devices 
Product speed
iipmj Time required to switch into 
sleep 
Initial setting User 
adjustment  
ipm10 15min 
60min 10<ipm20 30min 
20<ipm30 45min 30<ipm 120min 
Note: 
User adjustment is the maximum sleep transition time that can be adjusted by the user. Same 
applies for Table 5. 
Table5 : Standard for Time required to switch into sleep, Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep and Energy Consumption at off mode 
Product speed
iipmj Time required to 
switch into sleep  Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep Energy 
consumption 
at off mode  
 Initial 
setting  User 
adjustment Inkjet Other marking 
technology 
ipm10 15min 
60min 5.4W 8.7W 0.3W 10<ipm20 30min 
20<ipm30 45min 30<ipm 120min 
Notes: 
1. Other marking technology refers to a marking technology other than the impact method 
and the inkjet method. 
2. The standard of the sleep mode power consumption is to use the value calculated by 
adding the sleep mode power consumption allowable value for the additional functions 
in Table 7 to the sleep mode power consumption of the basic marking engine in this 
table for the conformity determination. However, among the types of additional 39 functions in Table 7, the addition of the sleep mode power consumption allowances are 
not applied to the scanner and the internal disk drive. 
3. The method of measuring power consumption is based on “International ENERGY 
STAR PROGRAM Requirements Product Standards for Imaging Equipment Test 
Methods for Judging Energy Use of Imaging Equipment” (revised in December 2018). 
 
 
 
Table 6-1 : Standards for energy consumption for Monochrome multifunction devices 
and Color multifunction devices for professional use for copiers with consideration for 
reuse (excluding large format devices) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm 5 0.4 Not applied 5 < ipm 24 0.07×ipm+0.05 24 < ipm 30 Integral to the base product 
or optional accessory 30 < ipm <37 0.11×ipm-1.15 37  ipm 50 Integral to the base  
Product 50 < ipm 80 0.25×ipm-8.15 
80 < ipm 0.6×ipm-36.15 
 
 
 
  40 Table 6-2: Standards for energy consumption for Color multifunction devices for 
professional use for copiers with consideration for reuse (excluding large format 
devices) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm  10 1.5 
Not applied 10 <ipm 15 0.1×ipm+0.5 
15 <ipm 19 0.13×ipm+0.05 19 <ipm 30 Integral to the base product 
or optional accessory 30 <ipm <35 0.2×ipm-2.05 35 ipm 70 
Integral to the base product 70 <ipm 80 0.7×ipm-37.05 
80 < ipm 0.75×ipm-41.05 
 
 
 
Table 7: Sleep mode power allowances for added functionality 
Adder 
Type Connection 
Type Max. Data 
Rate, r 
(Mbit/ 
second) Details Functional 
Adder 
Allowance 
(watts) 
Interface Wired r < 20 Includes: USB 1.x, IEEE 
488, IEEE 1284/Parallel/ 
Centronics, RS232  0.2 
20 ≤ r < 500 Includes: USB 2.x, IEEE 
1394/ FireWire/i.LINK, 
100Mb Ethernet  0.4 
r ≥ 500 Includes: USB 3.x,1G 
Ethernet  0.5 
Any Includes: Flash 
memory-card/smartcard 
readers, camera interfaces, 
PictBridge  0.2 
Fax Modem Any Applies to MFDs only. 0.2 
Wireless, 
Radio-frequ
ency (RF) Any Includes: Bluetooth, 802.11  2.0 
Wireless, 
Infrared (IR) Any Includes: IrDA.  0.1 
Cordless 
Handset N/A N/A Capability of the Imaging 
Equipment to communicate 
with a cordless handset. 
Applied only once, 
regardless of the number of 
cordless handsets the 
product is designed to 0.8 41 handle. Does not address the 
power requirements of the 
cordless handset itself. 
Memory N/A  N/A  Applies to the internal 
capacity available in the 
Imaging Equipment for 
storing data. Applies to all 
volumes of internal memory 
and should be scaled 
accordingly for RAM. This 
adder does not apply to hard 
disk or flash memory.  0.5/GB  
Scanner N/A  N/A  Applies to MFDs and 
Copiers only. Includes: Cold 
Cathode Fluorescent Lamp 
(CCFL) or a technology 
other than CCFL, such as 
Light-Emitting Diode 
(LED), Halogen, 
Hot-Cathode Fluorescent 
Tube (HCFT), Xenon, or 
Tubular Fluorescent (TL) 
technologies. (Applied only 
once, regardless of the lamp 
size or the number of 
lamps/bulbs employed.)  0.5  
Power 
Supply N/A  N/A  Applies to both internal and 
external power supplies of 
Mailing Machines and 
Standard Format products 
using Inkjet and Impact 
marking technologies with 
nameplate output power 
(POUT) greater than 10 
watts.  0.02 x (POUT 
– 10.0) 
Touch 
Panel 
Display N/A  N/A  Applies to both 
monochrome and color 
touch panel displays.  0.2  
Internal 
Disk 
Drives N/A  N/A  Includes any high-capacity 
storage product, including 
hard-disk and solid-state 
drives. Does not cover 
interfaces to external drives.  0.15  
Notes: Among adder type, the number of allowances claimed for interface functional adders, 
including any fax capability is 2 or less including fax machines and the number of allowances 
of any non-interface functional adders is unlimited. 
 
 42  
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of copiers (including multifunctional devices and upgradeable digital 
copiers) that meets the criteria, to the total number of copiers to be purchased (including 
lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  43 5-2. Printers, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Printers 
 
Multifunction 
Printers Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Printers and Multifunction Printers (excluding large format 
devices) meet the standards of applicable category below. 
a. Monochrome printers (including high performance inkjet 
and excluding inkjet and impact printers) meet the 
standards of applicable category in Tables 1-1, 2, and 3-1. 
Monochrome multifunction printers meet the standards of 
applicable category in Tables 1-2, 2 and 3-2. 
b. Color printers (including high performance inkjet and 
excluding inkjet and impact printers) meet the standards 
of applicable category in Tables 2, 3-1 and 4-1. Color 
multifunction color printers meet the standards of 
applicable category in Tables 2, 3-2 and 4-2. 
c. Inkjet and Impact printers meet the standards of 
applicable category in Table 5-1. Inkjet multifunction 
printers meet the standards of applicable category in Table 
5-2. 
d. Monochrome printers for professional use meet the 
standards applicable category in Table 6-1. Multifunction 
monochrome printers for professional use meet the 
standards applicable category in Table 6-2. 
e. Color printers for professional use meet the standards 
applicable category in Table 6-3. Multifunction color 
printers for professional use meet the standards applicable 
category in Table 6-4. 
(2) Large format printers meet the standards of applicable 
category in Table 7-1, large format multifunction printers 
meet the standards of applicable category in Table 7-2. 
(3) The papers which meet the criteria for specified procurement 
goods are acceptable if the papers belong to the specified 
procurement items. 
(4) Amounts of specified chemical substances do not exceed the 
standard content rate. 
(5) At least one of the parts made of recycled plastic parts or 
reused plastic parts are used. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) Batteries do not include cadmium alloys, lead alloys, or 
mercury alloys. This is not required, however, if batteries 
including these substances are collected, reused, or recycled 
without failure, and/or properly processed. 
(2) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and 
recycling. 
(3) The item uses a large amount of recycled components that 
have already been used. 44 (4) Has paper-saver feature. 
(5) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environmental 
impact upon disposal. 
(6) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, 
etc. is considered. 
Notes: 
1. Multifunction Printers mean products that have one or more function of copier, scan, 
or fax in addition to print function. 
2. Printers for professional use and Multifunction Printers for professional use means 
devices that satisfy all of the following items (a) to (f), and among the following items 
related to functions (g) to (m), meet five or more for color devices, four or more for 
monochrome device. 
a. Supports paper with basis weight greater than or equal to 141g m2. 
b. A3 - capable 
c. If product is monochrome, monochrome product speed equal to or greater than 
86 imp (for the product speed, see Note 1 in Table 1-1 below) 
d. If product is color, color product speed equal to or greater than 50 ipm 
e. Print resolution of 600 x 600 dots per inch or greater for each color 
f. Weight of the base model greater than 180kg 
g. Paper capacity equal to or greater than 8,000 sheets 
h. Digital front end 
i. Hole punch 
j. Perfect binding or ring binding (or similar, such as tape or wire binding, but 
not staple saddle stitching 
k. Dynamic random access memory(DRAM)equal to or greater than 1,024MB 
l. Third party color certification 
m. For coated paper 
3. Large format devices include those designed for A2 size media and larger, including 
those designed to accommodate continuous-form media at a width of 406 millimeters 
(mm) or wider. 
4. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
5. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. 
6. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
7. When the printer to be procured includes consumables comprised of a single toner 
container, or a single ink container and fulfills the Evaluation Criteria (5) “The chemical 
safety of toner is confirmed” or “The chemical safety of ink is confirmed” in 5-6 45 Cartridges, etc., Toner Cartridge of the Basic Policy, it shall be treated as designated 
procurement goods, etc. 
8. As for Evaluation Criteria (3), as a precondition, papers are required not to have 
negative effect on the machine, and are able to be used for the print quality without 
trouble. 
9. Evaluation criteria (5) does not apply to impact printers and multifunction printers. 
10. Regarding the criteria of energy consumption of (1) and (2), the transition period shall 
be applied for one year in the fiscal year of 2020, and during this period, the "Basic 
Policy on Promoting Green Procurement" (Cabinet decision on February 8, 2019), 
which satisfies such as power consumption of the Evaluation criteria (1) and (2) for 
printers and multifunction printers. 
 
 
 
Table1-1 : Standard energy consumption for Monochrome printers (excluding Inkjet 
printers, Impact printers and Large format printers.) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm20 0.226 Not applied 20<ipm24 0.018×ipm-0.152 24<ipm40 Integral to the base product 
and print function is initial 
setting 40<ipm60 0.025×ipm-0.439 
60<ipm135 0.049×ipm-1.903 
135<ipm 0.183×ipm-20.127 
Notes: 
1. Product speed is the maximum, nominal, and one side print speed when the black 
and white image is generated, and the ipm speed calculated in all cases is rounded 
off to the nearest integer. 1ipm (number of images for each amount) is equal to 
single A4 size or 8.5” x 11” sheet printed on one side. If the maximum claimed 
speeds differ when producing images on A4 size or 8.5” x 11” paper the higher of 
two shall be used. Same applies for all Tables except Table 8 below. 
2. Products for A3-capable are 0.3 kWh/wk allowance standards of the applicable 
category in the Tables. Same applies for Tables 1-2, 4-1, and 4-2 below. 
3. For products set with Wi-Fi at the time of shipment, the standard for each category 
will be added 0.1 kWh to the standard. Same applies for Tables 1-2,4-1, and 4-2 
below 
4. The measuring method for the standard power consumption is based on 
“International ENERGY STAR PROGRAM Requirements Product Standards for 
Imaging Equipment Requirements for Imaging Equipment Test Methods for 
Judging Energy Use of Imaging Equipment” (revised in December 2018). Same 
applies for Tables 1-2, 4-1, 4-2and Tables 6-1 to 6-4. 
 
 46 Table 1-2: Standard energy consumption for Monochrome Multifunction printers 
(excluding Inkjet printers, Impact printers and Large format printers.) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm20 0.263 Not applied 20<ipm24 0.018×ipm-0.115 24<ipm40 Integral to the base product 
and print function is initial 
setting 40<ipm60 0.016×ipm-0.033 
60<ipm80 0.037×ipm-1.314 
80<ipm 0.086×ipm-5.283 
 
 
 
Table 2: Standard for Recovery time 
Product 
speed 
(ipm) Short default  Long default 
Time to 
sleep 
Ts(minute) Recovery time 
(second) Time to 
sleep(minute) Recovery time (second) 
0<ipm5 0<Ts5 
min(0.42×ipm+5,30) 5<Ts 
min(0.51×ipm+15,60) 5<ipm10 0<Ts10 10<Ts15 
10<ipm20 0<Ts10 10<Ts20 
20<ipm30 0<Ts10 10<Ts30 
30<ipm40 0<Ts10 10<Ts45 
40<ipm 0<Ts15 15<Ts45 
1. Sleep denotes the energy saving mode into which the machine will switch after a set time 
of inactivity without turning off the power. Same as Tables 3-1, 3-2, 5-1, 5-2, 7-1, 7-2 and 
8 below.Recovery time : the time it takes for a device to return from a sleep or off mode 
to a ready state. The calculation method is as follows.Recovery time(second)Tact1-Tact0 
Tact1: Time (seconds) from sleep mode until the first sheet is ejected from the device 
Tact0: Time (seconds) from the ready state until the first sheet is ejected from the device 
3. In this table, min (A, B) is the minimum function and represents the smaller value of A and 
B. For example, the reference min (0.42 × ipm + 5, 30) of the recovery time in the short 
initial setting is a smaller value of either “0.42 × ipm + 5 seconds or 30 seconds”. 
4. There is no provision for a recovery time for products that exceed the long default sleep 
transition time (Ts). 
 
Table3-1: Standards for time to sleep for Monochrome printers or Color printers 
(including High-performance inkjet printers, excluding Inkjet printers and Impact 
printers.) 
Product speed
iipmj Time required to switch into sleep 
Initial setting User adjustment  47 ipm10 15min 
60min 10<ipm20 30min 
20<ipm30 45min 30<ipm 120min 
Note: 
User adjustment is the maximum sleep transition time that can be adjusted by the user. Same 
applies for Tables 3-2, 5-1, 7-1 and 7-2. 
 
 
 
Table3-2: Standard for Time required to switch into sleep for Monochrome 
multifunction printers or Color multifunction printers (including High-performance 
inkjet printers, excluding Inkjet printers and Impact printers.) 
Product speed
iipmj Time required to switch into sleep  
Initial setting  User adjustment 
ipm10 15min 
60min 10<ipm20 30min 
20<ipm30 45min 30<ipm 120min 
 
 
 
Table4-1: Standard Energy Consumption for Color printers (excluding Inkjet printers 
and Impact printers.) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards (kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm19 0.254 Not applied 
ipm20 
Integral to the base product 
and print function is initial 
setting 20<ipm40 0.024×ipm-0.250 
40<ipm60 0.011×ipm+0.283 
60<ipm80 0.055×ipm-2.401 
80<ipm 0.118×ipm-7.504 
 
 
 
Table5-1 : Standard for Time required to switch into sleep, Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep and Energy consumption at off mode for Inkjet printers and 
Impact printers (excluding Large format printers.) 
Product speed 
(ipm) Time required to switch into 
sleep Energy 
consumption of 
base marking 
engine at sleep Energy 
consumption at 
off mode  
 Initial setting User 
adjustment 
ipm10 5 min 60 min 0.6W 0.3W 48 10<ipm0 15 min 
20<ipm30 30 min 
30<ipm 45 min 120 min 
Notes 
1. The standard of the sleep mode power consumption is to use the value calculated by 
adding the sleep mode power consumption allowable value for the additional functions 
in Table 7 to the sleep mode power consumption of the basic marking engine in this 
table for the conformity determination. 
2. The method of measuring power consumption is based on “International ENERGY 
STAR Program Requirements Product Standards for Imaging Equipment Test Methods 
for Judging Energy Use of Imaging Equipment” (revised in December 2018). 
 
 
 
Table5-2 : Standard for Time required to switch into sleep, Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep and Energy consumption at off mode for Multifunction printers 
and Multifunction impact printers (excluding Large format printers.) 
Product 
Speed(ipm) Time required to switch into 
sleep Energy 
consumption of 
base marking 
engine at sleep Energy 
consumption at 
off mode  
 
ipm10 15min 
60min 1.1W 0.3W 10<ipm20 30min 
20<ipm30 45min 30<ipm 120min 
 
 
 
Table6-1 : Standard Energy Power Consumption for Professional Monochrome Printers 
Product Speed(ipm) Standard(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
85<ipm90 0.2×ipm-6.4 Integral to the base product  90<ipm 0.55×ipm-37.9 
Note: 
For products that can handle A3 size paper, 0.05kWh is added to the standard for each 
category. Same applies for Tables 6-2, 6-3 and 6-4. 
 
Table6-2 : Standard Energy Power Consumption for Professional Monochrome 
Multifunction Printers 
Product Speed(ipm) Standard(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
85<ipm 0.6×ipm-36.15 Integral to the base product 
 
 49  
Table6-3 : Standard Energy Power Consumption for Professional Color Printers 
Product Speed(ipm) Standard(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
49<ipm75 0.2×ipm-2.15 Integral to the base product 75<ipm 0.7×ipm-39.65 
 
 
 
Table6-4 : Standard Energy Power Consumption for Professional Color Multifunction 
Printers 
Product Speed(ipm) Standard(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
49<ipm70 0.2×ipm-2.05 
Integral to the base product 70<ipm80 0.7×ipm-37.05 
80<ipm 0.75×ipm-41.05 
 
 
 
Table7-1: Standard for Time required to switch into sleep, Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep and Energy consumption at off mode for Large format Printers 
Product 
Speed(ipm) Time required to 
switch into sleep Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep Energy 
consumption 
at off mode  
 Initial 
setting  User 
adjustment Inkjet Other marking 
technology 
ipm10 5min 
60min 4.9W 2.5W 0.3W 10<ipm20 15min 
20<ipm30 30min 
30<ipm 45min 120min 
Note: 
Other marking technology refers to a marking technology other than the ink jet method. 
Same applies for Table7-2 
 
 
 
Table7-2 : Standard for Time required to switch into sleep, Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep and Energy consumption at off mode for Large format 
multifunction Printers 
Product 
Speed(ipm) Time required to 
switch into sleep Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep Energy 
consumption 
at off mode  
 Initial 
setting  User 
adjustment Inkjet Other marking 
technology 
ipm10 15min 60min 5.4W 8.7W 0.3W 50 10<ipm20 30min 
20<ipm30 45min 30<ipm 120min 
 
 
 
Table 8 : Sleep Mode Power Allowances for Added Functionality 
Adder 
Type Connection 
Type Max. Data 
Rate, r 
(Mbit/ 
second) Details Functional 
Adder 
Allowance 
(watts) 
 
Interface 
 
 Wired r < 20 Includes: USB 1.x, IEEE 488, 
IEEE 1284/Parallel/ Centronics, 
RS232 0.2 
20 ≤ r < 500 Includes: USB 2.x, IEEE 1394/ 
FireWire/i.LINK, 100Mb 
Ethernet 0.4 
r ≥ 500 Includes: USB 3.x,1G Ethernet 0.5 
Any Includes: Flash 
memory-card/smartcard readers, 
camera interfaces, PictBridge 0.2 
Fax Modem Any Applies to MFDs only. 0.2 
Wireless, 
Radio-frequ
ency (RF) Any Includes: Bluetooth, 802.11 2.0 
Wireless, 
Infrared (IR) Any Includes: IrDA. 0.1 
Cordless 
Handset N/A N/A Capability of the Imaging 
Equipment to communicate with 
a cordless handset. Applied only 
once, regardless of the number 
of cordless handsets the product 
is designed to handle. Does not 
address the power requirements 
of the cordless handset itself. 0.8 
Memory N/A N/A Applies to the internal capacity 
available in the Imaging 
Equipment for storing data. 
Applies to all volumes of 
internal memory and should be 
scaled accordingly for RAM. 
This adder does not apply to 
hard disk or flash memory. 0.5/GB  
Power 
Supply N/A N/A Applies to both internal and 
external power supplies of 
Mailing Machines and Standard 0.02 x 
(POUT – 
10.0)  51 Format products using Inkjet and 
Impact marking technologies 
with nameplate output power 
(POUT) greater than 10 watts. 
Touch 
Panel 
Display N/A N/A Applies to both monochrome 
and color touch panel displays. 0.2  
Notes: Among adder type, the number of allowances claimed for interface functional adders, 
including any fax capability is 2 or less and the number of allowances of any non-interface 
functional adders is unlimited. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of printers and multifunction printers meeting the criteria to the total 
number of printer/faxes to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  52 5-3. Fax Machines 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Fax machines Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Monochrome fax machines (excluding inkjet types) meet the standards 
of appropriate category listed in Table 1. 
(2) Color fax machines (excluding inkjet types) meet the standards of 
appropriate category listed in Table 2. 
(3) Inkjet type fax machines meet the standards listed in Table 3 
(4) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the standard 
content rate. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) Batteries do not include cadmium alloys, zinc alloys, or mercury 
alloys. This is not required, however, if batteries including these 
substances are collected, reused, or recycled without failure, and/or 
properly processed. 
(2) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment and reuse. 
(3) The item uses a large amount of recycled components that have 
already been used, and uses as large amount of recycled plastic as 
possible if plastic components are used. 
(4) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(5) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:  
1. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
2. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. 
3. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
 
 
  53 Table 1: Standards for standard energy consumption for monochrome fax machines 
(excluding inkjet type machine) 
Product speed(ipm) Standard(kWh) 
ipm 5 0.3 
5 < ipm 20  0.04× ipm+0.1 
20 < ipm 30  0.06× ipm-0.3 
30 < ipm 40  0.11× ipm-1.8 
40 < ipm 65  0.16× ipm-3.8 
65 < ipm 90  0.2× ipm-6.4 
90 < ipm  0.55× ipm-37.9 
Notes: 
1. Product speed is the maximum, nominal, and one side print speed when the black and 
white image is generated, and the ipm speed calculated in all cases is rounded off to the 
nearest integer. 1ipm (number of images for each amount) is equal to single A4 size or 
8.5” ×11” sheet printed on one side. If the maximum claimed speeds differ when 
producing images on A4 size or 8.5” × 11” paper the higher of two shall be used. Same 
applies for Table 2 below. 
2. Products for A3-capable (Standard format products with a paper path width equal to or 
greater than 275 mm) are a 0.3 kWh/wk allowance standards of the applicable 
category in the Tables. Same applies for Table 2 below. 
3. Measuring method for standard energy consumption shall be measured in accordance 
with “International ENERGY STAR Program Requirements, Product Specification for 
Imaging Equipment, Eligibility Criteria Version 2.0.” Same applies for Tables 2 and 3 
below. 
 
 
 
Table 2: Standards for standard energy consumption for color fax machines (excluding 
inkjet type machines) 
Product speed (ipm) Standard(kWh) 
ipm 10 1.3 
10 < ipm 15 0.06×ipm+0.7 
15 < ipm 30 0.15×ipm-0.65 
30 < ipm 75 0.2×ipm-2.15 
75 < ipm 0.7×ipm-39.65 
 
 
 
  54 Table 3: Standards for default time to sleep, energy consumption of base marking 
engine at Sleep mode and energy consumption at standby for inkjet fax machines 
Default time to 
sleep  Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep mode Energy consumption 
at standby 
5 minutes  0.6W  0.5W 
Notes: 
1. Sleep denotes the energy saving mode into which the machine will switch after a set 
time of inactivity without turning off the power. 
2. The standard of the power consumption at sleep mode is calculated, adding the sleep 
mode power allowances for functional adders listed in Table 4 to the energy 
consumption of base marking engine at sleep mode in this table, to judge to meet the 
standard.  
 
 
 
Table 4: Sleep Mode Power Allowances for Functional Adders 
Adder 
Type Connection 
Type Max. Data 
Rate, r 
(Mbit/ 
second) Details Functional 
Adder 
Allowance 
(watts) 
Interface Wired r < 20 Includes: USB 1.x, IEEE 488, 
IEEE 1284/Parallel/ 
Centronics, RS232 0.2 
20 ≤ r < 500 Includes: USB 2.x, IEEE 1394/ 
FireWire/i.LINK, 100Mb 
Ethernet 0.4 
r ≥ 500 Includes: USB 3.x, 1G Ethernet 0.5 
Any Includes: Flash 
memory-card/smartcard 
readers, camera interfaces, 
PictBridge 0.2 
Fax Modem Any Applies to Fax Machines only. 0.2 
Wireless, 
Radio-frequ
ency (RF) Any Includes: Bluetooth, 802.11 2.0 
Wireless, 
Infrared (IR) Any Includes: IrDA. 0.1 
Cordless 
Handset N/A N/A Capability of the Imaging 
Equipment to communicate 
with a cordless handset. 
Applied only once, regardless 
of the number of cordless 
handsets the product is 
designed to handle. Does not 
address the power requirements 
of the cordless handset itself. 0.8 
Memory N/A N/A Applies to the internal capacity 
available in the Imaging 0.5/GB  55 Equipment for storing data. 
Applies to all volumes of 
internal memory and should be 
scaled accordingly for RAM. 
This adder does not apply to 
hard disk or flash memory. 
Power 
Supply N/A N/A Applies to both internal and 
external power supplies of 
Mailing Machines and 
Standard Format products 
using Inkjet and Impact 
marking technologies with 
nameplate output power 
(POUT) greater than 10 watts. 0.02 x 
(POUT – 
10.0)  
Touch 
Panel 
Display N/A N/A Applies to both monochrome 
and color touch panel displays. 0.2  
Internal 
Disk 
Drives N/A N/A Includes any high-capacity 
storage product, including 
hard-disk and solid-state drives. 
Does not cover interfaces to 
external drives. 0.15  
Notes: Among adder type, the number of allowances claimed for interface functional adders, 
including any fax capability is 2 or less and the number of allowances of any non-interface 
functional adders is unlimited. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of fax machines meeting the criteria to the total number of fax machines 
to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  56 5-4. Scanners 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Scanners Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Meet the standard of applicable category in Table 1. 
(2) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the standard 
content rate. 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) A system for collection and reuse/recycling of used machines, and a 
system for the proper disposal of components which cannot be reused or 
recycled is considered. 
(2) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and recycling. 
(3) The item uses a large amount of recycled components that have already 
been used, and uses as large amount of recycled plastic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(4) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(5) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:  
1. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
2. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. 
3. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
4. Regarding the criteria of energy consumption of (1) and (2), the transition period shall 
be applied for one year in the fiscal year of 2020, and during this period, the "Basic 
Policy on Promoting Green Procurement" (Cabinet decision on February 8, 2019), 
which satisfies such as power consumption of the Evaluation criteria (1) for scanners. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 57 Table 1: Standards for default time to sleep, energy consumption of base marking 
engine at sleep mode and off mode energy consumption for scanners 
Product speed 
(ipm) Default time to sleep Energy 
consumption of 
base marking 
engine at sleep 
mode 
Energy 
consumption at 
standby Off mode energy 
consumption 
Default time 
to sleep User 
adjustment  
ipm10 15 minutes 
60minutes 2.5W 0.3W 10<ipm20 30minutes 
20<ipm30 45minutes 30<ipm 120minutes 
Notes:  
1. Sleep denotes the energy saving mode into which the machine will switch after a set 
time of inactivity without turning off the power. 
2. User adjustment is maximum time to sleep that can be adjustable by the user. 
3. The standard of the power consumption of base marking engine at sleep mode is 
calculated, adding the sleep mode power allowances for functional adders listed in 
Table 2 to the energy consumption of base marking engine at sleep mode in this table, 
to judge to meet the standard. 
4. Measuring method for standard energy consumption shall be measured in accordance 
with “International ENERGY STAR Program Requirements, Product Specification for 
Imaging Equipment, Eligibility Criteria Version 2.0.”  
 
 
 
Table 2: Sleep mode power allowances for functional adders 
Adder 
Type Connection 
Type Max. Data 
Rate, r 
(Mbit/ 
second) Details Functional 
Adder 
Allowance 
(watts)  
Interface 
 
 Wired r < 20 Includes: USB 1.x, IEEE 488, 
IEEE 1284/Parallel/ Centronics, 
RS232 0.2 
20 ≤ r < 500 Includes: USB 2.x, IEEE 1394/ 
FireWire/i.LINK, 100Mb 
Ethernet 0.4 
r ≥ 500 Includes: USB 3.x,1G Ethernet 0.5 
Any Includes: Flash 
memory-card/smartcard readers, 
camera interfaces, PictBridge 0.2 
Fax Modem Any Applies to Fax Machines and 
MFDs only. 0.2 
Wireless, 
Radio-frequeAny Includes: Bluetooth, 802.11 2.0 58 ncy (RF) 
Wireless, 
Infrared (IR) Any Includes: IrDA. 0.1 
Cordless 
Handset N/A N/A Capability of the Imaging 
Equipment to communicate with 
a cordless handset. Applied only 
once, regardless of the number of 
cordless handsets the product is 
designed to handle. Does not 
address the power requirements 
of the cordless handset itself. 0.8 
Memory N/A N/A Applies to the internal capacity 
available in the Imaging 
Equipment for storing data. 
Applies to all volumes of internal 
memory and should be scaled 
accordingly for RAM. This adder 
does not apply to hard disk or 
flash memory. 0.5/GB  
Power 
Supply N/A N/A Applies to both internal and 
external power supplies of 
Mailing Machines and Standard 
Format products using Inkjet and 
Impact marking technologies 
with nameplate output power 
(POUT) greater than 10 watts. 0.02 x 
(POUT – 
10.0)  
Touch 
Panel 
Display N/A N/A Applies to both monochrome and 
color touch panel displays. 0.2  
Notes: Among adder type, the number of allowances claimed for interface functional adders, 
including any fax capability is 2 or less and the number of allowances of any non-interface 
functional adders is unlimited. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of scanners meeting the criteria to the total number of scanners to be 
purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  59 5-5. Projectors 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Projectors Evaluation Criteria 
(1) The weight of product body shall not exceed the number obtained by 
the formula of applicable category in Note 3. 
(2) The power consumption shall not exceed the number obtained by the 
formula of applicable category in Note 4. 
(3) Standby power consumption shall be 0.4W or less. However, this is not 
applicable on the network latency. 
(4) If a mercury lamp is used as a light source, fulfill the following: 
a. Make it known to users that mercury is used and provide the 
information about appropriate disposal method. 
b. A system is in place for the collection of used lamps or products. 
(5) Supply of the service parts and spare parts shall be continued for 5 years 
or more after the termination of product manufacturing. 
(6) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the standard 
content rate. The content rate can be easily confirmed on websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Time for lamp replacement is 3,000 hours or more. 
(2) Solid state light source should be used for light source lamp as much as 
possible. 
(3) The noise is as low as possible. 
(4) A system for collection and reuse/recycling of used products, and a 
system for the proper disposal of components which cannot be reused 
or recycled is considered. 
(5) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and recycling. 
(6) The use of halogenenate noncombustibles on the casing is as 
minimized as possible. 
(7) If plastic components are used for either the body or the parts, the item 
uses as large amount of recycled plastic as possible,  
(8) Manuals or accessories provided with the product are eliminated as 
much as possible. 
(9) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
(10) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Projectors under consideration in this section refers to those having the computer 
input terminal and possible to project the images on such as computers and front 
projection whose effective flux is under 5,000 lm used in meeting rooms or class 
rooms, including projectors capable to project on the screen with 60 inches (width 1.2 
m) or more in width within a distance of 1 meter (referred to as Short focus projector 
hereinafter, especially, the one within a distance of 0.5m referred to as Super short 
focus projector).  60  
2. Solid state light source refers to a solid device that supplies energy such as electricity to 
a solid (substance) such as a light emitting diode (LED) or a semiconductor laser (LD) 
and emits light peculiar to the substance when excited. 
3. The method of calculating the standard of the weight of product body is as follows. 
Standard of the weight of product body (kg) = 0.0012 × Φ × α × β 
Φ: effective luminous flux (lm) 
¿: 1.5 for an super short focus projector, 1.2 for a short focus projector, 1.0 for 
other ones 
À: 2.0 for a solid state light source, 1.0 for other ones 
4. The calculation method of power consumption standards is as follows. 
Power consumption standard (W) = 0.070 × Φ × α × β + 85 
Φ: effective luminous flux (lm) 
¿: 1.2 for an super short focus projector, 1.1 for a short focus projector, 1.0 for 
other ones 
β: 1.5 for a solid-state light source, 1.0 for other ones 
5. Standby power consumption refers to minimum power consumption at which a product 
may be connected to a main power source and possibly maintained for an indefinite 
period of time without connecting to external devices. Standby is a minimum power 
consumption mode of the product. 
6. Evaluation Criteria (3) does not applies for the products having AC interception device 
and the portable one for mobile use mainly. 
7. Provide the information in Evaluation Criteria (4) a. denotes that specific information 
for use of mercury and appropriate disposal method of a used lamp is provided to the 
user, by indicating on package of the lamp or the product main body, enclosed printed 
material, user’s manual and websites. 
8. A system is in place for the collection in Evaluation Criteria (4) b. denotes the fulfillment 
of the below requirements.  
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a collection system located at the 
store, or collection in response to the user’s request) for voluntarily collecting 
(collecting on its own or commissioning other companies to collect; includes 
situations where multiple businesses undertake the collection together) used lamp 
and the product main body. 
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, the product name and business name 
(manufacturer brand name is permissible) are marked on the lamp and product 
main body for easy acknowledgement at the time of disposal. 
c. Specific information for the collection (collection method, collection location, 
etc.), is provided to the user by either package of the lamp and product main body, 
printed matter, manual or websites concerning used lamp and used product. 
9. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
10. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and 
standard content rate).  Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed 61 are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of 
other accessories is to be determined in accordance with JIS C 0950. 
11. Time for lamp replacement denotes average hours of lamp operating till the 
effective flux when a product is used falls below 50% of the nominal effective flux and 
standard hours to lead a proper lamp replacement. 
12. Recycled Plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.). 
13. Each procurement organization is to take the following into careful account: 
a. When procuring, consider the objective of use and business type in order to 
determine the necessary type and function. 
b. Consider the type of contract that would enable the minimum amount necessary 
for manuals and accessories. 
c. Confirm and consider the factors for consideration specified in the user’s manual 
when procuring the merchandise, when using and disposing. 
d. If a system for the collection of used lamps or products is in pace, proper disposals 
of them should be done by utilizing the system. 
14. The standby power consumption of evaluation criteria (3) shall be applied 
transitional period up to FY 2020 and shall be considered as designated 
procurement goods by not more than 0.5 W during this period. 
 
  
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of products meeting the criteria to the total number of projectors to be 
purchased (including lease or rental) in the fiscal year. 
 
 
  62 5-6. Cartridges, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Toner cartridges Evaluation Criteria 
(1) A system is put in place for the recovery and material recycling 
of used toner cartridges. 
(2) Parts of used and recovered toner cartridges that are reused or 
have undergone material recycling comprises 50% or more by 
total weight of the collected used item (excluding toner). 
(3) Parts of used and recovered toner cartridges whose resources are 
recycled comprise 95% or more by total weight of the collected 
used item (excluding toner). 
(4) Parts cannot be reused or recycled from the collected used toner 
cartridges, after being reduced etc., they are properly processed 
and not simply landfilled. 
(5) Chemical safety of toner is confirmed. 
(6) Photosensitive component does not include as prescribed 
component cadmium, lead, mercury, selenium, or their 
compounds. 
(7) When the paper used meets the criteria for specified 
procurement, the product is capable of using the specified 
procurement material. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) A system is put in place for using plastics from collected toner 
cartridges as a material or parts of the new ones. 
(2) Providing with certificate, etc. that show the evaluation criteria is 
filled about construction of various systems and recycling rate, 
etc. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact 
upon disposal. 
Ink cartridges Evaluation Criteria 
(1) A system is put in place for the recovery of the used ink 
cartridges. 
(2) Parts of used and recovered ink cartridges that are reused or have 
undergone material recycling comprises 25% or more by total 
weight of the collected used item (excluding ink). 
(3) Parts of used and recovered ink cartridges whose resources are 
recycled comprise 95% or more by total weight of the collected 
used item (excluding ink). 
(4) Parts of used toner cartridges that have been collected cannot be 
reused or recycled do reduction of volume etc., and prevention of 
direct landfill disposal. Parts cannot be reused or recycled from 
the collected used ink cartridges, after being reduced etc., they 
are properly processed and not simply landfilled. 
(5) Chemical safety of ink is confirmed. 
(6) When the paper used meets the criteria for specified 63 procurement, the product is capable of using the specified 
procurement material. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Providing with certificate, etc. that show the evaluation criteria is 
filled about construction of various systems and recycling rate, 
etc. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact 
upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Toner cartridges or Ink cartridges (hereinafter referred to as cartridges, etc.) under 
consideration refers to products newly purchased to supply copiers, printers, etc., and 
does not include those that accompany those machines at the time of purchase. 
2. Toner cartridges refers to new toner cartridges or recycled toner cartridges, and are 
cartridges for the purpose of printing using a method that utilizes two of the following: 
copiers that use electronic photocopying; toner containers supplied with toner that are 
used for printers, faxes, etc.; and exposure or development unit. For cartridges 
comprised of exposure or development units, only those that are sold as a unit with 
toner container will be considered. Products that are comprised only of toner container, 
exposure unit, or development unit will not be considered as toner cartridges. 
a. New toner cartridges refers to toner cartridges manufactured by the manufacturer 
of the main machine unit, or consigned to an outside source. 
b. Recycled toner cartridges refers to toner cartridges that are created by supplying a 
used toner cartridge with toner, and replacing necessary consumables. The fact 
that it is a recycled toner cartridge is noted on either the packaging, printed 
material included in the packaging, or instruction material. 
3. Ink cartridges refers to new ink cartridges or recycled ink cartridges, and are cartridges 
for the purpose of printing with an ink-tank filled with ink, or ink-tank with a printing head 
that are used in copiers, printers, fax machines, etc. that utilize inkjet method. Products that 
are comprised of a single ink container will not be considered as ink-cartridges. 
a. New ink cartridges refer to ink cartridges manufactured by the manufacturer of 
the main machine unit, or consigned to an outside source. 
b. Recycled ink cartridges refer to ink cartridges that are created by supplying a used 
ink cartridge with ink, and replacing necessary consumables. The fact that it is a 
recycled ink cartridge is noted on either the packaging, printed material included 
in the packaging, or instruction material. 
4. Material recycling refers to recycling of the material. It does not include energy 
recovery, petrochemicals, gasification, high-furnace reduction, coke furnace chemical 
recycling process. 
5. Reuse/Material recycling ratio refers to the ratio by weight of parts that are either 
reused or have undergone the process of material recycling, to the total weight of 
collected cartridges, etc. that has been disposed of after use. However, the cartridges, 
etc. made public in the Web site or the catalog, etc. are excluded from the object of 
collected cartridges, etc. as a collection off the subject. 
6. Recycled ratio refers to the ratio by weight of parts that have gone through the process 
of recycling, material recycling, energy recovery, conversion into petrochemicals, 
gasification, high-furnace reduction, or coke furnace chemical recycling process, to 64 the total weight of cartridges, etc. that have been disposed of after use. However, the 
cartridges, etc. made public in the Web site or the catalog, etc. are excluded from the 
object of collected cartridges, etc. as a collection off the subject. 
7. A system is put in place for recovery noted in criteria (1) in toner cartridges and ink 
cartridges indicates that the following criteria are met: 
a. A method (recycling by the merchant, recycling using a reverse marketing 
recycling system that responds to the demands of the user, etc.) is considered 
where either the manufacturer or the retailer have voluntarily collected used 
cartridges etc. (collection is undertaken either by themselves, or by an entity 
commissioned to do the task.  Multiple entities may work together in the 
collection.)  
b. The name of the product and manufacturer (brand name may be accepted) is 
clearly labeled on the main part of the cartridge. 
c. The user may obtain, from either the product packaging, printed matter included 
in the packaging, user instructions for the main device, or on the website, specific 
information pertaining to the recycling of used cartridges (method of and location 
for recycling). 
8. Appropriate treatment noted in criteria (4) for toner cartridges and criteria (4) for ink 
cartridges indicates that the company involved in the recovery of used cartridges takes 
responsibility for adequately disposing those parts that cannot be reused or recycled. 
This does not include those instances in which a recovery system by another company 
is used (excluding those instances where recovery is undertaken based on a contract or 
agreement made between companies). However, the cartridges, etc. made public in the 
Web site or the catalog, etc. are excluded from the object of collected cartridges, etc. 
as a collection off the subject. 
9. Chemical safety of toner and ink will be based on the following: 
a. Material listed in (i)~(iv) is not included in toner and ink as prescription 
constituents. 
(i)  Cadmium, lead, mercury, chromium (VI) compound, nickel, and their 
compounds. Coordination compounds of nickel with large molecular weight 
used for purposes such as coloring are not included. However, in cases where 
the substances of (ii) and (iii) are added as prescription constituents, if it is 
inevitable to use technically and it is difficult to substitute immediately, 
information on the basis data etc. on exemption from application is disclosed, 
and unless it can be easily confirmed, that is not the case. 
(ii)  Each substance listed in Appendix Table 1 that are classified into CMR 
category 1A, 1B or 2 of Table 3.1 in Annex VI of Regulation (EC) 
No.1272/2008. 
 
Appendix Table 1: Restricted Materials 
Hazard Category Class Hazard Category Code CLP-regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008 
Carcinogenicity Carc. 1A, 1B H350: May cause cancer  
Carcinogenicity Carc. 1A, 1B H350i: May cause cancer if inhaled 
Carcinogenicity Carc. 2 H351: Suspected of causing cancer 
Germ cell mutagenicity Muta. 1A, 1B H340: May cause genetic damage 
Germ cell mutagenicity Muta. 2 H341:Suspected of causing genetic 
defects 
Reproductive toxicity Repr. 1A, 1B H360:May damage fertility or the 65 unborn child  
Reproductive toxicity Repr. 2 H361:Suspected of damaging 
fertility or the unborn child 
Substances of  (so-called candidate list) according to REACH Article 59. The version of the 
candidate list at the point of application applies. 
 (iii)Substances which require labelling of the mixtures with the following H 
phrases defined in Annex I of Regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008 or those which 
meet the requirements for homogeneous mixture classification as prescribed 
Appendix Table2. 
 
Appendix Table 2: Restricted materials 
Hazard Category Class Hazard Category Code CLP-regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008 
Specific target organ toxicity  
Single exposure STOT SE 1 H370:Causes damage to organs  
Specific target organ toxicity  
Single exposure STOT SE 2 H371:May cause damage to organs 
Specific target organ toxicity  
Repeated exposure STOT RE 1 H372:Causes damage to organsthrough 
prolonged or repeated exposure  
Specific target organ toxicity  
Repeated exposure STOT RE 2 H373:May cause damage to organs 
through prolonged or repeated exposure 
 
 (iv) Azo coloring agents (dyes and pigments) that generate carcinogenic aromatic 
amines listed in Appendix Table 3, Annex XVII of REACH Regulation ((EC) 
(1907/2006)) . 
 
Appendix Table 3: Amines that must not be generated due to the reduction of azo 
groups 
 Chemical name CAS No. 
1 4-aminobiphenyl 92-67-1 
2 Benzedrine 92-87-5 
3 4-chloro-o-toluidine 95-69-2 
4 2-naphthylamine 91-59-8 
5 o-aminoazotoluene 97-56-3 
6 2-amino-4-nitrotoluene 99-55-8 
7 p-chloroaniline 106-47-8 
8 2,4-diaminoanisole 615-05-4 
9 4,4’-diaminodiphenylmethane 101-77-9 
10 3,3’-dichlorbenzidine 91-94-1 
11 3,3’-dimethoxybenzidine 119-90-4 
12 3,3’-dimethylbenzidine 119-93-7 
13 4,4’-diamino-3,3’ –dimethyldiphenylmethane 838-88-0 
14 p-cresidine 120-71-8 
15 4,4’-Methylene-bis –(2-Chloroaniline) 101-14-4 
16 4,4’-oxydianiline 101-80-4 
17 4,4’-4-Aminophenyl Sulfide Bis  139-65-1 66 18 o-toluidine 95-53-4 
19 2,4-diaminotoluene 95-80-7 
20 2,4,5-trimethylaniline 137-17-7 
21 o-anisidine 90-04-0 
22 4-amino-azo-benzen 60-09-3 
 
b. If any insecticidal or bactericidal substances used in toners or inks, only 
constituents listed in Annex I of “REGULATION (EU) No 528/2012 OF THE 
EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 22 May 2012 
concerning the making available on the market and use of biocidal products and 
classified in product type 6 shall be added as prescribed constituents. However, 
when using materials not listed, it is permitted if application for approval has 
been submitted on the basis of the command, but if it is not limited to when the 
disallowance is determined. 
c. Toner and ink has yielded a negative result to the Ames test. 
d. SDS (Safety Data Sheet) is provided for toner and ink. 
 
10. When procurement cartridges, etc., each procurement group is to take into account the 
impact on the main machine as well as printing quality, and carefully consider the 
following: 
a. Quality of cartridges, etc. is guaranteed. 
i. Quality if sufficiently controlled through in-house regulations, and quality is 
guaranteed (replacement or repair in case of inadequate quality resulting from 
the product used) against bad quality including low-quality printing, paper jam, 
leak of toner/ink, clogged nozzle, and damage of the main machine (handling 
of defective cases resulting from the use of cartridges, etc. that is not covered 
by the insurance of the main machine would not be free of cost even if it is 
handled within the period during which the guarantee of the main machine is 
effective). 
ii. In cases of damage etc., to the main component of the photo copier or printer 
due to the use of products that satisfy the requirements listed in this category, it 
is encouraged that the information of the product (product name, manufacturer, 
brand name, name of the main machine, etc.) and the resulting problem is 
recorded. 
b. Ink cartridges should be selected with consideration for its objective and use. 
i. Quality if sufficiently controlled through in-house regulations, and quality is 
guaranteed (replacement or repair in case of inadequate quality resulting from 
the product used) against bad quality including low-quality printing, paper jam, 
leak of toner/ink, clogged nozzle, and damage of the main machine (handling 
of defective cases resulting from the use of cartridges, etc. that is not covered 
by the insurance of the main machine would not be free of cost even if it is 
handled within the period during which the guarantee of the main machine is 
effective). 
ii. Select an ink cartridge with consideration for the possibility that ink from a 
new ink cartridge and ink that was used to refill a recycled ink cartridge may 
not produce the same color. 
11. Each procurement group carefully consider that the business should be providing with the 
following document from the viewpoint of securing reliability concerning the chemical 67 safety of the product and business’s collecting system, recycling system, and appropriate 
treatment systems, etc. when the cartridge etc. are procured (For instance, it is possible to 
confirm it on the Website, etc. opened to the public in the business’s judgment).  
a. Ames test report etc. for toner and ink. 
b. SDS (Safety Data Sheet) for toner and ink 
c. Certificate, etc. that show the evaluation criteria is filled about construction of 
various systems and recycling rate, etc. shown in Factors for Consideration. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of toner cartridges and ink cartridges meeting the criteria to the total 
number of toner cartridges and ink cartridges to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
  68 6. Computers, etc. 
6-1. Computers 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Computers Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Server-type computers shall not have an energy consumption efficiency 
lower than the value obtained by multiplying the standard energy 
consumption efficiency for each category listed in Table 1 by 80/100 and 
rounding down to one decimal place.  
(2) Client-type computers shall meet one of the following a, b, c, or d. 
a. Energy consumption efficiency calculated by the formula for each  
category shown in Table 2 must be multiplied by 100/70 and should 
not exceed the figure rounded down to one decimal place. 
b. For Desktop computers, Integrated desktop computers and 
Notebook computers, typical energy consumption obtained by 
calculation formula in Note 5 a. shall not exceed maximum typical 
energy consumption obtained by calculation formula in Note 5 b. 
c. For Work station, weighted power consumption obtained by 
calculation formula in Note 6 a. shall not exceed maximum power 
consumption obtained by calculation formula in Note 6 b. 
d. For Thin Client, typical energy consumption obtained by calculation 
formula in Note 5 a. shall not exceed Maximum typical energy 
consumption obtained by calculation formula in Note 7. 
(3) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the standard 
content rate. The content rate can be easily confirmed on websites, etc. 
(4) Equipment and function are simplified for notebook computers used for 
ordinary administrative tasks. 
(5) If plastic is used for product the body or the parts, recycled plastic or 
“plant based plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has 
been confirmed” shall be used at least one of the body or parts. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Design consideration takes into account product life, efficient use of 
material, reuse of parts, or recycling of raw material, in compliance with 
evaluation criteria for Standards for the Promotion of Efficient Use of 
Material. 
(2) The operation time of secondary power (battery) is not longer than 
necessary for notebook computers used for ordinary administrative 
tasks. 
(3) The product makes the maximum use of recycled material taken from a 
previously used product. 
(4) If plastic components are used for either the body or the parts, the item 
uses in the highest possible content ratio recycled plastics or “plant 
based plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been 
confirmed”. 
(5) If magnesium alloy is used for either the body or the parts, the item uses 
as large amount of recycled magnesium alloy as possible. 
(6) Accessories including manuals, recovery CD’s etc. is eliminated as 69 much as possible. 
(7) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(8) A system for collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Product that meets one of the following criteria is not to be included in Computers 
under consideration in this section. 
(1) Arithmetic processing unit, main storage unit, input-output control unit and 
power supply unit are all multiplexed. 
(2) The number of input-output signal transmitter channels (only in the case of 
products whose maximum data transmission speed exceeds 10 gigabits per a 
second) exceeds 512. Computers that can execute operations using more than 4 
central processing units. 
(3) Computers that can execute calculations using more than 4 central processing 
units. 
(4) Server-type computers that use a central processing unit designed to execute 
instructions with different numbers of bits, and that are equipped with a central 
processing unit designed specifically for each computer. 
(5) Server-type computers equipped with a central processing unit designed 
exclusively for 64-bit computer architecture, among those using a central 
processing unit designed to execute instructions with different bit numbers 
thing. 
(6) Server-type computers that uses a central processing unit other than the central 
processing unit that is designed to execute instructions with different numbers 
of bits. Equipped with central processing unit not provided. 
(7) Product primarily uses its internal battery and without receiving power from a 
power source. 
2. Server-type Computers denote computers designed to provide service and the like via a 
network. 
3. Client-type Computers denote computers other than server-type computers. 
4. Product types and modes which applied in Evaluation Criteria (2) b, c, d, and Note 5 to 
8 are as follows: 
a. Product Types  
i. Desktop Computer: A computer whose main unit is designed to be located 
in a permanent location, often on a desk or on the floor, and is not designed 
for portability and is designed for use with an external display, keyboard, 
and mouse.  
ii. Integrated Desktop Computer: A Desktop Computer in which the 
computing hardware and display are integrated into a single housing, and 
which is connected to ac mains power through a single cable. 
iii. Notebook Computer: A computer designed specifically for portability and 
to be operated for extended periods of time both with and without a direct 
connection to an AC mains power source with an integrated display. 
iv. Work Station: A high-performance, single-user computer typically used for 
graphics, CAD, software development, financial and scientific applications 70 among other compute intensive tasks. 
v. Thin Client: An independently-powered computer that relies on a 
connection to remote computing resources to obtain primary functionality 
designed for use in a permanent location such as on a desk and not for 
portability (Limited to devices with no rotational storage media integral to 
the compute.). Thin Clients covered by this specification. And include 
integrated thin client computer in which computing hardware and display 
are connected to ac mains power through a single cable. Computers which 
meet the definition of both thin client and notebook computer designed for 
portability treated as notebook in this section. 
b. Operational Modes  
i. Off Mode: The lowest power mode which cannot be switched off (not 
affecting) by the user and that may persist for an indefinite time when the 
appliance is connected to the main electricity supply and used in accordance 
with the manufacturer’s instructions. 
ii. Sleep Mode: A low power mode that the computer enters automatically after 
a period of inactivity or by manual selection. 
iii. Idle State: The power state in which the operating system and other software 
have completed loading, a user profile has been created, activity is limited to 
those basic applications that the system starts by default, and the computer 
is not in Sleep Mode. Idle State is composed of two sub-states: Short Idle 
and Long Idle. 
iv. Long Idle: The mode where the Computer has reached an idle condition and 
the main computer display has entered a low-power state where screen 
contents cannot be observed. 
v. Short Idle: The mode where the Computer has reached an idle condition, the 
screen is on, and Long Idle power management features have not engaged.  
Measuring method for energy consumption on each operational mode shall be 
measured in accordance with “International ENERGY STAR Program 
Operating Specification (conducted in February, 2019), Appendix Table 2-1.”  
 
5. Measuring method of Typical Energy Consumption for Desktop computer, Integrated 
desktop computer, Notebook computer and Thin client and measuring method of 
Maximum Typical Energy Consumption for Desktop computer, Integrated desktop 
computer and Notebook computer are as follows.  
a. Typical Energy Consumption 
E=(8,760/1,000)×(POFF×TOFF+PSL×TSL+PLI×TLI+PSI×TSI) 
E:Typical Energy Consumption (unit:kWh/year) 
POFF:Measured power consumption in Off Mode (unit:W) 
PSL:Measured power consumption in Sleep Mode (unit:W) 
PLI:Measured power consumption in Long Idle Mode (unit:W) 
PSI:Measured power consumption in Short Idle Mode (unit:W) 
TX: Percentage of hour per year specified in Table 3-1 and 3-2 (unit:%) 
Desktop computer, Integrated desktop computer and Notebook computer shall 
be capable of Sleep Mode on instead alternative low power modes with power 
less than or equal to 10 watts and Thin client without sleep mode on discrete 
system shall be used measured power consumption in Long Idle Mode (PLI) 71 instead of measured power consumption in Short Idle (PSI) Mode in the above 
calculating formula. 
b. Maximum Typical Energy Consumption 
EMAX=(1+A)*(TECBASE+TECMEM+TECGR+TECST+TECDIS+TECSW+TECEEE) 
EMAX: Maximum Typical Energy Consumption (unit:kWh/year) 
A: Adder allowance given to the power-supply unit that fills efficiency 
specified in Table 3-3. 
TECBASE : Base Allowance in Table 3-4 (Desktop computer or integrated 
desktop computer), Table 3-5 (Notebook computer)(unit:kWh) 
TECMEM : Adder allowance of memory equipped with system specified in 
Table 3-6 (unit : kWh/Gigabit) 
TECGR: Adder allowance of discrete graphics specified in Table 
3-6(unit:kWh) 
TECST:Adder allowance of memory unit (storage) specified in Table 3-6 if 
applicable(unit:kWh) 
TECDIS:Adder allowance of enhanced-performance display specified in Table 
3-6 if applicable(unit:kWh) 
TECSW:Adder allowance of Switchable Graphics specified in Table 3-6 if 
applicable(unit:kWh) 
TECEEE: allowance per IEEE 802.3az-compliant (Energy Efficient Ethernet) 
Gigabit Ethernet specified in Table 3-6 if applicable (unit: kWh/ Gigabit) 
6. Measuring method of weighted power consumption and Maximum power 
consumption for Workstations are as follows. 
a.  Weighted power consumption 
Weighted power consumption (W)=0.35×POFF+0.10×PSL+0.15×PLI+0.40×PSI 
POFF:Measured power consumption in Off Mode (unit:W) 
PSL:Measured power consumption in Sleep Mode (unit:W) 
PLI:Measured power consumption in Long Idle Mode (unit:W) 
PSI:Measured power consumption in Short Idle Mode (unit:W) 
b.  Maximum weighted power consumption 
Maximum weighted power consumption (W) 
=0.28×(PMAX+NHDD×5)+8.76×PEEE×0.65 
PMAX:Measured maximum power consumption(unit:W) 
NHDD:Number of installed hard disk drives (HDD) or solid state drives (SSD) 
PEEE: EEE allowance of 0.2W per IEEE 802.3az-compliant (Energy Efficient 
Ethernet) Gigabit Ethernet port. 
7. Measuring method of Maximum Typical Energy Consumption for Thin Clients as 
follows. 
ETMAX=TECBASE+TECGR+TECWOL+TECDIS+TECEEE 
ETMAX:Maximum Typical Energy Consumption (unit : kWh/year) 
TECBASE: Base Allowance 31W 
TECGR:Discrete Graphics allowance 36W  
TECWOL:Wake-on-LAN (WOL) allowance 2W 
TECDIS: Integrated Display allowance for Integrated Desktops (unit:kWh) 
specified in Table 3-6. 72 TECEEE: Energy Efficiency Ethernet incentive for Desktops specified in 
Table 3-6 if applicable, per IEEE 802.3az-compliant (Energy 
Efficient Ethernet) Gigabit Ethernet port (unit : kWh/ Gigabit) 
However, adding adder allowance TECGR, TECWOL, TECDIS and TECEEE shall only be 
applied to products that offer enabled by default upon shipment. 
8.Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
9.Evaluation Criteria (3) is to be applied to personal computers. The standard content rate 
of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate provided by JIS C 0950 (The 
marking for presence of the specific chemical substances for electrical and electronic 
equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical substances, chemical element 
symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and standard content rate). Items for 
which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed are to be determined in accordance 
with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of other accessories is to be determined in 
accordance with JIS C 0950.  
10.Notebook computers used for ordinary administrative tasks denotes battery-driven 
client-type computers that are primarily used for administrative tasks (excluding cases 
where the computers are transported, or used for tasks outside of ordinary administrative 
tasks). 
11.Simplification of Equipment and Function fulfill the following. It is desirable that the 
product is not equipped with interface devices such as infrared ray communication port, 
serial port, parallel port, PC card, S video terminal. 
a. Internal modem, CD/DVD, BD, etc., are not included in the basic package, but 
can be added at the time of procurement, or connected externally at a later time. 
b. The product is equipped with multiple USB interface for connecting peripherals. 
12.The necessary operation running time on a secondary power source (battery) for notebook 
computers used for ordinary administrative tasks includes the time necessary to close all 
programs and shut the computer down in case of an emergency such as a blackout. 
13.Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been recycled in 
the process of manufacturing the product.) 
14.Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert of its alleviating effect on environmental load, by quantitative, 
objective and scientific analysis and evaluation of such effect, including possible trade-offs, 
throughout the lifecycle of the product. 
15.Computer body or parts of Evaluation criteria (5) include AC adapters etc. attached to main 
equipment. Also, Evaluation criteria (5) is not applied to server-type computers. 
16.Each procurement organization pays considerable attention to the following: 
a. Information regarding specified chemical substances confirmed at the time of 
procurement is maintained and preserved until the product is disposed of in order 
to appropriately manage chemical substances. 
b. Intended use and business content are carefully reviewed at the time of 
procurement so that only those equipment and functions necessary will be 
acquired. 73 c. A licensed contract method that involves minimizing of accessories including 
manuals and recovery CD’s will be considered. 
17. Energy Consumption Efficiency Evaluation Criteria (1) and (2) a. shall be examined 
appropriately taking into account the market trends of products that meet the criteria.  
 
 
 
Table 1FStandard energy consumption for Server type computers 
Category Standard energy 
consumption  Type of CPU Number of CPU 
sockets 
x86 1 8.9 
2 11.9 
4 8.9 
SPARC 1 6.3 
2 4.2 
4 3.5 
Power 1 4.6 
2 4.9 
4 4.2 
Notes: 
1. x86 is a central processing unit designed to be able to execute an instruction having a 
different number of bits, other than a central processing unit specifically designed for 
each computer, and is a 32-bit processor. 64-bit compatible with the architecture. 
2. SPARC is a central processing unit other than the central processing unit designed to be 
able to execute instructions with different numbers of bits, with a function to execute 
decimal floating-point arithmetic and a register control function. The register control 
function has a mechanism for saving and restoring the contents of a register in the central 
processing unit, so that the contents of a register used in the main program can be saved 
and restored in a subroutine program without saving and restoring the contents in a 
memory. Refers to the function that can be used. 
3. Power means that among the central processing units other than the central processing 
unit designed to execute instructions with different number of bits, it has a function to 
execute decimal floating point arithmetic, but it does not have register control function. 
4. The method of calculating energy consumption efficiency according to “3. Energy 
Consumption Efficiency” in “Criteria for Judgment of Manufacturers of Energy 
Consumption Equipment, etc. for Improving Energy Consumption Performance of 
Computers” (Notification 69 of Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry in 2019) 
Measurement method (1)”. 
 
 
 
  74 Table 2: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Crient-type Computers 
Category 
Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency Type of product Pscore Screen 
size case 
capacity C
at
eg
or
y  
na
m
e  
Notebook 
Computer Less 
than 8 Less 
than15  - A E=5.21+TECMEM+TECDIS+TECST+TECGR 
15or 
more - B E=7.75+TECMEM+TECDIS+TECST+TECGR 
8or 
more - - C E=11.34+TECMEM+TECDIS+TECST+TECGR 
Deskto
p 
persona
l 
comput
er Integr
ated 
type Less 
than 8 - - D E=39.87+TECMEM+TECDIS+TECST+TECGR 
8or 
more - - E E=53.32+TECMEM+TECDIS+TECST+TECGR 
Separ
able 
type - - Less 
than5L  F E=29.59+TECMEM+ TECST+TECGR 
- - 5Lor 
more  
Less than 
20L  G E=31.33+TECMEM+TECST+TECGR+TECPW 
- - 20Lor 
more 
Less than 
35L H E=28.45+TECMEM+TECST+TECGR+TECPW 
- - 35Lor 
more I E=40.47+TECMEM+TECST+TECGR+TECPW 
Notes: 
1.Integrated desktop personal computer refers to a desktop computer in which a 
computer main body and a display receive AC power via one AC power cable and 
function as a single device. 
2.Separable desktop personal computer refers to a desktop computer comprising a 
computer body without a display and an external display. 
3.P score is a numerical value obtained by multiplying the number of cores of the central 
processing unit by the clock frequency (unit: gigahertz) of the central processing unit. 
4.Screen size is a value obtained by dividing the numerical value of the diagonal outer 
diameter of the display screen in centimeters by 2.54 and rounding to the second decimal 
place. 
5.Case capacity is a numerical value, expressed in liters, of the capacity of a case for 
housing components constituting hardware in an electronic computer. 
6 E represents the following numerical value. 
EFStandard energy consumption efficiency Unit:kWh/yearj 
7.The value of TEC MEM shall be caluculated by the following formula. 
TECMEMMMAX×¿M 75 MMAXFMaximum storage capacity excluding cache memory (gigabytes). 
The numerical value of αM shall be the numerical value listed in the right column of 
the following table according to the category listed in the left column of the 
following table. 
Category ¿M 
Category A, B and C 0.186 
Category D, E, G H and I 0.248 
 
8. TECDIS shall be calculated according to the categories listed in the left column of the 
following table, using the calculation formulas listed in the right column of the table 
Category Screen 
size TECDIS 
Category A, B 
and C - TECDIS 
Category D and 
E Less 
than17.4 TECDIS(8.76×0.30)×((S÷2.542)× 
0.0300{r×0.244) 
17.4or 
more TECDIS(8.76×0.35j×((S÷2.542)× 
0.0300{r×0.244) 
S: Numerical value obtained by multiplying the vertical dimension of the display screen 
by the horizontal dimension and rounding off two decimal places (unit: square 
centimeter) 
r: Total number of pixels displayed on the screen (unit: megapixel) 
 
9. TECST shall be the numerical value shown in the right column of the following table 
according to the Category shown in the left column of the following table, and shall be 0 if 
neither 2.5 type magnetic disk device nor 3.5 type magnetic disk device is provided. 
Category Type of magnetic disk unit TECST 
Category A, B and C - 2.510 
Category D, E, F, G, H 
and I Having a 2.5-inch magnetic disk 
drive 3.140 
Having a 3.5-inch magnetic disk 
drive 20.380 
 
10. TECGR shall be calculated according to the category shown in the left column of the 
following table by the calculation formula shown in the right column of the table, and 
shall be set to 0 when there is no independent GPU. 
Category TECGR 
Category A, B and C TECGR4.198 
Category D, E, F,G, H and I TECGR0.587~.5{30.463 
FB: Memory area for temporarily storing image data to be displayed on the screen 
(unit: gigabit / second) 
However, if the TECGR is 130 or more as a result of the above calculation formula, 
the value of 130 shall be used. 
 
11.The value of TECPW shall be calculated by the following formula. 76 TECPW = PAC ×0.0543 
PAC: Rated input of internal power supply (unit: W) 
 
12.Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods (2),” based on “Criteria for judgment of 
manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy 
consumption performance of computers. (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry 
Notification No.69 of 2019) 
 
 
 
Table 3-1: Mode Weightings for Desktop, Integrated Desktop Computers and Thin 
Clients 
Mode Conventional Proxy Base Capability / Full 
Capability 
TOFF 45% 20% 
TSL 5% 45% 
TLI 15% 5% 
TSI 35% 30% 
Notes: 
Products that use the proxy-compatible / all-compatible mode ratio satisfy either 
Condition 1 or Condition 2 below. Same applies for Table 3-2. 
[Condition 1] 
Complete non-patented complete network connectivity (proxy compatible / all 
compatible) standards. 
Full network connectivity capabilities that you actually use are enabled by default at 
the factory. 
[Condition 2] 
Enable sleep mode or alternative low power modes that maintain network connection 
with less than 2W power. 
 
 
 
Table 3-2: Mode Weightings for Notebook Computers 
Mode Conventional Proxy Capability, Full Capability 
TOFF 25% 25% 
TSL 35% 45% 
TLI 10% 5% 
TSI 30% 25% 
 
 77  
Table3-3 : Internal Power Supply Efficiency Allowance (A) 
Supply 
Type Computer 
Type Minimum Efficiency at 
Specified Proportion of Rated 
Output Current Minimum 
Average 
Efficiency Allowance 
PSU 
10% 20% 50% 100% 
Internal 
Power 
Supply 
(IPS) Desktop 0.86 0.92 0.92 0.89 - 0.015 
0.90 0.90 0.94 0.90 - 0.03 
Integrated 
Desktop 0.86 0.90 0.92 0.89 - 0.015 
0.90 0.92 0.94 0.90 - 0.04 
 
 
 
Table 3-4 : Base TEC (TECBASE) Allowances for Desktop Computers or Integrated 
Desktop Computers 
Category 
Name Graphics Capability Desktop or Integrated Desktop 
Performance Base Allowance 
0 Any Graphics P3 69.0 
I1 
Integrated or Switchable Graphics  3<P6 112.0 
I2 6<P7 120.0 
I3 P>7 135.0 
D1 Discrete Graphics 3<P9 115.0 
D2 P>9 135.0 
Notes: 
Calculation formula of P is as follows. Same applies for Table3-5. 
P = [number of CPU cores] × [CPU clock speed (GHz)] 
Where number of cores represents the number of physical CPU cores and CPU clock 
speed represents the Max TDP core frequency, not the turbo boost frequency. 
 
 
 
Table 3-5 : Base TEC (TECBASE) Allowances for Notebook Computers 
Category Name Notebook 
Performance Base TEC Allowances  
0 P2 6.5 
1 2<P<8 8.0 
2 P8 14.0 
 
 78 Table3-6: TECGR Functional Adder Allowances for Desktop, Integrated Desktop, 
Notebook Computers and Thin Client 
Adder Allowances Category Desktop Integrated Desktop Notebook 
TECMEM(kWh) 0.8 2.4×(0.294GB) 
TECGR 
(kWh) G1 FB_BW16 36 
29.3×tanh(0.003
8×FB_BW-0.13
7)+13.4 G2 16<FB_BW32 51 
G3 32<FB_BW64 64 
G4 64<FB_BW96 83 
G5 96<FB_BW128 105 
G6 FB_BW>128 
Frame Buffer Data 
Width  
<192bit 115 
G7 FB_BW>128 
Frame Buffer Data 
Width  
≥192bit 130 
TECSW(kWh) 0.5×G1 N/A 
TECEEE(kWh) 8.76×0.2×(0.15+0.35) N/A 
TECST(kWh) 26 2.6 
TECDIS(kWh) N/A 8.76×0.35× 
(1+EP)× 
(4×r+0.05×A) 8.76×0.30× 
(1+EP)× 
(2×r+0.02×A) 
Notes: 
1. TECMEM Adder: GB applies per GB installed in the system. 
2. TECGR Adder: Applies to only the first dGfx installed in the system, but not 
switchable Graphics. 
3. FB_BW: Is the display frame buffer bandwidth in gigabytes per second (GB/s), 
calculated as follows:  
BF_BW=Data Rate [Mhz] × Frame Buffer Data Width [bits] / ( 8 × 1000 ) 
4. TECSW  Applies to automated switching that is enabled by default in Desktops and 
Integrated Desktops. However, for Desktop and Integrated Desktop systems 
providing Switchable Graphics and enabling it by default, an allowance equal to 
50% of the G1 graphics allowance for the platform type (Desktop or Integrated 
Desktop) may be applied. 
5. TECEEE: Applies per IEEE 802.3az-compliant (Energy Efficient Ethernet) Gigabit 
Ethernet port enabled as shipped. 
6. TECST applies once if system has more than one Additional Internal Storage 
element. 
7. EP on TECDIS is the allowance for Enhanced-performance Display, as follows. 
EP=0: No Enhanced Performance Display 79 EP=0.3: Enhanced Performance Display, the diagonal of the screen is less than 
27 inches 
EP=0.75: Enhanced Performance Display, the diagonal of the screen is 27 
inches or more 
r is the Screen resolution in megapixels; and A is viewable screen area in square 
inches. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of computers that meets the criteria, to the total number of computers to 
be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  80 6-2. Magnetic Disk Drive Units 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Magnetic disk 
drive units Evaluation Criteria  
The energy consumption efficiency shall not exceed the standard 
energy consumption obtained by the formula of applicable category in 
Table. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the 
standard content rate.  
(2) A system for collection and reuse/recycling of used machines, and 
a system for the proper disposal of components which cannot be 
reused or recycled is considered. 
(3) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and 
recycling. 
(4) The item uses a large amount of recycled components that have 
already been used, and uses as large amount of recycled plastic as 
possible if plastic components are used. 
(5) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(6) If plastic is used for product packaging or stowage, recycled 
plastic or “plant based plastics whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed” shall be used as much as 
possible. 
Notes:  
1. Magnetic disc drive units that meet any of the following criteria will not be regarded as 
a magnetic disc drive unit under consideration in the evaluation criteria in this section. 
a. Memory less than 1 gigabyte. 
b. Disc diameter less than 40 mm. 
c. Maximum data transfer speed exceeds 70 gigabytes/second. 
2. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether  
3. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of 
other accessories is to be determined in accordance with JIS C 0950 
4. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
5. Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert of its alleviating effect on environmental load, by 81 quantitative, objective and scientific analysis and evaluation of such effect, including 
possible trade-offs, throughout the lifecycle of the product. 
 
 
 
Table: Calculation Formula of Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Magnetic 
Disc Drive Units 
Category Calculation formula 
of 
standard energy 
consumption 
efficiency Type of 
magnetic 
disk unit Shape and 
performance of 
Magnetic disk unit Revolution 
Speed Use 
Single unit 
Disk Disk size exceeding 
75 mm; 1 disk   E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
30.8) 
Disk size exceeding 
75 mm; 2 or 3 disks   E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
31.2) 
Disk size exceeding 
75 mm; 4 disks or 
more   E=exp(2.11×ln(N)-
23.5) 
Disk size exceeding 50 
mm 
but not over 75 mm; 1 
disk 5,000 rpm or 
less  E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
29.8) 
Over 5,000 
rpm but less 
than 6,000 rpm  E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
31.2) 
Over 6,000 
rpm  E=exp(4.30×ln(N)-
43.5) 
Disk size exceeding 50 
mm 
but not over 75 mm; 2 
or 3disks 5,000 rpm or 
less  E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
31.5) 
Over 5,000 
rpm but less 
than 6,000 rpm  E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
32.2) 
Over 6,000 
rpm  E=exp(4.58×ln(N)-
46.8) 
Disk size exceeding 50 
mm 
but not over 75 mm; 4 
disks or more   E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
31.9) 
Disk size exceeding 40 
mm 
but not over 50 mm; 1 
disk   E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
30.2) 
Disk size exceeding 40 
mm 
but not over 50 mm; 2 
disks   E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
30.9) 
Subsystem   Ones for 
main 
frame 
server E=exp(1.85×ln(N)-
18.8) 82   Other E=exp(1.56×ln(N)-
17.7) 
Notes: 
1. Main frame server refers to server-type computers (computers designed to provide 
service and the like via a network) mounted with a dedicated CISC (which is, among 
CPUs designed to be able to execute multiple commands differing in the number of bits, 
ones each of which is designed for exclusive use by a computer). 
2. E and N represent the following values. 
E : Standard energy consumption efficiency 
N : Number of revolutions (per minute) 
3. ln represents a logarithm having e as the base. 
4. Single unit Disk refers to a single disk drive. Subsystem refers to a product with multiple disk 
drives. 
5. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption Efficiency 
Measurement Methods” of “Criteria for Judgments by Manufacturers of Energy 
Consumption Equipment, etc. for Improving Energy Consumption Performance of 
Magnetic Disk Drives” (2010 Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No. 
75). 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of magnetic disk units meeting the criteria to the total number of magnetic 
disk units to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
 
  83 6-3. Displays 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Displays Evaluation Criteria  
(1) For computer monitors, the total energy consumption calculated on 
the calculation formula in Note 3 shall not exceed the maximum 
total energy consumption calculated on the calculation formula in 
Note 4 a. 
(2) For signage displays, following requirements shall be met. 
(3) On mode power consumption calculated on the calculation formula 
in Note 5 shall not exceed the maximum on mode power 
consumption calculated on the calculation formula in Note 6 a. 
(4) Sleep mode power consumption shall not exceed the sleep mode 
power consumption standard rate calculated on the calculation 
formula in Note 7. 
(5) Off mode power consumption shall be 0.5W or less. 
(6) Equipped with a function which allows instantaneous full-power 
operation on resuming working. 
(7) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the 
standard content rate. The content rate can be easily confirmed on 
websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) A system for collection and reuse/recycling of used products, and a 
system for the proper disposal of components which cannot be 
reused or recycled shall be in place. 
(2) The item shall have an improved design for its long life, resource 
efficiency, and reuse of its parts or recycling of its material, 
complying with the standards of the Act on the Promotion of 
Effective Utilization of Resources. 
(3) The item uses as many recycled components as possible or as much 
recycled plastic as possible, in case plastic components are applied. 
(4) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(5) A system for collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:  
1. Displays under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section denotes products 
with a display screen and associated electronics, often encased in a single housing, that as 
their primary function produce visual information from a computer, workstation, or 
server via one or more inputs, external storage, or a network connection (computer 
monitors and signage displays). Computer monitors are intended for one person to use at 
a desk. Signage displays are intended for a number of people to use them away from the 
desk and shall meet two or more criteria listed below from (1) to (4): 
(1) Diagonal screen size is greater than 30 inches 
(2) Maximum reported luminance per square meter is greater than 400 candelas 
(400cd/m2) 
(3) Pixel density is 5,000 pixels per square inch (5,000 pixels/in2) or less 84 (4) Shippable without a mounting stand 
2. The operation modes to be used in evaluation criteria (2), (3) and Note 3 to 7 are as 
follows. However, in the case of products without an off mode, evaluation criteria (3) 
shall not be applied. 
a. On mode: The mode in which the display has been activated, and is providing 
the primary function. 
b. Sleep mode: A low-power mode in which the display provides one or more 
non-primary protective functions or continuous functions. During the sleep 
mode following functions can be activated. 
E Facilitate the activation of on mode via remote switch, touch 
technology, and internal sensor/timer 
E Providing information or displaying status including time 
E Keep sensor-based functions 
E Maintain a network presence 
c. Off mode: The mode where the display is connected to a power source, 
produces no visual information, and cannot be switched into any other mode 
with the remote control unit, an internal signal, or an external signal. The 
display may only exit this mode by direct user actuation of an integrated power 
switch or control. Some products may not have an off mode. 
 
3. The total energy consumption related to a computer monitor is calculated by the 
following formula. 
ETEC8.76~(0.35~PON{0.65~PSLEEP) 
ETECFTotal energy consumption (unit : kWh) 
PONFOn mode power consumption (unit : W) 
PSLEEPFSleep mode power consumption (unit : W) 
4. The maximum total energy consumption, the automatic brightness control allowance, and 
the touch technology allowance for a computer monitor are calculated by the following 
formula. 
(1) Maximum total energy consumption 
Maximum total energy consumption (kWh) 
(ETEC MAX{EEP{EABC{EN{EOS{ET)~effAC_DC 
ETEC_MAX is the maximum total energy consumption requirement calculated by 
Table 1 (unit: kWh) 
EEP is the enhanced performance display allowance calculated by Table 2 (unit: 
kWh) 
EABC is the automatic brightness control allowance calculated by (2)below (unit: 
kWh) 
EN is the full network connectivity allowance: EN=2.9 (kWh) 
EOS is the occupancy sensor allowance: EOS=1.7 (kWh) 
ET is the Touch Technology allowance calculated by following (3) (unit: kWh) 
effAC DC is the standard adjustment for AC-DC power conversion losses that 
occur at the device powering the display, and equals to 1.0 for AC-powered 
displays and 0.85 for DC power displays. 
 
(2) Energy automatic brightness control 85 For computer monitors with automatic brightness control enabled by default, an 
energy allowance (EABC) shall be added to ETEC_MAX if the on mode power 
reduction (RABC) is 20% or more. 
On mode power reduction (RABC) and energy automatic brightness control
iEABCjcalculation method are calculated by the following formulas. 
RABC100~((P300|P12)^P300j 
P300: the On Mode power, as measured at an ambient light level of 300 lux 
(unit: W) 
P12: the On Mode power, as measured at an ambient light level of 12 lux 
(unit: W) 
EABC(kWh)0.05~ETEC_MAX 
ETEC_MAXFthe Maximum total energy consumption(unit: kWh) 
 
(3) Touch technology allowance  for monitors 
ET (kWh)=0.15~ETEC MAX 
ETEC_MAX: the maximum total energy consumption (unit: kWh) 
5. Maximum on mode power for signage displays is calculated by the following formulas. 
PON_MAX(4.0~10-5~ℓ~A)+119~tanh (0.0008~(A|200.0)+0.11)+6 
PON_MAX is the Maximum on Mode Power (unit: W) 
A: screen area (unit: square inches) 
ℓ : maximum measured luminance (unit: cd/m2) 
6. On mode power consumption and PABC for signage displays  
a. On mode power consumption 
On mode power consumption =PON MAX +PABC 
PON_MAX is the maximum on mode power consumption (unit: W) 
PABC is the on mode power allowance for ABC calculated by b. below 
(unit: W) 
b. Energy allowance for automatic brightness control  
In the case of a signage display with automatic brightness control by 
default, the on mode power reduction rate RABC is calculated by Note 4 b, 
and when the RABC is 20% or more, the automatic brightness control 
allowance PABC is applied. The automatic brightness control allowance 
PABC is calculated by the following formula. 
 
PABC (W)0.05~PON_MAX 
PON_MAX : the Maximum On Mode Power requirement (unit: W) 
 
7. The sleep mode power consumption standard related to the signage display is  
calculated by the following formula. The maximum sleep mode power consumption 
and allowance are shown in the table below. 
Sleep mode power consumptionPSLEEP_MAX+PN+POS+PT 
PSLEEP : measured sleep mode power (unit: W) 
PSLEEP_MAX : maximum sleep mode power requirement (unit: W) 
PN: full network connectivity allowance (unit: W) 
POS: occupancy sensor allowance (unit: W) 
PT: touch technology allowance (unit: W) 
 86 Table : Sleep mode power requirement and energy allowance by screen size 
Screen size  
(inches) PSLEEP_MAX 
(W) PN 
(W) POS 
(Wj PT 
(Wj 
Screen size  
30 0.5 3.0 0.3 0.0 
Screen size  
30 1.5 
 
8. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
9. Evaluation criteria (5) is to be applied to personal computer monitors. The standard 
content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the one provided by JIS C 0950 (The 
marking for presence of the specific chemical substances for electrical and electronic 
equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical substances, chemical element 
symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and standard content rate). Items whose 
content rates are allowed to exceed the standard shall be determined in accordance with 
Appendix B of the JIS. Handling of other accessories is to be determined in accordance 
with JIS C 0950. 
10. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic of products that have been discarded after 
use, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the  defective articles (this 
excludes, however, plastic that has been recycled in the process of manufacturing the 
product). 
11. In order to manage chemical substances adequately, each procurement organization is to 
manage and maintain content information of specific chemical substances until the 
product is discarded. 
12. As the measuring method for standard energy consumption applies the “Appendix Table 
2-2 (Effective in October, 2016) of the International ENERGY STAR Program Operating 
Specification (enforced in July, 2014). 
 87 Table 1: Standard of maximum total energy consumption at on mode for displays 
Viewable screen area(in2)  ETEC MAX(kWh) 
A130 i6.13×rj+i0.06×Aj+9 
130A150 i6.13×rj+i0.69×Aj-72.38 
150A180 i6.13×rj+i0.21×Aj-0.50 
180A200 i6.13×rj+i0.05×Aj+28 
200A230 i6.13×rj+i0.03×Aj+31.33 
230A280 i6.13×rj+i0.2×Aj-7 
280A300 i6.13×rj+49 
300A500 i6.13×rj+i0.2×Aj-11 
A500 i6.13×rj+89 
Note: 
r represents screen resolution in megapixel(MP), and A represents viewable screen 
area(in2). 
 
Table2: Calculation of energy Allowance for Enhanced Performance Displays for 
computer monitor 
Color gamut criteria Allowance (kWh) 
Color gamut support is 32.9% 
of CIE LUV or greater 0.15g(ETEC_MAX-6.13r) 
Color gamut support is 38.4% 
of CIE LUV or greater 0.65g(ETEC_MAX-6.13r) 
Note: 
1. For computer monitors meeting all of the following a. to c., the allowable value of the 
power consumption of the performance enhanced display calculated according to this 
table can be used as the maximum total energy consumption. 
a. Contrast ratio of at least 60:1 shall be measured at a horizontal viewing angle of 
at least 85° from the perpendicular on a flat screen and at least 83° from the 
perpendicular on a curved screen, with or without a screen cover glass; 
b. A native resolution shall be 2.3 megapixels (MP) or more; 
c. Color gamut shall be 32.9% of CIE LUV or more. 
2. ETEC_MAX represents the maximum total energy consumption requirement, and r 
represents the screen resolution (in MP). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of displays meeting the criteria to the total number of displays to be 
purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  88 6-4. Recording Medias 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Recording 
medias Evaluation Criteria 
Meet one of the criteria below (Evaluation Criteria applies to the case). 
(1) Recycled plastic makes up at least 40% of the weight of the plastic 
part. 
(2) Slim-type case that is 5 mm or less in thickness or assembled type 
case (spindle-type case etc.). 
(3) Uses plant based plastics whose reduction effect of environmental 
load has been confirmed. 
(4) In case of paper products, recycled pulp content is 70% or more. If 
virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used is to be 
in compliance with the regulations concerning forestry in its 
country or geographical area of origin. This does not apply to virgin 
pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories, material left over from forestry, or 
lumber with a small diameter. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) In case of products that include paper as its material, and if virgin 
pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a sustainable operation. 
This does not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from 
thinning, or virgin pulp manufactured by using recycled wood 
pieces such as obtained from plywood or lumber factories, material 
left over from forestry, or lumber with a small diameter. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
Notes: 
1. Recording medias under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section denotes 
CD-R, CD-RW, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD-RAM, BD-R, BD-RE with a diameter of 
12cm. 
2. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.). 
3. Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific analysis 
and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
4. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest where pulpwood 
producing paper originates from is to be conducted in accordance with the Forest 
Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Legality and Sustainability of Wood and 89 Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” In addition, certification system of forest, 
timber, etc. by prefectures etc. can be utilized for confirmation of legality. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of recording media meeting the criteria to the total number of recording 
medias to be purchased in the fiscal year.  
 
  90 7. Office Equipment, etc. 
7-1. Paper Shredders 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Paper shredders Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Stand-by mode power consumption is 1.5W or less. 
(2) If the machines equipped with low power mode or off mode, the 
transition time to low-power mode or off mode is set under 10 
minutes at the time of shipment. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the 
standard content rate. 
(2) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of used machines, 
and a system for the proper disposal of components which cannot be 
reused or recycled is considered. 
(3) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and recycling. 
(4) The item uses a large amount of recycled components that have 
already been used, and uses as large amount of recycled plastic as 
possible if plastic components are used. 
(5) The item takes into consideration the reduction in volume of 
shredded paper and ease of recycling. 
(6) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(7) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Paper shredders that meet any of the following criteria will not be regarded as a Paper 
shredder under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section. 
a. The output of shredding motor exceeds 500W. 
b. Shredding motor does not stop automatically when not in use. 
2. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
3. Stand-by mode power consumption denotes electricity that is consumed during 
inactivity with the power turned on. However, it denotes power consumption in low 
power mode or off mode, if the machines equipped with these mode. 
4. Low-power mode. This is the low power consumption state that the paper shredder 
automatically enters after a specified period of inactivity. 
5. Off mode. This is the state after the power is shut off by the automatic shut off function 
that operates after a specified period of inactivity. 
6. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether.  91 7. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of paper shredders meeting the criteria to the total number of paper 
shredders to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year.  92 7-2. Digital Duplicators 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Digital 
duplicators Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Energy consumption rate does not exceed the number noted for each 
category in Table. 
(2) When the paper used meets the criteria for specified procurement, the 
product is capable of using the specified procurement material. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the standard 
content rate. 
(2) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of used ink cartridges 
is considered. 
(3) Batteries do not include cadmium alloys, lead alloys, or mercury 
alloys. This is not required, however, if batteries including these 
substances are collected, reused, or recycled without failure, and/or 
properly processed. 
(4) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and recycling. 
(5) The item uses a large amount of recycled components that have 
already been used, and uses as large amount of recycled plastic as 
possible if plastic components are used. 
(6) Default time to low power mode (the low power consumption state 
that the copier automatically enters after a specified period of 
inactivity. Same definition applies below.) and auto shut-off mode 
(the power is shut off by the automatic off function after a specified 
period of inactivity. Same definition applies below) are to be set at 5 
minutes or less at the time of shipment. For machines whose default 
time cannot be changed after shipment, the original default time 
should be maintained. 
(7) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(8) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Digital duplicators are full-auto duplicator system through the method of stencil 
duplicating with digital reproduction function. 
2. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
3. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS 93 4. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been recycled 
in the process of manufacturing the product) 
 
 
 
Table: Energy Efficiency Criteria for Digital Duplicators 
 Energy Efficiency for Digital Duplicators(W) 
A3 adaptable machines B4 adaptable machines, 
A4 adaptable machines 
Printer 
function 
In operation Printer 
function 
Idle Printer 
function 
In operation Printer 
function 
Idle 
 Printer-interface built-in type 35.5 28 22 20 
Printer-interface 
non-built-in 
type With printer 
interface 35.5 - 22 - 
Without 
printer 
interface - 24 - 19 
Notes: 
1. Printer-interface built-in type denotes those printers equipped, as a standard feature 
that cannot be removed as a product, a function to work as an output printer for 
personal computers. 
2. Printer-interface non-built-in type denotes those printers to which a function to work 
as an output printer for personal computers can be added, and those printers that 
cannot function as an output printer for personal computers. 
3. A3 adaptable machines, B4 adaptable machines, and A4 adaptable machines follow 
the criteria below: 
A3 adaptable machines: maximum print-out size is 287mm x 409 mm, or larger. 
B4 adaptable machines: maximum print-out size is 250 mm x 353 mm, or larger. 
A4 adaptable machines: maximum print-out size is 204 mm x 288 mm, or larger. 
4. Energy efficiency should be calculated using the below formula: 
E = (A+ 7 × B) / 8 
A: Electricity consumption per hour at start up (Wh) 
Turn on the machine, and set printing speed at default. Create the first plate using 
the test chart, and print using the criteria designated in (1). Immediately follow 
by creating the second plate under the same conditions, and print using the 
criteria designated in (1). Leave the machine inactive in that condition. 
The printing speed may not be changed after the machine is turned on. 
B: Electricity consumption per hour during normal use (Wh) 
After completing the “A” measurement, create the first plate and print using the 
criteria designated in (1). Immediately follow by creating the second plate under 
the same conditions, and print using the criteria designated in (1). Leave the 
machine inactive in that condition. 
 
Measurement criteria for A and B 
(1) Number of copies per a plate: 200 copies/plate 94 (2) Number of plates per hour: 2 plates 
(3) Number of copies per hour: 400 copies / hour 
(4) Printing speed: The default speed for start-up set at the time of shipment 
(5) Test chart: A4, area covered by image 4-7 % 
(6) Standard printing paper: Good quality paper at 64g/m² 
(7) Environmental criteria during measurement:  
Temperature: 21±3 degrees C  
Humidity: 65±10% 
Leave the machine inactive for at least 12 hours before measurement 
(8) For measurement while printer function is idle, confirm the auto shut-off 
mode or the switch to low power mode during the inactivity period. 
(9) The default transition time to low power mode and auto shut-off mode 
should be set at 5 minutes. This does not apply to machines whose settings 
cannot be changed after shipment. 
(10) For measurement while printer function is in operation, the auto shut-off 
mode cannot be operated. Confirm the switch to low power mode during the 
inactivity period. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of digital duplicators meeting the criteria to the total number of digital 
duplicators to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  95 7-3. Clocks 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Clocks Evaluation Criteria 
Fulfill one of the criteria below. 
(1) Move with solar battery or rechargeable battery (secondary cell), 
without using disposable batteries. 
(2) In the case of using both of solar battery and disposable batteries, 
the disposable batteries will last at least 5 years in usual use 
situation. 
(3) In the case of using disposable batteries only, the battery will last 
at least 5 years. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) The disposable battery number of use is as less as possible. 
(2) The item is made of as large amount of recycled plastic as possible 
if plastic components are used. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
Notes: 
1. Clocks under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section denote wall clocks 
uses in ordinary office and meeting room, excluding large sized clocks uses in the hall, 
etc.  
2. Usual use situation denotes the clocks are used putting on the opened wall and pillar in 
the room. 
3. Disposable battery’s life of Evaluation Criteria (3) is to be measured in accordance with 
JIS B 7026. 
4. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles. (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.) 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of clocks meeting the criteria to the total number of clocks to be 
purchased in the fiscal year. 
  96 7-4. Electronic Table Calculators 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Electronic 
table 
calculators Evaluation Criteria 
(1) 50% or more of its power source is obtained from solar battery. 
(2) Recycled plastic comprises 40% or more by weight of the total 
plastic used. 
(3) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the 
standard content rate.  
 
Factors for Consideration 
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Electronic table calculators under consideration in this section refer to calculators 
used for ordinary administrative tasks. 
2. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles. (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.) 
3. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
4. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the one provided by 
JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances for electrical 
and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical substances, 
chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and standard content 
rate). Items whose content rates are allowed to exceed the standard shall be determined in 
accordance with Appendix B of the JIS. Handling of other accessories is to be determined 
in accordance with JIS C 0950. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of electronic table calculators meeting the criteria to the total number of 
electronic table calculators to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
  97 7-5. Batteries 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Disposable 
batteries and 
small 
rechargeable 
batteries Evaluation Criteria 
Meet one of the criteria below.  
(1) Disposable batteries exceed the smallest average duration listed in 
accordance with load resistance in Table below. 
(2) The battery is a small rechargeable battery (secondary cell).  
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of used small 
rechargeable battery, and a system for the proper disposal of 
components which cannot be reused or recycled is considered. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
Notes: 
1. Disposable batteries and small rechargeable batteries under consideration in the 
evaluation criteria of this section denote “D”C” AA” or “AAA.” 
2. Smallest average duration is to be measured in accordance with the electric discharge 
test criteria designated in JIS C 8515. Disposable batteries that comply with the 
alkaline battery designated in JIS C 8515 meets this Evaluation Criteria.  
 
Table: Smallest Average Duration for Disposable Batteries 
Common 
name Main 
applications Discharge test conditions Smallest Average Duration 
Load 
Resistance 
() Discharge 
time per 
day Cut-off 
voltage Initial 
Usage After 12 
Months 
Storage and 
Recommended 
Period of 
Usage 
D 
(61.5mm : 
34.2mm) Portable light 2.2 Note 1 0.9V 750minuits 675minuits 
Equipment 
and toys using 
motors  2.2 1hour 0.8V 16hours 14hours 
Portable 
stereo 600mA 2hours 0.9V 11hours 9.9hours 
C 
(50.0mm : 
26.2mm) Equipment 
and toys using 
motors  3.9 1hour 0.8V 14hours 12hours 
Portable 
stereo 3.9Ω Note 1 0.9V 790minuits 710minuits 
Portable 
stereo 400mA 2hours 0.9V 8hours 7.2hours 
AA 
(50.5mm : 
14.5mm) Digital camera 1,500mW 
650mW Note 2 1.05V 40times 36times 
Portable light 
(LED) 3.9 Note3 0.9V 230minuits 205minuits 98 Equipment 
and toys using 
motors 3.9 1hour 0.8V 5hours 4.5hours 
Toys(without 
motor)  250mA 1hour 0.9V 5hours 4.5hours 
CD player, 
electronic 
games 100mA 1hour 0.9V 15hours 13hours 
Radio, clock, 
Remote 
controller 50mA Note 4 1.0V 30hours 27hours 
AAA 
(44.5mm : 
10.5mm) Portable light 5.1 Note 5 0.9V 130minuits 115minuits 
equipment 
used motor, 
toys 5.1 1hour 0.8V 120minuits 105minuits 
Digital audio 50mA Note 5 0.9V 12hours 10hours 
Remote 
controller 24 Note 6 1.0V 14.5hours 13.0hours 
Note 1: The cycle of 4 minutes discharge and 11 minutes discharge pause is continuously 
repeated for 8 hours. 
Note 2: The cycle of 5 minutes discharge (alternate discharge of 1,500 mW for 2 seconds and 
650 mW for 28 seconds) and the 55 minutes discharge pause are repeated continuously 
for 24 hours. 
Note 3: The cycle of 4 minutes discharge and 56 minute discharge pause is continuously 
repeated for 8 hours. 
Note 4: The cycle of 1 hour discharge and 7 hours discharge pause is continuously repeated 
for 24 hours. 
Note 5: The cycle of 1 hour discharge and 11 hours discharge pause is continuously repeated 
for 24 hours. 
Note 6: The cycle of 15 seconds discharge and 45 second discharge pause is continuously 
repeated for 8 hours. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of batteries (D, C, AA, AAA) meeting the criteria to the total number of 
batteries to be purchased in the fiscal year.  
  99 8. Mobile Telephones, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Cellular phones 
 
PHS 
 
Smart Phones Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Cellular Phones and PHS fulfill either following a. or b. 
a. Simplification of additional equipment and functions is 
considered. 
b. The system allows for upgrading of applications added to 
the terminal without exchanging the main body of the 
machine. 
(2) The design takes into account the environmental considerations 
that are included in the evaluation criteria in Table, including the 
ease of dismantling for the reuse of parts or recycling of 
material. The implementation of environmentally conscious 
design can be easily confirmed on websites and other public 
environmental reports. 
(3) A system is in place for the collection and material recycling of 
used products. The implementation rate of system for collection 
and material recycling can be easily confirmed on websites of 
manufacturers, communication companies, and sales 
companies, as well as other environmental reports.  
(4) A system is in place by the manufacturer, communication 
company, or sales company for the appropriate disposal of parts 
of collected products that cannot be recycled or reused. 
(5) A system for the repair and storage by the manufacturer, 
communication company, or sales company of renewing 
expendable parts such as the batteries (maintain supply for six 
years or more after the termination of product manufacturing), 
etc. is in place. 
(6) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the 
standard content rate. The content rate can be easily confirmed 
on websites, etc. 
(7) If plastic is used in the product, information on the content ratio 
of recycled plastic in the weight of the plastic and the content 
ratio of “plant based plastic whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed” shall be disclosed. In 
addition, the information can be easily confirmed on the 
website, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Energy saving devices such as the conservation of electricity 
and lower electricity consumption in wait mode are put in place. 
(2) When rare metals are used for the casing or parts, a system is in 
place to decrease or replace the rare metals as much as possible. 
(3) A system is in place for the repair and for the storage of 
replaceable parts for parts other than the main body and 
expendables. 
(4) The use of halogenenate noncombustibles on the casing is as 
minimized as possible. 100 (5) The item is made of as large amount of recycled plastic as 
possible or “plant based plastic whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed” if plastic components 
are used for the casing or the parts (including the recharger). 
(6) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environmental 
impact upon disposal.  
(7) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, 
etc. is considered. 
Notes: 
1. Cellular Phones under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section denote a 
mobile station telephone device that connects with cellular phone wireless base station 
by mobile station telephone, and is installed in the device portable, used for ordinary 
administrative tasks. 
2. PHS under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section denote a mobile 
station telephone device that without connecting with wireless base station public by 
mobile station telephone, and is installed in the device portable, used for extension 
ordinary administrative tasks. 
3. Smart Phones under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section denote a 
terminal that combined portable terminal with the cellular phone or PHS, the voice call 
function and the Web browse function are attached, and users can extend features 
themselves by adding application softs. 
4. Simplification of additional equipment and functions refers to the limiting of 
functions to conversations and mail whenever possible. 
5. Evaluation Criteria (2) refers to environmentally conscious design indicated in each 
evaluation criteria of Table. 
6. A system is in place for the collection and material recycling in Evaluation Criteria 
(3) denotes the fulfillment of the below requirements.  
A system for collection should fulfill the below requirements a. b. and c. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a collection system located at the store, 
or collection in response to the user’s request) for voluntarily collecting (collecting 
on its own or commissioning other companies to collect; includes situations where 
multiple businesses undertake the collection together) used products, etc. 
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, the product name and business name 
(manufacturer brand name is permissible) are marked on the main body of the 
products for easy acknowledgement at the time of disposal. 
c. Specific information for the collection of used products, etc. (collection method, 
collection location, etc.) are available for the users on the package, enclosed printed 
matter, user’s manual, or the website. 
A system for material recycling should fulfill the below requirements d and e. 
d. A system is in place to recycle metal and plastic, etc. as materials. 
e. The information for the material used for the parts is listed as much as possible to 
enable separation upon disposal. 
 
7. As for Evaluation Criteria (5), with respect to smartphones, "maintain for six years or 
more after the termination of product manufacturing", shall be "maintain for three 
years or more after the termination of product manufacturing", until sufficient 
products are supplied to the market. For this period, consideration will be made while 101 taking market trend into consideration. For Evaluation Criteria (5) does not apply in 
cases when applicable machine cannot be used continuously due to change in the 
communication system 
8. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
9. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of 
other accessories is to be determined in accordance with JIS C 0950. 
10. Rare metals refers to the 31 types of metals (the seventeen rare earth elements are 
considered as one metal type) specified at the Special Meeting for the Comprehensive 
Assessment of Rare Metals at the Mining Panel of the Ministry of Economy, Trade and 
Industry. 
11. Recycled Plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
12. Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific analysis 
and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
13. Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate based on the bio-based synthetic polymer 
content is multiplied by the bio-based synthetic polymer content rate (ratio of the 
weight of the plant-derived material component contained in the plastics based on the 
plant to the plastic weight). 
14. .Each procurement organization is to take the following into careful account: 
a. When procuring, consider the objective of use and business type in order to 
determine the necessary type and function. 
b. Consider the type of contract that would enable the minimum amount necessary for 
manuals and accessories such as a recharger. 
c. Confirm and consider factors for consideration specified in the user’s manual when 
procuring the merchandise. 
d. When disposing the terminal due to a renewal of the mobile phones, etc. terminal, 
etc., proceed in an appropriate manner using the collection system. 
 
 
 
Table: Design Criteria for Environmental Consideration in Mobile Phones, etc. 
Objective Evaluation Criteria Evaluation Standard 
Design with 
considerations for 
reduction Resource efficiency of product 
(minimization of size and 
weight) The volume and weight of product is 
reduced. 
Energy efficiency of product The energy consumption of product 102 is reduced. Attempt is made for 
developing low energy consumption 
technology. 
Longer life of product Reliability and durability of the 
product are either maintained or 
improving. 
Design with 
considerations for 
reuse Design for joint ownership The recharger etc. is designed with 
consideration for ease of reuse. 
Design for easy separation and 
dismantling Separation and dismantling for reuse 
can be performed with ease. 
Design with 
considerations for 
recycling Reduction of environmental load 
when recycling Parts that include rare metals as well 
as types of ordinary metals such as 
steel, copper and aluminum are 
understood. 
Use of complex material and 
processed material that interferes 
with recycling is reduced. 
Structure allows for ease of 
separation and dismantling Structure allows for separation and 
dismantling to convert into material 
and parts that can be used as 
recycled material. 
The structure allows for easy 
dismantling of different materials. 
Separation and dismantling for 
recycling is easy. 
Ease of separation is considered Material can be easily distinguished 
for recycling. 
The type and quality of plastic used 
for the casing is unified as much as 
possible. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of products meeting the criteria to the total number of cellular phones, 
PHS and smart phones to be purchased (including lease and rental) in the fiscal year. 103 9. Home Electronic Appliances  
9-1. Electric Refrigerators, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Electric 
refrigerators 
 
Electric 
freezers 
 
Electric 
refrigerator- 
freezers Evaluation Criteria  
(1) For Electric refrigerators and Electric refrigerator-freezers energy 
consumption rate does not exceed the result using the formula of each 
category listed in Table as follows. 
a. Reference value 1 is the standard energy consumption rate. 
b. Reference value 2 is the standard energy consumption rate 
calculated using the formula for each category listed in Table 
multiplied by 100/86. 
(2) For Electric freezers energy consumption rate does not exceed the 
result, rounded down to eliminate decimals, of the standard energy 
consumption rate calculated using the formula for each category listed 
in Table multiplied by 100/90. 
a. Reference value 1 is the standard energy consumption rate. 
b. Reference value 2 is the standard energy consumption rate 
calculated using the formula for each category listed in Table 
multiplied by 100/90. 
(3) Fluorocarbons are not used as refrigerant or expanding agent for 
insulation. 
(4) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the standard 
content rate. The content rate can be easily confirmed on websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The item is designed with consideration for long-term use and 
conservation of resources. It should be designed so that it can be easily 
dismantled and its materials separated to facilitate refurbishment and 
reuse, based on the evaluation criteria of the Act on the Promotion of 
Effective Utilization of Resources. 
(2) The item is made of as large amount of recycled plastic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(3) Organic solvent or paint with as low odor as possible is used as 
coating. 
(4) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(5) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:  
1. Electric refrigerators and electric refrigerator-freezers that meet any of the following 
criteria from a to d will not be considered as Electric refrigerators or Electric 
refrigerator-freezers under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section. 
(1)Those that were manufactured for professional use. 
(2)Those that use thermo-element. 
(3)Those that use an absorber. 
(4)Those that main purpose is wine storage 104 Electric freezers that meet any of the above criteria a, b or c are not be considered as 
Electricr-freezers under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section. 
2. Fluorocarbons are the materials defined as the Fluorocarbons prescribed in Article 2, 
Paragraph 1 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Proper Management of 
Fluorocarbons, (Act No. 64 of 2001). 
3. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
4. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of 
other accessories is to be determined in accordance with JIS C 0950. However 
Evaluation Criteria (4) does not apply to Electric freezers. 
5. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
6. In order to manage chemical substances adequately, each procurement organization is 
to manage and maintain content information of specific chemical substances until the 
machine is discarded. 
 
Table: Formula for calculating standard energy consumption efficiency rate for electric 
refrigerators, electric freezers and electric refrigerator-freezers category 
Category Calculation formula of 
standard energy 
consumption efficiency Type Cooling type Rated internal 
volume 
Refrigerator and 
refrigerator-freezer Cold air-natural 
convection type | E1=0.73V1+122 
Cold air-forced 
circulation type Up to 375liter E1=0.199V1+265 
Over 375liter E1=0.281V1+112 
Freezer Cold air-natural 
convection type | E2=0.589V2+74 
Cold air-forced 
circulation type | E2=1.328V2+80 
Notes: 
1 E1, V1 and E2, V2 represent the following numerical values. 
E1: standard energy consumption efficiency (unit: kWh/year) 
V1: Adjusted internal volume (numerical value obtained by multiplying the rated  
internal volume of each storage room by the adjusted internal volume coefficient, 
calculated by the following formula and rounded off to the nearest whole 
number) (unit: L) 
V1 = ∑(Kci×Vi)(i=1,¥¥¥,n) 105 Kci: Adjusted internal volume coefficient (the numbers listed in the right 
column for each type of storage room listed in the left column of the 
following table) 
Vi: Rated internal volume 
n: Number of storage rooms of electric refrigerator and electric 
refrigerator-freezer 
 
Type of storage room Adjusted internal volume 
coefficient(Kci) 
Pantry 0.38 
Cellar 0.62 
Refrigerated 1 
Chiller 1.1 
Zero star 1.19 
One star 1.48 
Two stars 1.76 
Three stars or four stars 2.05 
 
E2: standard energy consumption efficiency (unit : kWh/year) 
V2: Adjusted internal volume (numerical value obtained by multiplying the rated  
internal volume of each storage room by the adjusted internal volume coefficient, 
calculated by the following formula and rounded off to the nearest whole 
number) (unit: L) 
V2 = ∑(Kci×Vi)(i=1,¥¥¥,n) 
Kci: Adjusted internal volume coefficient (the numbers listed in the right 
column for each type of storage room listed in the left column of the 
following table) 
Vi: Rated internal volume 
n: Number of storage rooms in the electric freezer 
 
Type of storage room Adjusted internal volume 
coefficient (Kci) 
One star 1.48 
Two stars 1.76 
Three stars or four stars 2.05 
 
2. Energy consumption efficiency of electric refrigerators and Electric refrigerator-freezers 
is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption Efficiency Measurement Methods 
(3),” based on “Criteria for judgment of manufacturers of energy consuming equipment 
etc. related to improvement of energy consumption performance of electric refrigerators 
and electric refrigerator-freezers (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry notification 
No.38 of 2016). 
3. Energy consumption efficiency of freezers is calculated according to “3 Energy 
Consumption Efficiency Measurement Methods (3),” based on “Criteria for judgment of 
manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy 
consumption performance of freezers (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry 
Notification No.39 of 2016). 106 4. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods (3),” based on “Criteria for judgment of manufacturers 
of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy consumption 
performance of electric refrigerators and Electric refrigerator-freezers (Ministry of 
Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No.39 of 2016). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of refrigerators, etc. (refrigerators, freezers, and refrigerator-freezers) 
meeting the criteria of each reference value 1 and reference value 2  to the total number of 
refrigerators, etc. to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  107 9-2. Television Receivers 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Television 
Receivers Evaluation Criteria 
(1) For television receivers that employ liquid crystal panel (referred 
to as liquid crystal television hereinafter) energy consumption rate 
does not exceed the result, rounded down to eliminate decimals, of 
the standard energy consumption rate calculated using the formula 
for each category listed in Table multiplied by 100/198. 
(2) The power consumption in the remote control standby mode is 
0.5W or less. 
(3) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the 
standard content rate. The content rate can be easily confirmed on 
websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Design consideration takes into account product life, efficient use 
of material, reuse of parts, or recycling of raw material, in 
compliance with evaluation criteria for Standards for the 
Promotion of Efficient Use of Material. 
(2) The item uses as large amount of recycled plastic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(4) A system for collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Those products that satisfy one of the below criteria is not included in Television 
receivers under consideration: 
(1) Television with Cathode-ray Tube. 
(2) Those manufactured for use by the industry. 
(3) Cathode-ray tube style that can respond to multi-scanning, whose horizontal 
frequency exceeds 33.8 kilo hertz. 
(4) Those manufactured for use by tourists from abroad. 
(5) Plasma display type 
(6) Rear projection style products. 
(7) The size of the receiver is 10V or less. 
(8) Wireless products. 
(9) Display for electronic calculators that are capable of receiving television. 
2. The consumed power in the remote control standby mode in Evaluation Criteria (2) 
denotes power consumption in the state to turn off power by remote control, applies to 
the infrared remote control. 
3. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
4. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances 108 for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of 
other accessories is to be determined in accordance with JIS C 0950. 
5. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles. (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.) 
6. In order to manage chemical substances adequately, each procurement organization is 
to manage and maintain content information of specific chemical substances until the 
item in question is discarded. 
7. Evaluation criteria (1) for television receivers whose size is less than 39V size, one 
year transition period will be applied in the fiscal year 2020. The products shall be 
considered as meet evaluation criteria (1) if energy consumption rates of those do not 
exceed the result, rounded down to eliminate decimals, of the standard energy 
consumption rate calculated using the formula for each category listed in the Table 
multiplied by 100/149. The period of time for which the exception is applicable will be 
determined in consideration with market trend. 
  
 
 
Table: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency and its Calculation Formula of Liquid 
Crystal Television 
Category Standard energy 
consumption 
efficiency or 
calculation 
formula Number 
of 
pixels Television 
receiver size Dynamic 
image 
Display Additional function(s) 
FHD Below 
19V size Liquid crystal 
normal With no added functions E=59 
With 1 added function E=71 
With 2 added functions E=83 
With 3 added functions E=95 
Liquid crystal 
double-speed With no added functions E=74 
With 1 added function E=86 
With 2 added functions E=98 
With 3 added functions E=110 
Not below 
19V size, but 
below 32V 
size Liquid crystal 
normal With no added functions E=2.0×S+21 
With 1 added function E=2.0×S+33 
With 2 added functions E=2.0×S+45 
With 3 added functions E=2.0×S+57 
Liquid crystal 
double-speed With no added functions E=2.0×S+36 
With 1 added function E=2.0×S+48 
With 2 added functions E=2.0×S+60 
With 3 added functions E=2.0×S+72 
Liquid crystal 
quadruple With no added functions E=2.0×S+58 
With 1 added function E=2.0×S+70 109 speed With 2 added functions E=2.0×S+82 
With 3 added functions E=2.0×S+94 
32V size 
or larger Liquid crystal 
normal With no added functions E=6.6×S-126 
With 1 added function E=6.6×S-114 
With 2 added functions E=6.6×S-102 
With 3 added functions E=6.6×S-90 
Liquid crystal 
double-speed With no added functions E=6.6×S-111 
With 1 added function E=6.6×S-99 
With 2 added functions E=6.6×S-87 
With 3 added functions E=6.6×S-75 
Liquid crystal 
quadruple 
speed With no added functions E=6.6×S-89 
With 1 added function E=6.6×S-77 
With 2 added functions E=6.6×S-65 
With 3 added functions E=6.6×S-53 
Others Less than 
19V type Liquid crystal 
normal With no added functions E=44 
With 1 added function E=56 
With 2 added functions E=68 
With 3 added functions E=80 
Liquid crystal 
double-speed With no added functions E=59 
With 1 added function E=71 
With 2 added functions E=83 
With 3 added functions E=95 
19V type 
or more 
Less than 
32V type Liquid crystal 
normal With no added functions E=2.0×S+6 
With 1 added function E=2.0×S+18 
With 2 added functions E=2.0×S+30 
With 3 added functions E=2.0×S+42 
Liquid crystal 
double-speed With no added functions E=2.0×S+21 
With 1 added function E=2.0×S+33 
With 2 added functions E=2.0×S+45 
With 3 added functions E=2.0×S+57 
Liquid crystal 
quadruple 
speed With no added functions E=2.0×S+43 
With 1 added function E=2.0×S+55 
With 2 added functions E=2.0×S+67 
With 3 added functions E=2.0×S+79 
32V type 
or more Liquid crystal 
normal With no added functions E=6.6×S-141 
With 1 added function E=6.6×S-129 
With 2 added functions E=6.6×S-117 
With 3 added functions E=6.6×S-105 
Liquid crystal 
double-speed With no added functions E=6.6×S-126 
With 1 added function E=6.6×S-114 
With 2 added functions E=6.6×S-102 
With 3 added functions E=6.6×S-90 
Liquid crystal 
quadruple 
speed With no added functions E=6.6×S-104 
With 1 added function E=6.6×S-92 
With 2 added functions E=6.6×S-80 
With 3 added functions E=6.6×S-68 110 Notes: 
1. FHD refers to ones having 1,080 or more pixels in the vertical direction and 1,920 or 
more in the horizontal direction. 
2. Television receiver size refers to the centimeter-denominated quotient, rounded at the 
decimal point, of division of the diagonal dimension of the driven display area of the 
display screen by 2.54. 
3. Dynamic image display refers to or another of the following. 
Liquid crystal normal: Those that use a liquid crystal panel to display 60 or more but 
less than 120 still frames per second. 
Liquid crystal double speed: Those that use a liquid crystal panel to display 120 or more 
but less than 240 still frames per second. 
Liquid crystal quadruple speed: Those that use a liquid crystal panel to display 240 or 
more still frames per second. 
4. Additional functions refers to DVD (solely those having a video recording function), 
Magnetic disc drive units drive unit, double digital tuner and blue ray disk recorder. 
5. E and S represent the following numeric values. 
E : standard energy consumption efficiency (unit:kWh/ year) 
S : Television receiver size 
6. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “2 Energy Consumption Efficiency 
Measurement Methods 2-2,” based on “Criteria for judgment of manufacturers of energy 
consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy consumption performance of 
television receivers (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No.24 of 2010). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of television receivers meeting the criteria to the total number of 
television receivers to be purchased (including lease and rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  111 9-3. Electric Toilet Seats 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Electric toilet 
seats Evaluation Criteria  
Energy consumption efficiency shall not exceed the formula for each 
category listed in Table. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate either reuse of components or recycling of 
materials. 
(2) The item uses a large amount of recycled components that have already 
been used, and uses as large amount of recycled plastic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(4) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Products that meet the below criteria will not be considered Electric toilet seats under 
consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section: 
(1) Electric toilet seats that use warm water supplied from a separate warm water 
system. 
(2) Electric toilet seats, those are equipped only with warm water washing apparatus. 
(3) Portable electric toilet seats that are used for welfare purposes. 
(4) Electric toilet seats that are primarily used in train cars, etc. 
(5) Electric toilet seats for potties.  
2. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
 
 
 
Table: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Electric Toilet Seats 
Category Standard Energy 
Consumption 
Efficiency Availability of the shower 
function Availability of the water tank 
Warm toilet seat (Without a 
shower function) - 
 141 
Warm-water-shower toilet 
seat (With a shower function) 
(without cleansing function) Warm-water storage type (With a 
warm-water tank) 175 
Instantaneous type (Without a 
warm-water tank) 97 
Notes: 
1. Warm toilet seat refers to toilet seats with a warming function only. 112 2. Warm-water-shower toilet seat refers to warm toilet seats equipped with built-in 
warm-water-shower equipment. 
3.  Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods (2),” based on “Criteria for judgment of 
manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy 
consumption performance of electric toilet seats (Ministry of Economy, Trade and 
Industry Notification No.288 of 2007). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of electric toilet seats meeting the criteria to the total number of electric 
toilet seats to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
 
  113 9-4. Microwave Ovens 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Microwave 
ovens Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Energy consumption efficiency does not exceed the amount listed in 
the appropriate category in the Table. 
(2) Stand-by mode power consumption does not exceed 0.05W. 
(3) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the standard 
content rate. The content rate can be easily confirmed on websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate either reuse of components or 
recycling of materials. 
(2) The item uses a large amount of recycled components that have 
already been used, and uses as large amount of recycled plastic as 
possible if plastic components are used. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(4) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:  
1. Products that meet the criteria below will not be considered Microwave ovens under 
consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section: 
(1) Products equipped with gas ovens. 
(2) Products manufactured for commercial use. 
(3) Products that exclusively use rated power input of 200 voltages.  
(4) Products with interior height of less than 135 millimeters. 
(5) Products that are integrated into system kitchens, etc. 
2. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
3. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of other 
accessories is to be determined in accordance with JIS C 0950. 
4. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
5. In order to manage chemical substances adequately, each procurement organization is to 
manage and maintain content information of specific chemical substances until the item 
in question is discarded. 
 114  
Table: Standard Energy Consumption Rate for Microwave Ovens 
Category Standard Energy 
Consumption Rate Function Heating method Interior capacity 
Products that are not 
equipped with the 
conventional oven 
function (single 
function microwave 
oven)   60.1 
Products that are 
equipped with the 
conventional oven 
function Heater is exposed 
(does not include 
those with 
convection function) Less than 30 L 73.4 
30L or more 78.2 
Heater is not exposed 
(does not include 
convection function) Less than 30L 70.4 
30L or more 79.6 
Convection oven 
style  73.5 
Notes: 
1. Interior capacity is calculated in accordance with the effective size of the heating 
compartment determined by regulations for designating product quality of electric 
appliances based on household appliance quality display regulations (1962 regulation 
No.104). 
2. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods,” based on “Criteria for judgment of manufacturers 
of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy consumption 
performance of microwave ovens. (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry 
Notification No.6 of 2006) 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of microwave ovens meeting the criteria to the total number of 
microwave ovens to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
  115 10. Air Conditioners, etc. 
10-1. Air Conditioners 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Air conditioners Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Energy consumption efficiency of air conditioners that are applicable 
to Appendix 3(7) of Rules for Indicating Quality of Domestic Products 
(Ordinance No. 390, 1962) and are wall-mounted non-ducted type 
(excluding multi-types with ability to control indoor units 
individually) with cooling ability of 4.0kW or lower, does not fall 
below the energy consumption rate from Table 1, multiplied by 
114/100, calculated to two decimal places and then rounded off to one 
decimal place.  
(2) Energy consumption efficiency of domestic-use air conditioners that 
do not fit into criteria (1) does not fall below the energy consumption 
rate from Table 2, multiplied by 114/100, calculated to two decimal 
places and then rounded off to one decimal place.  
(3) Energy consumption efficiency of industrial-use air conditioners does 
not fall below the applicable standard energy consumption efficiency 
or its calculation formula listed in Table 3. 
a. Reference value 1 is the standard energy consumption rate. 
b. Reference value 2 is the standard energy consumption rate 
calculated using the formula for each category listed in Table 
3 multiplied by 88/100. 
(4) Global warming potentials of the materials used for the refrigerant are 
750 or smaller.  
(5) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the standard 
content rate. The content rate can be easily confirmed on websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The material with a small global warming potential to the extent 
possible are used for the refrigerant.  
(2) The item is designed with consideration for long-term use and 
conservation of resources. It should be designed so that it can be easily 
dismantled and its materials separated to facilitate refurbishment and 
reuse, based on the evaluation criteria of the Act on the Promotion of 
Effective Utilization of Resources. 
(3) In the designing and manufacturing the product, reduction of the 
amount of the filled refrigerant, the further prevention of leakage and 
the ease of recovery of refrigerant are considered. Moreover, the 
information above is disclosed. 
(4) The item is made of as large amount of recycled plastic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(5) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
consideration ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact 
upon disposal.  
(6) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 116 Notes: 
1. Items that meet any of the criteria below will not be considered as Air conditioners 
under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section: 
(1) Cooling capacity exceeds 28kW (for multi-type air conditioner, cooling capacity 
exceeds 50.4kW). 
(2) Wind type or Wall type and only for cooling. 
(3) Uses water-cooled engine. 
(4) Does not use compressed motor. 
(5) Uses energy other than electricity as a source of heat. 
(6) The maintenance of machinery function or hygienic regulation of food. 
(7) Primary function of the structure is to convey cooled outdoor air indoors. 
(8) Target air conditioners. 
(9) Air conditioners designed for use in automobiles and other vehicles. 
(10) Duct air control system for highly airtight and highly insulated   
(11) Structure includes regenerator (includes those that are also used for heating) 
exclusively for the purpose of storing heat for cooling. 
(12) Structure operates compressor, fan, and other major components by electricity 
generated by own solar cell module. 
(13) One having floor heating function or hot-water supply function. 
(14) Heat recovery method multi air conditioner. 
2. Multi-type air conditioners refer to a type that has two or more indoor units connected to 
an outdoor unit.  
3. Evaluation criteria (4)  apply to the products for which target values and target fiscal year 
are determined by Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No. 50 (items 
to be judged by manufacturers of air conditioners) of the household air conditioners and 
shops / office air conditioners (refrigeration capacity per day is less than 3 tons) 
prescribed in Article 3 of the Enforcement Regulation (Ministry of Economy, Trade and 
Industry Ordinance No. 29 of 2015) concerning rationalization of use of CFCs and 
management of CFCs Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry. 
4. Global warming potential in this section denotes the numerical value that showed 
degree to which is heat-trapping gas brings global warming in ratio to which carbon 
dioxide brings global warming. 
5. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
6. Item (5) in Evaluation Criteria will apply to unit type air conditioners (excludes 
packaged types), the standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the 
standard rate provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical 
substances for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified 
chemical substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, 
and standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is 
allowed are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling 
of other accessories is to be determined in accordance with JIS C 0950. 
7. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 117 8. In order to manage chemical substances adequately, each procurement organization is to 
manage and maintain content information of specific chemical substances until the item 
in question is discarded. 
 
 
 
Table 1: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for the Air-conditioners, applicable 
to Appendix 3(7) of Rules for Indicating Quality of Domestic Products (Ordinance No. 
390, 1962), is a wall-mounted non-ducted type (excluding multi-types with ability to 
control indoor units individually), with cooling ability of up to 4.0kW 
Category Standard energy 
consumption 
efficiency Cooling capacity  Dimension type of indoor units 
Up to 3.2kW Dimension-defined type 5.8 
Free-dimension type 6.6 
Over 3.2 kW up to 4.0kW Dimension-defined type 4.9 
Free-dimension type 6.0 
Notes: 
1. Dimension type of indoor units denotes indoor unit means that air conditioner models 
whose indoor unit has horizontal width of 800 mm or less and height of 295 mm or less 
shall be defined as a dimension-defined type. Air conditioners other than those of 
dimension-defined type shall be free-dimension type. 
2. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods (2),” based on “Criteria for judgment of 
manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy 
consumption performance of air conditioners (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry 
Notification No.213 of 2009). Same applies for Table 2. 
 
 
 
Table 2: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Domestic Air Conditioners  
Category Standard energy 
consumption 
efficiency Unit type Cooling capacity 
Non-ducted window/ wall-installed 
type Over 4.0 kW up to 5.0 kW 5.5 
Over 5.0 kW up to 6.3 kW 5.0 
Over 6.3 kW up to 28.0 kW  4.5 
Non-ducted wall-mounted type 
(except multi-type operating indoor 
units individually) Up to 3.2 kW  5.2 
Over 3.2 kW up to 4.0 kW 4.8 
Over 4.0 kW up to 28.0kW 4.3 
Multi-type operating indoor units 
individually Up to 4.0 kW 5.4 
Over 4.0 kW up to 7.1 kW 5.4 
Over 7.1 kW up to 28.0 kW 5.4 
  118 Table 3: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Industrial-use Air Conditioners 
Category Standard energy 
consumption efficiency or its 
calculation formula Unit type and 
function Indoor unit 
type Cooling capacity 
Several 
combination or 
other than the 
below Cassette 
type for all 
sides Up to 3.6 kW E=6.0 
Over 3.6 kW up to 10.0 kW E=6.0-0.083 x (A-3.6) 
Over 10.0 kW up to 20.0 kW  E=6.0-0.12 x (A-10) 
Over 20.0 kW up to 28.0 kW E=5.1-0.060 x (A-20) 
Other than 
cassette 
type for all 
sides Up to 3.6 kW  E=5.1 
Over 3.6 kW up to 10.0 kW E=5.1-0.083 x (A-3.6) 
Over 10.0 kW up to 20.0kW E=5.1-0.10 x (A-10) 
Over 20.0 kW up to 28.0kW E=4.3-0.050 x (A-20) 
Multi-type 
operating 
indoor units 
individually  Up to 10.0 kW E=5.7 
Over 10.0 kW up to 20.0 kW E=5.7-0.11 x (A-10) 
Over 20.0 kW up to 40.0 kW E=5.7-0.065 x (A-20) 
Over 40.0 kW up to 50.4 kW E=4.8-0.040 x (A-40) 
Floor type 
Indoor units 
duct connected 
type or 
anything like 
this Non-ducte
d type Up to 20.0 kW E=4.9 
Over 20.0 kW up to 28.0 kW E=4.9 
Ducted 
type Up to 20.0 kW E=4.7 
Over 20.0 kW up to 28.0 kW E=4.7 
Notes: 
1. Ducted type air conditioners refer to systems connected to ducts at the outlet. 
2. E and A denotes the following. 
 
E: Standard Energy Consumption (unit: annual performance factor) 
A: Cooling capacity (unit: kW) 
 
3. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods (3),” based on “Criteria for judgment of 
manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy 
consumption performance of air conditioners (Ministry of Economy, Trade and 
Industry Notification No.213 of 2009). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Domestic-use air conditioners: ratio of the number of air conditioners meeting the criteria to 
the total number of domestic-use air conditioners to be purchased (including lease/rental 
agreements) in the fiscal year. 
Industrial-use air conditioners: ratio of the number of air conditioners meeting the criteria of 
each reference value 1 and reference value 2 to the total number of industrial-use air 
conditioners to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  119 10-2. Gas Heat Pump Air Conditioners  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Gas heat pump 
air conditioners Evaluation criteria 
(1) Annual performance factor is no less than 1.07. 
(2) Refrigerant does not include material capable of destroying the ozone 
layer.  
 
Factors for consideration 
(1) The materials with a low global warming potential to the extent 
possible are used for the refrigerant. 
(2) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled for recycling. 
(3) The item is made of as large amount of recycled plastic as possible if 
plastic components are used.  
(4) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(5) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Gas heat pump air conditioner includes units defined by JIS B 8627 whose rated 
cooling capacity is between 7.1 and 28kW under consideration in the evaluation of this 
section. 
2. Annual performance factor is calculated using JIS B 8627. 
3. Global warming potential in this section denotes the numerical value that showed 
degree to which is heat-trapping gas brings global warming in ratio to which carbon 
dioxide brings global warming. 
4. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of gas heat pump air conditioners meeting the criteria to the total number 
of gas heat pump air conditioners to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the 
fiscal year.  
 
  120 10-3. Space Heaters 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Space heaters Evaluation Criteria  
Fulfill at least one of below. 
(1) Energy consumption efficiency in gas space heaters shall not fall 
below the standard energy consumption efficiency of applicable 
category in Table 1. 
(2) Energy consumption efficiency in oil space heaters shall not fall below 
the standard energy consumption efficiency or its calculation formula 
of applicable category in Table 2. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate either reuse of components or recycling of 
materials. 
(2) The item is made of as large amount of recycled plastic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(4) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Space heaters under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section use gas or 
oil, and should not meet any of the criteria below: 
(1) The item employs non-vented types. 
(2) The item uses gas (excluding city gas categorized under group 13A (Group 
specified in Article 25 Section 3 of Gas Industry Law Enforcement Regulation 
(Ministry of International Trade and Industry Ordinance 97, 1970) and liquefied 
petroleum gas) as its energy source. 
(3) Vented gas space heaters. 
(4) Vented oil space heaters with maximum fuel consumption rate greater than 4.0L/h. 
(5) Direct vent type oil space heaters with maximum fuel consumption rate greater than 
2.75L/h. 
2. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
 
 
Table 1: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Gas Space Heaters 
Category Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency 
Direct vent type 82.0 
Note: Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods,” based on “Criteria for judgment of manufacturers of 
energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy consumption 121 performance of stoves (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No.55 of 
2006). Same applies for Table 2. 
 
 
 
 
Table2: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency or Its Calculation Formula for Oil 
Space Heaters 
Category Standard Energy 
Consumption Efficiency or 
Its Calculation Formula Air supply and 
exhaust type Heat transfer type 
Direct Vent Type Natural convection type 83.5 
Forced convection type 86.0 
Vented type Radiation type 69.0 
Radiating type with maximum fuel 
consumption amount of 1.5L/h or less 67.0 
Radiating type with maximum fuel 
consumption amount of over 1.5L/h E = -3.0 x L + 71.5 
Notes: E and L stand for the following: 
E: Standard energy consumption efficiency (unit: %) 
L: Maximum fuel consumption amount (unit: L/h) 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of space heaters meeting the criteria to the total number of space heaters 
to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  122 11. Water Heaters, etc. 
11-1 Electric Hot Water Supply System 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Heat pump 
style electric 
hot water 
supply system Evaluation Criteria  
(1) For residential use heat pump style electric hot water supply system, 
energy consumption efficiency does not fall below the standard energy 
consumption efficiency of applicable category in Table. 
(2) For business use heat pump style electric hot water supply system, 
annual heating performance is 3.20 or higher. 
(3) Fluorocarbons are not used as refrigerant. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The materials with a low global warming potential to the extent possible 
are used for the refrigerant. 
(2) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate either reuse of components or recycling of 
materials. 
(3) The item is made of as large amount of recycled plastic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(4) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(5) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Equipment having a heating function will not be considered as Heat pump style 
electric hot water supply system in the evaluation criteria. 
2. The annual heating  performance for business use heat pump style electric hot water 
supply system is according to JRA 4060F2018,  to be calculated using the below 
formula: 
 
Annual heating performance : Annual heating volume/Annual energy consumption  
 
Annual heating performance : Annual total of the value obtained by multiplying the 
heating amount per day of each period (summer, intermediate period, winter, 
frosting period) by the target number of days. 
 
Annual energy consumption :  Annual total of the value of power consumption per 
day of each period (summer, intermediate period, winter, frosting period) 
multiplied by the target number of days. 
 
3. Fluorocarbons are the materials defined as the Fluorocarbons prescribed in Article 2, 
Paragraph 1 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Proper Management of Fluorocarbons, 
(Act No. 64 of 2001). 
4. Global warming potential in this section denotes the numerical value that showed degree to 
which is heat-trapping gas brings global warming in ratio to which carbon dioxide brings 
global warming. 123 5.Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that has 
been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the recycle/reuse 
of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been recycled in the process 
of manufacturing the product). 
6. Evaluation Criteria (3) does not apply to the products for business use heat pump style 
electric hot water supply system.  However substances harmful to the ozone layer are not 
used. 
 
 
 
Table: Standard of Energy Consumption for Residential Use Heat Pump Style Electric 
Hot Water Supply System 
Assumed 
number of 
household Tank 
capacity Specification Warm keep 
function Tank number Standard of 
energy 
consumption 
efficiency  
Normal 
(4 persons) Less 
than 
 240 L Other than 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 2.8 
Multi tank 2.4 
without One tank 3.0 
Multi tank 2.6 
Specification for 
Cold Region With One tank 2.3 
Multi tank 2.0 
without One tank 2.6 
Multi tank 2.3 
Over 
240 L 
less 
than  
320 L Other than 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 2.8 
Multi tank 2.8 
without One tank 3.2 
Multi tank 2.8 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 2.3 
Multi tank 2.0 
without One tank 2.7 
Multi tank 2.3 
Over 
320 L 
less 
than  
550 L Other than 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 3.3 
Multi tank 2.8 
without One tank 3.2 
Multi tank 2.8 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 2.7 
Multi tank 2.3 
without One tank 2.7 
Multi tank 2.3 
Over 
550 L Other than 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 2.9 
Multi tank 2.5 
with One tank 2.9 
Multi tank 2.5 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 2.4 
Multi tank 2.1 
without One tank 2.5 124 Multi tank 2.2 
Few 
(2 persons) | Other than 
Specification for 
Cold Region with 
| 2.4 
without 2.8 
Specification for 
Cold Region with 2.0 
without 2.4 
Notes: 
1. Tank capacity denotes the tank capacity in volume based on JIS C 9220, which could 
storage water. 
2. Specification for Cold Region denotes a specification based on JIS C 9220, assumed to 
be used in terrible cold region in winter. 
3. Warm keep function denotes the circulation heating function for hot water of bath. 
4. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods,” based on “Criteria for judgment of manufacturers 
of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy consumption 
performance of electric hot water heaters (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry 
Notification No.38 of 2013). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of heat pump style electric hot water supply system meeting the criteria to 
the total number of heat pump style electric hot water supply system to be purchased 
(including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year.  
  125 11-2 Gas Water Heaters 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Gas water 
heaters Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Energy consumption efficiency is 90 or more for latent heat recovery 
type gas water equipment. 
(2) Except for latent heat recovery type gas water equipment, energy 
consumption efficiency shall not fall below the energy consumption 
efficiency listed in Table for each category.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate either reuse of components or recycling of 
materials. 
(2) The item is made of as large amount of recycled plastic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(4) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Items that meet any of the criteria below will not be considered as Gas water heaters 
under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section: 
(1) Storage-style hot water supply system. 
(2) Items that were designed for commercial use. 
(3) Items that use gas (excluding city gas categorized under group 13A and liquefied 
petroleum gas) as its fuel source. 
(4) Gas bath furnaces that are designed to be installed at a bath tub for heating bath 
water, and equipped with a function to prevent imperfect combustion. 
(5) Direct vent type gas bath furnaces which require a duct connection for combustion 
air supply and exhaust. 
2. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
 
 
  126 Table: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Gas Water Heaters 
Category Standard 
energy 
consumption 
efficiency Type of gas 
water 
heater Ventilation 
type Circulation 
type Air supply and exhaust type 
Gas instant 
water 
heater Natural 
ventilation 
type  Non-vented type 83.5 
Other than non-vented type 78.0 
Forced 
ventilation 
type  Other than outdoor type 80.0 
Outdoor type 82.0 
Bath tub 
gas water 
heater(with 
no hot 
water 
supply 
functions) Natural 
ventilation 
type Natural 
circulation 
type Vented type or direct vent type 
(the height where the air 
supply and exhaust part 
penetrates external wall is as 
vented types) 75.5 
Direct vent type (other than 
types of the height where the 
air supply and exhaust part 
penetrates external wall is as 
vented types) 71.0 
Outdoor type 76.4 
Forced 
ventilation 
type Natural 
circulation 
Type  70.8 
Forced 
circulation 
Type  77.0 
Bath tub 
gas water 
heater (with 
hot water 
supply 
functions) Natural 
ventilation 
type Natural 
circulation 
Type Vented type or direct vent type 
(the height where the air 
supply and exhaust part 
penetrates external wall is as 
vented types) 78.0 
Direct vent type (other than 
types of the height where the 
air supply and exhaust part 
penetrates external wall is as 
vented types) 77.0 
Outdoor type 78.9 
Forced 
ventilation 
Type Natural 
circulation 
type  76.1 
Forced 
circulation 
Type Other than outdoor type 
 78.8 
Outdoor type 80.4 
Gas heating 
equipment 
(with no hot    83.4 127 water 
supply 
functions) 
Gas heating 
equipment 
(with hot 
water 
supply 
functions)    83.0 
Note: 
Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption Efficiency 
Measurement Methods,” based on “Criteria for judgment of manufacturers of energy 
consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy consumption performance of gas 
water heaters (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No.58 of 2006). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of gas water heaters meeting the criteria to the total number of gas water 
heaters to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year.  
  128 11-3 Oil Water Heaters  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Oil water 
heaters Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Energy consumption efficiency is 90 or more for latent heat recovery 
type old water equipment. 
(2) Except for latent heat recovery type oil water equipment, Energy 
consumption efficiency shall not fall below the energy consumption 
efficiency listed in Table for each category.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate either reuse of components or recycling of 
materials. 
(2) The item is made of as large amount of recycled plastic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
(4) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Items that meet any of the criteria below will not be considered as Oil water heaters 
under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section: 
(1) Pot style bath furnace equipped with a burner. 
(2) Items that were designed for commercial use. 
(3) Items equipped with a structure for burning firewood. 
(4) Hot water boilers with gauge pressure of over 0.1MPa. 
2. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.). 129 Table: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Oil Water Heaters 
Category Standard 
Energy 
consumption 
efficiency Usage Heating type Air supply and 
exhaust system or 
control method 
For hot water 
supply Instantaneous type 
  86.0 
Storage type with rapid 
heating system  87.0 
Storage type other than 
rapid heating system  85.0 
For heaters Instantaneous type 
 Non-vented type 85.3 
Vented type 79.4 
Direct vent type 82.1 
Storage type with rapid 
heating system On/off control 87.0 
Other than on/off 
control 82.0 
Storage type other than 
rapid heating system  84.0 
For baths Water heaters with a center 
flue heat exchanger  75.0 
Water heaters without a 
center flue heat exchanger  61.0 
Notes: 
1. For hot water supply refers to those used primarily for hot water supply, and includes 
those equipped with functions for heating or to heat bath water. 
2. For heating refers to those used primarily for heating, and includes those equipped 
with functions for hot water supply or to heat bath water. 
3. For baths refers to those used primarily to heat bath water, and includes those 
equipped with functions for hot water supply or for heating. 
4. Rapid heating system refers to heating period of 200 seconds or less (measured in 
accordance with the measurement method for heating period as determined by JIS 
S3031). 
5. Center flue heat exchanger refers to the duct that penetrates the hot water tank. 
6. On/off control refers to systems that are controlled only by ignition and extinguishing. 
7. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods,” based on “Criteria for judgment of manufacturers 
of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy consumption 
performance of oil water heaters (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry 
Notification No.58 of 2006). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of oil water heaters meeting the criteria to the total number of oil water 
heaters to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year.  
  130 11-4 Gas Cooking Appliances 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Gas cooking 
appliances Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Energy consumption efficiency for burner component shall not fall 
below the criteria listed in Table 1 for each category.  
(2) Energy consumption efficiency for the grill component shall not 
exceed the standard energy consumption efficiency calculated by 
using the formula listed in Table 2 for each category. 
(3) Energy consumption efficiency for the oven component shall not 
exceed the standard of energy consumption efficiency calculated by 
using the formula listed in Table 3 for each category. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate either reuse of components or 
recycling of materials. 
(2) The item is made of as large amount of recycled plastic as possible 
if plastic components are used. 
(3)Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(4)A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Items that meet any of the criteria below will not be considered as Gas cooking 
appliances under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section: 
(1) Items that were designed for commercial use. 
(2) Items that use gas (excluding city gas categorized under group 13A and liquefied 
petroleum gas) as its fuel source. 
(3) Gas grills. 
(4) Gas cooking tables. 
(5) Gas rice cookers. 
(6) Portable cooking stoves. 
2. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.). 
 
 131 Table1: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Burner Component of Gas 
Cooking Appliances 
Category Standard Energy 
Consumption 
Efficiency for 
Burner 
Component Type of gas 
cooking appliance Installation type Number of burners 
Gas burners Tabletop type  51.0 
Built-in type  48.5 
Gas burners with 
grill Tabletop type 2 or less 56.3 
3 or more 52.4 
Built-in type 2 or less 53.0 
3 or more 55.6 
Cabinet or stationary 
type  49.7 
Gas range   48.4 
Notes: 
1. Gas range refers to a combination of oven and burner. 
2. Tabletop type refers to an item that is to be placed on a table or a base for use. 
3. Built-in type refers to an item that is to be built into a wall or a base. 
4. Cabinet type refers to an item that is to be installed into its own cabinet. 
5. Stationary type refers to an item that is to be installed on a base or a floor surface. 
6. Energy consumption efficiency for burner component is calculated according to “3 
Energy Consumption Efficiency Measurement Methods (1),” based on “Criteria for 
judgment of manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. related to 
improvement of energy consumption performance of gas cooking equipment 
(Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No.56 of 2006). 
 
 
 
Table 2 : Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Grill Component of Gas 
Cooking Appliances 
Category Calculation Formula of 
Standard Energy 
Consumption Efficiency for 
Grill Component Combustion type Cooking method 
Single sided With water E=25.1Vg+123 
Without water E=25.1Vg+16.4 
Double sided With water E=12.5Vg+172 
Without water E=12.5Vg+101 
Notes: 
1. E and Vg express the following numeric values. 
    E : Glill section standard energy consumption efficiency (unit:Wh) 
Vg : Internal volume (unit:liter)  
2. Single sided refers to a method where food is heated from one side. 
3. Double sided refers to a method where food is heated from both sides. 
4. With water refers to a method where cooking is performed with the grill pan filled with 
water. 132 5. Without water refers to a method where cooking is performed with the grill pan not 
filled with water. 
6. Internal volume is obtained by the formula: grill area x height from the bottom of the 
grill plate to the top of the inlet (round to one decimal place). 
7. Energy consumption efficiency for grill component is calculated according to “3 
Energy Consumption Efficiency Measurement Methods (2),” based on “Criteria for 
judgment of manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. related to 
improvement of energy consumption performance of gas cooking equipment 
(Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No.56 of 2006). 
 
 
 
 
Table3 : Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Oven Component of Gas 
Cooking Appliances (includes Gas Ovens) 
Oven type Calculation formula of standard energy 
consumption efficiency for oven 
component 
Tabletop or Stationary Type E=18.6Vo+306 
Built in Type E=18.6Vo+83.3 
Notes: 
1. E and Vo express the following numeric values. 
E: Oven section standard energy consumption efficiency (unit:Wh) 
Vo:Internal volume(unit:liter)  
2. Tabletop type refers to an item that is to be placed on a table or a base for use. 
3. Built-in type refers to an item that is to be built into a wall or a base. 
4. Stationary type refers to an item that is to be installed on a base or a floor surface. 
5. Internal volume is obtained by the formula: grill area x height from the bottom of the 
grill plate to the top of the inlet (rounded to one decimal place). 
6. Energy consumption efficiency for oven component is calculated according to “3 
Energy Consumption Efficiency Measurement Methods (2),” based on “Criteria for 
judgment of manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement 
of energy consumption performance of gas cooking equipment (Ministry of Economy, 
Trade and Industry Notification No.56 of 2006). 
 
 
 
 (2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of gas cooking appliances meeting the criteria to the total number of gas 
cooking appliances to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year.  
  133 12. Lighting 
12-1. Lighting Equipment 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
LED lighting 
equipment Evaluation Criteria 
(1) LED lighting equipment excluding floodlight and security light shall 
satisfy the following requirements. 
a. Reference value 1: the intrinsic energy consumption efficiency 
meets the standard of the applicable category in Table 1-1. Or is 
the intrinsic energy consumption efficiency meets the standard 
of the applicable category in Table 1-2, having high effect of 
energy conservation such as initial illuminance correction 
control, passive sensor control, the brightness sensor control and 
dimming control. 
b. Reference value 2: the intrinsic energy consumption efficiency 
meets the standard of the applicable category in Table 1-2. 
c. Average color rendering index Ra of products are 80 or more.  
Exceptionally, average color rendering index Ra of downlights 
and high ceiling luminaries is 70 or more. 
(2) Floodlight and security light shall satisfy the following 
requirements. 
a. Intrinsic energy consumption efficiency meets the standard of 
the applicable category in Table 2. 
b. Average color rendering index Ra of products are 70 or more.   
(3) LED module rated lifespan is 40,000 hours or longer. 
(4) Contents of specified chemical substances does not exceed standard 
content ratio. Content ratio information of applicable chemical 
material is easily available on websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) The function with high effect of energy conservation such as initial 
illuminance correction control, passive sensor control, the 
brightness sensor control and dimming control should be appended. 
(2) The item should be designed so that it can be easily dismantled and 
its materials separated to facilitate recycling. 
(3) Organic solvent, or paint with as low odor as possible is used as 
coating. 
(4) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(5) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Illuminated 
signage using 
LED as the 
light source Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Rated lifespan is 30,000 hours or longer. 
(2) Contents of specified chemical substances does not exceed standard 
content ratio. Content ratio information of applicable chemical 
material is easily available on websites, etc. 
 134 Factors for Consideration 
(1) The item should be designed so that it can be easily dismantled and 
its materials separated to facilitate recycling. 
(2) Organic solvent, or paint with as low odor as possible is used as 
coating. 
(3) Plastic parts, when used, shall be comprised as much as possible of 
recycled plastic. 
(4) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(5) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. LED lighting equipment in this section refers to lighting equipment that uses white 
illuminating LED, hanging type, direct-mount type, built-in type, wall putting type and 
floodlight and security light. However, LED lighting equipment to attach LED lamps 
that have a structure of feeding power to the LED lamp through the cap, among LED 
lighting equipment that can install the LED lamp that used with traditional fluorescent 
lamps that have the same shape cap are excluded for the meanwhile. In addition, the 
guidance light specified in the "Guidelines for guidance lights and guidance signs (1999 
Public Notice No. 2 of the Fire and Disaster Management Agency)" shall not be 
included in LED lighting equipment. 
2. Intrinsic energy consumption efficiency of LED lighting equipment in LED lighting 
equipment in this section refers to the amount obtained by dividing luminous flux 
emitted by the equipment by rated energy efficiency (In the case where it is necessary to 
install an independent power source externally to the equipment, rated energy efficiency 
of the power source will be used in the calculation.). In addition, intrinsic energy 
consumption efficiency of equipment with a function to regulate amount of light and 
color temperature is assumed to be the ratio calculated from the total luminous flux at 
the maximum power consumption. 
3. Measuring method of Average color rendering index Ra is in accordance with light 
source color and color rendition evaluation method of source of light by JIS C 
7801(Measuring methods of lamps for general lighting) and JIS C 8152-2 (Photometry 
of white light emitting diode (LED) for general lighting-Part 2: LED modules and LED 
light engines). 
4. Downlight in this section of LED lighting equipment denote the one specified in JIS Z 
8113:1998” Lighting vocabulary.” 
5. High ceiling luminaire in this section of LED lighting equipment denote the one with 
11,000lm or more of luminous flux specified in JIS Z 8113:1998” Lighting vocabulary”. 
6. Floodlight in this section of LED lighting equipment denote the one specified in JIS Z 
8113:1998” Lighting vocabulary.” 
7. "Security light"   in this section of LED lighting equipment denote the lighting lamps 
aimed at securing the necessary illuminance from the viewpoint of prevention of crime 
and securing safe passage through installation on a road or the like. 
8. LED module rated lifespan of LED lighting equipment in this section refers to the 
amount of time it takes for the initial luminous flux to decrease by 70%. Measuring 
method is in accordance with JIS C 8152-3 (Photometry of white light emitting diode 
(LED) for general lighting-Part 3: measurement methods for lumen maintenance). 135 9. Measuring method of the total luminous flux for LED lighting equipment is in 
accordance with JIS C 8105-5:2011, The Illuminator 5th: Method of Measuring 
Light Distribution. 
10. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
11. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of 
other accessories is to be determined in accordance with JIS C 0950. 
12. Illuminated signage using LED as the light source in this section refers to panels and 
signs whose letters, etc. are illuminated by an internal LED light. The light source, 
including heat radiation, is protected. In addition, the guidance light specified in the 
"Guidelines for guidance lights and guidance signs (1999 Public Notice No. 2 of the 
Fire and Disaster Management Agency)" shall not be included in LED lighting 
equipment. 
13. Rated lifespan of Illuminated signage using LED as the light source in this section 
refers to the amount of time it takes for the initial luminous flux to decrease by 50%. 
14. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or 
the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.). 
15. Each procurement organization makes compare and examine to select the one that 
safety and quality control will be performed enough. 
16. In order to achieve an adequate management of chemical substances, each 
procurement organization will manage and preserve content information of 
specified chemical substances that had been confirmed upon acquisition of the 
product. 
 
 
 
Table 1-1: Reference value 1 of Intrinsic Energy Consumption Efficiency of LED 
Lighting Equipment (excluding floodlight and security light) 
Light source 
color Intrinsic energy 
consumption efficiency 
Daylight 
144lm/W or more Daylight white 
White 
Warm white 
102lm/W or more Usual electric 
bulb color 
Notes: 
1. Light source color is in accordance with the category of the light source color by JIS Z 
9112(Classification of fluorescent lamps and light emitting diodes by chromaticity and 
color rendering property) (same applies Table 1-2 and Table 2). 136 2. Equipment emitting any color of other than daylight, daylight white, white, warm 
white and usual electric bulb color will not be considered as LED lighting equipment 
under consideration in the evaluation criteria in this section. 
3. As for downlights of mount hole size for equipment are 300 mm or smaller, emitting 
color of daylight, daylight white, white, standard of intrinsic energy consumption 
efficiency shall be 114 lm/W or more, as for warm white and usual electric bulb color, 
standard of intrinsic energy consumption efficiency shall be 96lm/W or more. 
4. As for high ceiling luminaire emitting color of daylight, daylight white, white, 
standard of intrinsic energy consumption efficiency shall be 156 lm/W or more. 
 
 
Table 1-2: Reference value 2 of Intrinsic Energy Consumption Efficiency of LED 
Lighting Equipment (excluding floodlight and security light) 
Light source color Intrinsic energy 
consumption efficiency 
Daylight 
120lm/W or more Daylight white 
White 
Warm white 85lm/W or more Usual electric bulb color 
Notes: 
1. As for downlights of mount hole size for equipment are 300 mm or smaller, emitting 
color of daylight, daylight white, white, standard of intrinsic energy consumption 
efficiency shall be 95 lm/W or more, as for warm white and usual electric bulb color, 
standard of intrinsic energy consumption efficiency shall be 80lm/W or more. 
2. As for high ceiling luminaire emitting color of daylight, daylight white, white, standard 
of intrinsic energy consumption efficiency shall be 130 lm/W or more. 
 
 
Table 2: Standard of Intrinsic Energy Consumption Efficiency of floodlight and security 
light 
Light source color Intrinsic energy consumption efficiency 
Floodlight Security light 
Daylight 
105lm/W or more 80lm/W or more Daylight white 
White 
Warm white 90lm/W or more Not coverd Usual electric bulb color 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of LED lighting equipment excluding floodlight and security light 
meeting the criteria of each reference value 1 and reference value 2 to the total number of 
products to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
For floodlight and security light, ratio of the number of meeting the criteria to the total number 
of products to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  137 12-2. Lamps 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Fluorescent 
lamps (tube 
type 40 
fluorescent 
lamps) Evaluation Criteria  
Product meets one of the following criteria. 
(1) High-frequency lighting (Hf) lamps meet the following criteria. 
a. Lamp efficiency is no less than 100lm/W. 
b. Average color rendering index Ra of 80 or more. 
c. Tube diameter of no more than 25.5( 1.2) mm. 
d. No more than average of 5 mg encapsulated mercury per 
product. 
e. Rated life of at least 10,000 hours. 
(2) Rapid-start fluorescent lamps or fluorescent lamps with starter, 
meet the following criteria. 
a. Lamp efficiency is no less than 851m/W. 
b. Average color rendering index Ra of 80 or more. 
c. Tube diameter of no more than 32.5 ( 1.5) mm. 
d. No more than average of 5 mg encapsulated mercury per 
product. 
e. Rated life is at least 10,000 hours. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Light 
bulb-shaped 
lamps Evaluation Criteria 
Meet one of the following criteria. 
(1) Self-ballasted LED-lamps meet the following criteria. 
a. If the type and shape of the lamp is type A and the type of base 
is E26 or E17, meet the criteria for each classification of light 
source color shown in Table 1. 
b. Other than above a., lamp efficiency meets the standard for the 
applicable category of light source color in Table 2. However, 
for reflective lamps whose divergence is less than 90 degrees, 
the lamp efficiency is no less than 50lm/W. 
c. Average color rendering index Ra of 70 or more. 
d. Rated life is at least 40,000 hours. However, for reflective 
lamps whose divergence is less than 90 degrees, rated life shall 
be at least 30,000 hours. 
(2) Self-ballasted fluorescent lamps meet the following criteria. 
a. Energy consumption efficiency is not lower than the standard 
energy consumption efficiency of applicable category in Table 
3. 
b. No more than average 4 mg encapsulated mercury per product.  
c. Rated life is at least 6,000 hours 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 138 account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Self-ballasted LED lamps and Self-ballasted fluorescent lamps under consideration 
in the evaluation criteria in this section fit directly into an incandescent socket. 
However, it will not apply for lamps equipped with such as passive sensor and 
emergency lighting (direct current circuit). 
2. Measuring methods of Average color rendering index Ra is in accordance with light 
source color and color rendition evaluation method of source of light by JIS C 7801 
(Measuring methods of lamps for general lighting). 
3. Light source color is in accordance with the category of the light source color by JIS 
Z 9112(Classification of fluorescent lamps and light emitting diodes by chromaticity 
and color rendering property). 
4. Equipment emitting any color of other than daylight, daylight white, white, warm 
white and usual electric bulb color will not be considered as Fluorescent lamps and 
Light bulb-shaped lamps under consideration in the evaluation criteria in this 
section. 
5. Self-ballasted LED lamps in this section denotes white LED light bulb-shaped lamps 
used for general lighting purpose. 
6. The lamp type and shape is type A of the bulb-shaped LED lamp of this section 
means that the symbol indicating the type and shape prescribed in JIS C 8158 (bulb 
type LED lamp for general lighting (power supply voltage is over 50 V)) is "type A 
(LDA) ". 
The type of base is E26 or E17 means that the symbol representing the type of 
mouthpiece of JIS is "E 26" or "E 17". 
7. Rated life of Self-ballasted LED lamps in this section refers to the total amount of 
lighting time until the initial luminous flux to decrease by 70%. The method of 
measurements is in accordance with JIS C 8152-3 (Photometry of white light 
emitting diode for general lighting-Part 3: measurement methods for lumen 
maintenance). 
8. Rated life of Self-ballasted fluorescent lamps in this section refers to the short one 
either the total amount of lighting time until lamps no longer start or the total amount 
of lighting time until the initial total luminous flux to decrease by 60%. The method 
of measurements is in accordance with JIS C 7620-2 (Self-ballasted fluorescent 
lamps for general lighting services-Part 2: Performance specifications). 
9. When procuring lamp for emergency lighting equipment, each procurement 
organization confirms the applicability of the equipment enough. 
 
 
 
Table 1: Standard of Lamp Efficiency for Self-ballasted LED Lamps of type A (E26 and 
E17 base) 
Light source color Lamp efficiency 
Daylight 
110.0lm/W or more Daylight white 
White 
Warm white 98.6lm/W or more Usual electric bulb color 139 Notes:  
When any of the following applies, the criteria for each division of light source color 
shown in Table 2 shall be satisfied. 
1. Those with a power supply voltage of 50 V or less. 
2. Those having an average color rendering index Ra of 90 or more. 
3. Those with dimmer compatible function. 
 
 
Table 2: Standard of Lamp Efficiency for Self-ballasted LED Lamps (excluding type A 
(E26 and E17 base)) 
Light source color Lamp efficiency 
Daylight 
80lm/W or more Daylight white 
White 
Warm white 70lm/W or more Usual electric bulb color 
Notes: 
For the Self-ballasted LED Lamps regulate amount of light and light color temperature, the 
standard of the lamp efficiency is the value in which 5lm/W is subtracted from the 
applicable category of light source color in Table 2. The lamp efficiency of that is assumed 
to be the ratio calculated from the total luminous flux at the maximum power consumption.  
 
 
 
 
Table 3: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency of Self-ballasted Fluorescent Lamp 
Category Standard 
energy 
consumption 
efficiency Fluorescent 
lamp size 
category Light source color 
of  
Fluorescent lamp Shape of fluorescent lamp 
10 Usual electric bulb 
color  60.6 
Daylight white 58.1 
Daylight 55.0 
15 Usual electric bulb 
color  67.5 
Daylight white 65.0 
Daylight 60.8 
25 Usual electric bulb 
color Fluorescent lamp is exposed 72.4 
Fluorescent lamp is not 
exposed 69.1 
Daylight white Fluorescent lamp is exposed 69.5 
Fluorescent lamp is not 
exposed 66.4 
Daylight Fluorescent lamp is exposed 65.2 
Fluorescent lamp is not 
exposed 62.3 140 Notes: 
1. Equipment that meet any of the following criteria will not be considered as 
Self-ballasted fluorescent lamp under consideration in the evaluation criteria. 
(1) Ones structured as to have a reflector. 
(2) Ones having a function to regulate light. 
(3) Ones designed for use in henhouse. 
(4) Ones allowing separation of fluorescent lamp. 
(5) Ones whose globe for fluorescent lamp protection is transparent. 
2. Fluorescent lamp size category refers to the category of size prescribed under JIS C 
7620-2. 
3. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods,” based on “Criteria for judgment of manufacturers 
of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy consumption 
performance of Lighting equipment that uses only fluorescent lamps as the main light 
source (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No.54 of 2010). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of each item meeting the criteria to the total number of items to be 
purchased in the fiscal year. 
  141 13. Vehicles, etc. 
13-1. Vehicles  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Vehicles Evaluation criteria 
Vehicles generate significantly less environmental impact compared to 
average vehicles by using new technologies, etc. and fall into one of the 
following categories. 
(1) Electric vehicles 
(2) Natural gas vehicles 
(3) Hybrid vehicles 
(4) Plug-in hybrid vehicles 
(5) Fuel cell vehicles 
(6) Hydrogen vehicles 
(7) Clean diesel vehicles (limited to with a riding capacity of 10 persons or 
less (hereinafter referred to as Passenger vehicles)). The same applies 
below.) 
(8) Passenger vehicles and Small buses 
a. Gasoline vehicles 
Passenger vehicles meet the emission standards listed in Table 1 
and shall meet the standard fuel efficiency of the applicable 
category in Table 2-1. Passenger vehicles with a riding capacity of 
11 persons or more with a gross vehicle weight of 3.5 tons or less 
(hereinafter referred to as Small buses) shall meet the emission 
standards listed in Table 1 and shall meet the standard fuel 
efficiency of the applicable category in Table 3. 
b. Diesel vehicles 
Small buses meet the standard fuel efficiency of the applicable 
category in Table 3. 
(9) Small freight vehicles 
a. Gasoline vehicles 
Freight vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of 3.5 tons or less 
(hereinafter referred to as Small freight vehicles) meet the 
emission standards listed in Table 1 and meet the standard fuel 
efficiency of the applicable category in Table 4-1. 
b. Diesel vehicles 
Small freight vehicles meet the standard fuel efficiency of the 
applicable category in Table 5. 
(10) Heavy vehicles 
a. Passenger vehicles with a riding capacity of 11 persons or more 
with a gross vehicle weight of 3.5 tons or more meet the standard 
fuel efficiency of the applicable category in Table 6. 
b. Freight vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of 3.5 tons or more 
(excluding traction engine. Hereinafter referred to as Trucks.) 
meet the standard fuel efficiency of the applicable category in 
Table 7. 
c. Freight vehicles with a gross weight of 3.5 tons or more (limited 
to traction engine. Hereinafter referred to as Tractors.) meet the 142 standard fuel efficiency of the applicable category in Table 8. 
(11) LP gas vehicles 
a. Passenger vehicles shall meet the emission standards listed in Table 
1 and meet the standard fuel efficiency of the applicable category in 
Table 2. 
b. Small freight vehicles (limited to with a gross weight of 2.5 tons or 
less) meet the emission standards listed in Table 1 and shall meet 
the standard fuel efficiency of the applicable category in Table 9. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) Global warming potential of the material used for air conditioner is 150 
or small. 
(2) The item is designed for long-term use, taking into account 
conservation of resources so that reuse of its materials is facilitated 
after its useful life, based on the evaluation criteria of the Act on the 
Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. Especially, if the 
components include rare metals, reusing them should be taken into 
consideration when designing the products. 
(3) The item uses recycled material as much as possible. 
(4) Plastic or synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed is used as much as possible. 
(5) The eco-drive support function is installed. 
Notes: 
1. Vehicles under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section include 
passenger cars, small-size cars, and mini-sized cars (excluding motorcycles), Article 
2 of Road Transportation Vehicle Law Enforcement Rule (No.74 of Transportation 
Ministerial Ordinance on August 16, 1951).  
2. For Hybrid vehicles and Clean diesel vehicles, if it shall not meet the standards of 
fuel efficiency for their classification in each tables corresponding to the fuel kind 
and the model of vehicles, it does not assumed to meet the evaluation criteria in this 
section.  
3. Gross vehicle weight denotes the total vehicle weight in accordance with Article 40 
of Road Transportation Vehicle Law Enforcement Rule. The same applies below. 
4. Factors for consideration (1) apply to the designated products defined as the 
Fluorocarbons prescribed in Article 2, Paragraph 2 of the Act for Rationalized Use 
and Proper Management of Fluorocarbons (Act No. 64 of 2001) 
5. Global warming potential in this section denotes the numerical value that showed 
degree to which is heat-trapping gas brings global warming in ratio to which carbon 
dioxide brings global warming. 
6. Rare metals refers to the 31 types of metals (the seventeen rare earth elements are 
considered as one metal type) specified at the Special Meeting for the 
Comprehensive Assessment of Rare Metals at the Mining Panel of the Ministry of 
Economy, Trade and Industry. 
7. Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by a third party 
such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific analysis and 
evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product throughout 
its lifecycle. 143 8. The eco-drive support function is such as support functions to those who drive about 
the best accelerator operation, shift change, display of eco-drive execution condition, 
functions of analysis or diagnosis and select function of energy conservation route 
that synchronizes with car navigation system. 
9. It is necessary to proactively utilize bioethanol-blend gasoline (E3, E10 and ETBE) 
for common official vehicles (passenger vehicles for ordinary official use (limited to 
with a riding capacity of no more than 10 persons) among standard vehicles and 
small vehicles. The same applies below.)  in the region where the supply system have 
already in place. 
10. For vehicles using diesel oil as fuel, it is necessary to proactively utilize biodiesel 
fuel mixed diesel fuel (B5) in the region where the supply system is already in place. 
 
 
Table 1: Emission Standards for Gasoline Vehicles and LP gas Vehicles 
Category Nitrogen 
oxide Non-methane 
hydrocarbon Carbon 
monoxide 
Passenger vehicles 
 JC08mode 1.15g/km or 
less 0.013g/km or less 0.013g/km or 
less 
WLTCmode 1.15g/km or 
less 0.05g/km or less 0.025g/km or 
less 
Small buses(1.7tons or 
less) 
Light-duty freight 
vehicles JC08mode 1.15g/km or 
less 0.025g/km or less 0.025g/km or 
less 
WLTCmode 1.15g/km or 
less 0.05g/km or less 0.025g/km or 
less 
Small buses(1.7tons or 
more) 
Medium-duty freight 
vehicles JC08mode 2.55g/km or 
less 0.025g/km or less 0.035g/km or 
less 
WLTCmode 2.55g/km or 
less 0.075g/km or less 0.035g/km or 
less 
Mini-size freight 
vehicles JC08mode 4.02g/km or 
less 0.025g/km or less 0.025g/km or 
less 
WLTCmode 4.02g/km or 
less 0.05g/km or less 0.025g/km or 
less 
Notes: 
1. Particle-state matter should be extent considered that there is no exhaust. 
2. Light-duty freight vehicles refer to freight vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of 1.7tons 
or less. The same applies below.  
3. Medium-duty freight vehicles refer to freight vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of 
1.7tons or more and 3.5 tons or less. The same applies below. 
4. Mini-size freight vehicles refer to mini cars among freight vehicles. The same applies 
below. 
5. Depending on the measurement mode of the exhaust gas, the value in either JC08 mode or 
WLTC mode shall be satisfied. 
 
 
 144 Table 2: Standard Fuel Efficiency in JC08 Mode for Gasoline Passenger Vehicles, LP 
Gas Vehicles and Diesel Passenger Vehicles 
Category Standard fuel efficiency 
(minimum) 
Gasoline Diesel LP Gas 
Vehicle weight of less than 741kg 24.6km/L 27.1km/L 19.2km/L 
Vehicle weight of  741kg or more,  
but less than 856kg  24.5km/L 27.0km/L 19.2km/L 
Vehicle weight of  856kg or more,  
but less than 971kg 23.7km/L 26.1km/L 18.5km/L 
Vehicle weight of  971kg or more, 
but less than 1,081kg 23.4km/L 25.8km/L 18.3km/L 
Vehicle weight of 1,081kg or more, 
but less than 1,196kg 21.8km/L 24.0km/L 17.1km/L 
Vehicle weight of 1,196kg or more, 
but less than 1,311kg 20.3km/L 22.4km/L 15.9km/L 
Vehicle weight of 1,311kg or more, 
but less than 1,421kg 19.0km/L 20.9km/L 14.9km/L 
Vehicle weight of 1,421kg or more, 
but less than 1,531kg 17.6km/L 19.4km/L 13.8km/L 
Vehicle weight of 1,531kg or more, 
but less than 1,651kg 16.5km/L 18.2km/L 12.9km/L 
Vehicle weight of 1,651kg or more, 
but less than 1,761kg 15.4km/L 17.0km/L 12.1km/L 
Vehicle weight of 1,761kg or more, 
but less than 1,871kg 14.4km/L 15.9km/L 11.3km/L 
Vehicle weight of 1,871kg or more, 
but less than 1,991kg 13.5km/L 14.9km/L 10.6km/L 
Vehicle weight of 1,991kg or more, 
but less than 2,101kg 12.7km/L 14.0km/L 10.0km/L 
Vehicle weight of 2,101kg or more, 
but less than 2,271kg 11.9km/L 13.1km/L 9.3km/L 
Vehicle weight of 2,271kg or more 10.6km/L 11.7km/L 8.3km/L 
Notes:  
Vehicle weight refers to the weight of a vehicle when empty as specified in Item 6, Article 1 of 
the safety standards for road trucking vehicles (No.67 statute of the Transport Ministry 
enacted in 1951). The same applies below.  
 
 
 
Table 3: Standard Fuel Efficiency in JC08 Mode for Small Buses (with a gross vehicle weight 
of 3.5 tons or less) 
Category Standard fuel efficiency 
(minimum) 
Small buses fueled with gasoline 8.5km/L 
Small buses fueled with diesel oil 9.7km/L 145 Table 4: Standard Fuel Efficiency in JC08 Mode for Gasoline Small Freight Vehicles  
Category Standard fuel 
efficiency 
(minimum) Type of motor 
vehicle Type of 
transmission Vehicle weight Structure of 
motor vehicle 
Mini-size 
freight 
vehicles Manual  Less than 741kg 
A 23.2km/L 
 741kg or more 20.3km/L 
Other than 
manual Less than 741kg 20.9km/L 
741kg or more, but less 
than 856kg 19.6km/L 
856kg or more 18.9km/L 
Manual Less than 741kg 
B 18.2km/L 
741kg or more, but less 
than 856kg 18.0km/L 
856kg or more, but less 
than 971kg 17.2km/L 
971kg or more 16.4km/L 
Other than 
manual Less than 741kg 16.4km/L 
741kg or more, but less 
than 856kg 16.0km/L 
856kg or more, but less 
than 971kg 15.4km/L 
971kg or more 14.7km/L 
Light-duty 
freight 
vehicles Manual  Less than 1,081kg  18.5km/L 
1,081kg or more  17.1km/L 
Other than 
manual  Less than 1,081kg  17.4km/L 
1,081kg or more, but less 
than1,196kg  15.8km/L 
1,196kg or more  14.7km/L 
Medium-duty 
freight 
vehicles Manual  
A 14.2km/L 
Other than 
manual  Less than 1,311kg 13.3km/L 
1,311kg or more 12.7km/L 
Manual  Less than 1,311kg B1 11.9km/L 
B2 11.2km/L 
1,311kg or more, but less 
than1,421kg B1 10.6km/L 
B2 10.2km/L 
1,421kg or more, but less 
than1,531kg B1 10.3km/L 
B2 9.9km/L 
1,531kg or more, but less 
than1,651kg B1 10.0km/L 
B2 9.7km/L 
1,651kg or more, but less 
than1,761kg B1 9.8km/L 
B2 9.3km/L 
1,761kg or more B1 9.7km/L 
B2 8.9km/L 146 Other than 
manual  Less than 1,311kg B1 10.9km/L 
B2 10.5km/L 
1,311kg or more, but less 
than1,421kg B1 9.8km/L 
B2 9.7km/L 
1,421kg or more, but less 
than1,531kg B1 9.6km/L 
B2 8.9km/L 
1,531kg or more, but less 
than1,651kg B1 9.4km/L 
B2 8.6km/L 
1,651kg or more B2 7.9km/L 
1,651kg or more, but less 
than1,761kg 
B1 9.1km/L 
1,761kg or more, but less 
than1,871kg 8.8km/L 
1,871kg or more 8.5km/L 
Notes: 
1. The term Structure A in this table refers to structures that meet to all of the criteria 
listed below. The same applies below. 
a. The value obtained by dividing maximum authorized freight mass by gross 
vehicle weight is 0.3 or less.  
b. The passenger seating section and the cargo carrying section are installed in the 
same vehicle compartment, and the said compartment and the exterior are 
separated by a fixed roof and dividing walls such as window glass, etc.  
c. The engine is located in front of the driver's compartment.  
2. The term Structure B in this table refers to all structures other than Structure A. The 
same applies below. 
3. The term Structure B1 in this table refers to all structures that fulfill the requirements 
set forth in 1b. The same applies below. 
4. The term Structure B2 in this table refers to all structures other than B1. The same 
applies below. 
 
 
 
Table 5: Standard Fuel Efficiency in JC08 Mode for Diesel Small Freight Vehicles  
Category Standard fuel 
efficiency 
(minimum) Type of motor 
vehicle Type of 
transmission Vehicle weight Structure of  
motor vehicle 
Mini-size 
freight 
vehicle Manual Less than 741kg 
A 25.5 km/l 
741kg or more 22.3 km/l 
Other than 
manual Less than 741 kg 23.0 km/l 
741 kg or more, but 
less than 856 kg 21.6 km/l 
856 kg or more 20.8 km/l 
Manual Less than 741 kg B 20.0 km/l 147 741 kg or more, but 
less than 856 kg 19.8 km/l 
856 kg or more, but 
less than 971 kg 18.9 km/l 
971 kg or more 18.0 km/l 
Other than 
manual Less than 741 kg 18.0 km/l 
741 kg or more, but 
less than 856 kg 17.6 km/l 
856 kg or more, but 
less than 971 kg 16.9 km/l 
971 kg or more 16.2 km/l 
Light-duty 
freight 
vehicles Manual Less than 1,081kg  20.4 km/l  
1,081kg or more  18.8 km/l  
Other than 
manual Less than 1,081 kg  19.1 km/l  
1,081 kg or more, but 
less than 1,196 kg  17.4 km/l 
1,196 kg or more  16.2 km/l 
Medium-duty 
freight 
vehicles 
 Manual Less than 1,421 kg A or B1 14.5 km/l 
B2 14.3 km/l 
1,421 kg or more, but 
less than 1,531 kg A or B1 14.1 km/l 
B2 12.9 km/l 
1,531 kg or more, but 
less than 1,651 kg A or B1 13.8 km/l 
B2 12.6 km/l 
1,651 kg or more, but 
less than 1,761 kg A or B1 13.6 km/l 
B2 12.4 km/l 
1,761 kg or more, but 
less than 1,871 kg A or B1 13.3 km/l 
B2 12.0 km/l 
1,871 kg or more, but 
less than 1,991 kg A or B1 12.8 km/l 
B2 11.3 km/l 
1,991 kg or more, but 
less than 2,101 kg A or B1 12.3 km/l 
B2 11.2 km/l 
2,101 kg or more A or B1 11.7 km/l 
B2 11.1 km/l 
 
 
Other than 
manual Less than 1,421 kg A or B1 13.1 km/l 
B2 12.5 km/l 
1,421 kg or more, but 
less than 1,531 kg A or B1 12.8 km/l 
B2 11.8 km/l 
1,531 kg or more, but 
less than 1,651 kg A or B1 11.5 km/l 
B2 10.9 km/l 
1,651 kg or more, but 
less than 1,761 kg A or B1 11.3 km/l 
B2 10.6 km/l 
1,761 kg or more, but 
less than 1,871 kg A or B1 11.0 km/l 
B2 9.7 km/l 148 1,871 kg or more, but 
less than 1,991 kg A or B1 10.8 km/l 
B2 9.5 km/l 
1,991 kg or more, but 
less than 2,101 kg A or B1 10.3 km/l 
B2 9.0 km/l 
2,101 kg or more A or B1 9.4 km/l 
B2 8.8 km/l 
 
 
  
Table 6: Standard Fuel Efficiency in Heavy Vehicle Mode for Route Buses and General 
Buses (with a gross vehicle weight of 3.5 tons or more) 
Category Standard fuel efficiency 
(minimum) 
Route buses General buses 
Gross vehicle weight of 3.5 tons or more, 
but less than 6 tons 6.97km/L 9.04km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 6 tons or more, but 
less than 8 tons 6.52km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 8 tons or more, but 
less than 10 tons 6.30km/L 6.37km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 10 tons or more, 
but less than 12 tons 5.77km/L 5.70km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 12 tons or more, 
but less than 14 tons  5.14km/L 5.21km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 14 tons or more, 
but less than 16 tons 4.23km/L 4.06km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 16 tons  3.57km/L 
Notes: 
1. Route buses refer to the vehicles for public service vehicle transportation business 
that decides routes other than route such as national expressway and operates 
regularly, with a gross vehicle weight of 3.5tons or more and with a riding capacity of 
11 persons or more. 
2. General buses refer to other than route buses, with a gross vehicle weight of 3.5tons 
or more and with a riding capacity of 11 persons or more. 
 
 
 
Table 7: Standard Fuel Efficiency in Heavy Vehicle Mode for Tracks (with a gross 
vehicle weight of 3.5tons or more) 
Category Maximum 
authorized freight 
mass Standard fuel 
efficiency 
(minimum) 
Gross vehicle weight of 3.5 tons or more, 
but less than 7.5tons 1.5tons or less 10.83km/L 
1.5tons or more, 
but less than 2tons 10.35km/L 
2tons or more, but 
less than 3tons 9.51km/L 149 3tons or more 8.12km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 7.5 tons or more, 
but less than 8 tons  7.24km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 8 tons or more, but 
less than 10 tons  6.52km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 10 tons or more, but 
less than 12 tons  6.00km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 12 tons or more, but 
less than 14 tons   5.69km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 14 tons or more, but 
less than 16 tons  4.97km/L 
Gross vehicle weight 16 tons or more but 
less than 20 tons  4.15 km/L  
Gross vehicle weight 20 tons   4.04 km/L  
 
 
 
Table 8: Standard Fuel Efficiency in Heavy Vehicle Mode for Tractors(traction engine 
with a gross vehicle weight of 3.5tons or more) 
Category Standard fuel efficiency 
(minimum) 
Gross vehicle weight of no more than 20 tons 3.09 km/l  
Gross vehicle weight 20 tons or more 2.01 km/l  
 
 
 
Table 9: Standard Fuel Efficiency in 10-15 Mode for LP Gas Small Freight Vehicles 
Category Standard fuel 
efficiency 
(minimum) Type of motor 
vehicle Type of 
transmissi
on Vehicle weight Structure of 
motor vehicle 
Mini-size 
freight 
vehicles Manual Less than 703 kg A 15.8 km/l 
B 13.3 km/l 
703 kg or more, but less 
than 828 kg A 14.1 km/l 
B 13.1 km/l 
828 kg or more  12.1 km/l 
Other than 
manual Less than 703 kg A 14.8 km/l 
B 12.7 km/l 
703 kg or more, but less 
than 828 kg A 12.9 km/l 
B 12.1 km/l 
828 kg or more  11.7 km/l 
Light-duty 
freight 
vehicles Manual Less than 1,016 kg  13.9 km/l 
1,016 kg or more  12.3 km/l 
Other than 
manual Less than 1,016 kg  11.7 km/l 
1,016 kg or more  10.8 km/l 
Medium-duty
freight Manual Less than 1,266 kg A 11.3 km/l 
B 9.6 km/l 150 vehicles 
(limited to 
gross 
vehicle 
weight of 
2.5tons or 
less) 1,266 kg or more, but 
less than 1,516 kg  8.4 km/l 
1,516 kg or more  7.3 km/l 
Other than 
manual Less than 1,266 kg A 9.8 km/l 
B 8.8 km/l 
1,266 kg or more  8.1 km/l 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Total number of vehicles to purchase (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year is 
concerned. 
However, the target shall be set each common official vehicles and other than common official 
vehicles.  
  151 13-2. Tires 
 Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Tires for 
passenger cars Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Rolling resistance coefficient is 9 or less. 
(2) Product is not a spiked tire. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Increased life of product is considered. 
(2) Noise reduction during operation is considered. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(4) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Tires for passenger cars under consideration for evaluation criteria in this section 
refers to those sold on the market (excluding stud-less tires), and does not regulate 
tires that the car is equipped with at the time of purchase. 
2. Testing method of the rolling resistance coefficient is based on JIS D 4234. 
3. Item (1) in the Evaluation Criteria, wet grip performance must be 110 or more, 
measured by TEST METHOD FOR TYRE WET GRIP GRADING (C1 TYRES))  
4. Item (2) in the Evaluation Criteria takes in to consideration the aims of Regulations 
regarding the prevention of dust from spiked tires (Regulation No.55, 1990) whose 
aim is the prevention of dust from spiked tires in order to protect people’s health and 
to preserve the living environment. 
 
 
 
 Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of tires for passenger cars meeting the criteria to the total number of tires 
to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
  152 13-3 Engine Oil 
(1)Items and Evaluation Criteria 
2 cycle engine 
oil Evaluation Criteria  
(1) The rate of biodegradation within 28 days is 60% or more. 
(2) The 96 hour LC50 value for acute toxicity test using fish is 100 mg/l or 
more. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) A system for collection and reuse/recycling of used oil container.  
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(3) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Biodegradation testing should employ one of the following methods. 10-d window 
shall not be used for these testing methods. 
*OECD (Organization for Economic Co-Operation and Development) Chemical 
Substance Testing Guideline 
 301B (CO2 Production Testing) 
 301C (Modified MITI (I) Testing) 
 301F (Manometric Respirometry Testing) 
*ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) 
 D5864 (Standard testing method to determine the degree of aerobic 
biodegradation in water environment for lubricants and lubricant components) 
 D6731 (Standard testing method to determine the degree of aerobic 
biodegradation in water environment for lubricant inside an airtight respirometer 
and lubricant components) 
2. Acute toxicity testing using fish should employ one of the following methods. 
*JIS (Japan Industrial Standards) 
 K 0102 (Factory Drainage Testing Method) 
 K 0420-71 Series (10, 20, 30) 
(Water quality - Measurement of acute toxicity of chemical substance for 
fresh-water fish (zebra fish (cartilaginous, carps) – Part 1: Still water method; 
Part 2: Partially still water method; Part 3: Streaming method) 
*OECD (Organization for Economic Co-Operation and Development) 
 203 (Acute toxicity test for fish) 
For testing of insoluble products, WAF (Water Accommodated Fraction) or 
WSF (Water Soluble Fraction) that have been prepared in accordance with 
ASTM D6081 (Standard Practice for Aquatic Toxicity Testing of Lubricants: 
Sample Preparation and Results Interpretation) may be used. The 96hour LL50 
value need to be 100mg/l or higher for this purpose. 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio per each category of the amount (liters) meeting the criteria to the total amount (liters) to 
be purchased in the fiscal year.  153 14. Fire Extinguishers 
(1)Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Fire 
extinguishers Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Fire protection fluid shall use no less than 40% by weight of recycled 
material. 
(2) A system is in place for collection and reuse/recycling of used 
materials, and a system for the proper disposal of components which 
cannot be reused or recycled. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The item is designed so that it can be easily dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate either reuse of components or recycling 
of materials. 
(2) The item uses as large amount of recycled plastic as possible if plastic 
components are used. 
(3) Organic solvent, or paint with as low odor as possible is used as 
coating. 
(4) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal.  
(5) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:  
1. Fire extinguisher under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section 
denotes powder (ABC) fire extinguisher (powder fire extinguisher that is in 
accordance with “Ordinance to determine technical standards for fire extinguishers 
(Ministry of Home Affairs Ordinance 27, September 17, 1964).” applicable to all of 
A fire, B fire and Electric fire, and does not include aerosol type handy fire 
extinguishers, fire extinguishers for the ships and fire extinguishers for the aircraft.) 
and includes replacement fire protection fluid to be used during inspection. 
2. A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling denotes the fulfillment of 
the below requirements. 
A system for collection should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a collection system located at the 
store, or collection in response to the user’s request) for voluntarily collecting 
(collecting on its own or commissioning other companies to collect; includes 
situations where multiple businesses undertake the collection together) used fire 
extinguisher. 
b. Specific information for the collection of used mobile phones, etc. (collection 
method, collection location, etc.) are available for the users on the package, 
enclosed printed matter, user’s manual, or the website. 
A system for reuse and recycling should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products must be reused, material recycled and chemical recycled.  
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of collected products must energy 
recovered. 
3. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 154 recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.). 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of fire extinguishers meeting the criteria to the total number of fire 
extinguishers to be purchased in the fiscal year.  
  155 15. Uniforms and Work Clothes, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Uniforms and 
work clothes Evaluation Criteria  
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical) includes polyester 
fiber and/or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfill one of the following. 
(1) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used except lining. If polyester fiber are used less 
than 50% by weight of all fiber except lining, accounts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber, and no less than 50% by weight of 
polyester fiber except lining. 
(2) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber used, and a system for collecting, reuse and 
recycling materials after product use is established. 
(3) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber used. 
(4) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer content 
rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
(5) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer content 
rate accounts for no less than 4%, also a system for collecting, reuse 
and recycling materials after product use is established. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product use 
is established. 
(2) Fiber used for products contains unused fiber or reconstructed fiber as 
much as possible.  
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Caps Evaluation Criteria  
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical) includes polyester 
fiber and/or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfill one of the following. 
(1) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used. If polyester fiber are used less than 50% by 
weight of all fiber, accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber, 
and no less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber used, and a system for collecting, reuse and 
recycling materials after product use is established. 
(3) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber used. 
(4) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% 156 by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer content 
rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
(5) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer content 
rate accounts for no less than 4%, also a system for collecting, reuse 
and recycling materials after product use is established. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling after 
product use. 
(2) Fiber used for products or  accessories contains unused fiber or 
reconstructed fiber and bamboo fiber as much as possible.  
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Shoes Evaluation Criteria  
Products whose fiber content on the upper (natural and chemical) includes 
polyester fiber and/or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfill one of the 
following. 
(1) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used except lining. If polyester fiber are used less 
than 50% by weight of all fiber except lining, accounts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber, and no less than 50% by weight of 
polyester fiber except lining. 
(2) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber used. 
(3) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer content 
rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling after 
product use. 
(2) Fiber used for products contains unused fiber or reconstructed fiber as 
much as possible.  
(3) Where plastics are used on the upper or the lower part, recycled 
plastics, plastics made from plants or synthetic fibers that have been 
confirmed to have an environmental impact reducing effect have been 
used as much as possible. 
(4) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes:  
1. PET resins denote material that use recycled PET bottles and Textile products, etc. 
2. Weight of all fiber denotes the weight of all product excluding accessories such as 
button, fastener, hook and sewing thread, etc. from all of product. The weight of 157 accessories used recycled plastic (part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful 
product that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic 
that has been recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.), and synthetic 
fiber or plastics made from plant that is acknowledged for its environmental load 
reduction effects may be include “the weight of all fiber” and “the weight of 
polyester fiber from recycled PET resins, the weight of polyester fiber from 
recovered fiber or synthetic fiber made from plant that is acknowledged for its 
environmental load reduction effects” . 
3. Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
4. Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materially or chemically recycling 
processes. 
5. Unused fiber denoted fiber made from such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
6. Reconstructed fiber denoted fiber made from linear form materials created by 
decomposition of recovered fiber.  
7. A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling denotes the fulfillment of 
the below requirements. 
A system for collection should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a collection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in response to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or commissioning other companies 
to collect; includes situations where multiple businesses undertake the collection 
together) used products. 
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, specific information for the 
collection (collection method, collection location, etc.) of used products is 
available from the products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse and recycling should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products must be reused, material recycled and chemical recycled.  
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of collected products must energy 
recovered. 
8. Upper material means the part material corresponding to the parts of JIS S 5050 
(leather shoes) Appendix 1 "Name of each part", parts of decorative leather, waist, 
leather, wholecut and backstay. 
9. Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
denotes material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
by a third party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of 
the product throughout its lifecycle. 
10. Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material which is included in plant based synthetic fiber to the weight of all fiber. 
11. When cleaning the uniform and work cloths, each procurement organization should 
consider about the following: 
a. Choose the business who executes cleaning that fulfills the evaluation criteria of 
“Laundry and dry cleaning” (refer to Laundry and dry cleaning section).  158 b. Acknowledge thoroughly the labeling based on JIS L 0217 or JIS L 0001 
(Textiles - Care labelling code using symbols). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
1. Uniforms and work clothes, shoes: ratio of the number of uniforms and work clothes or 
shoes that meets the criteria to the total number of those containing polyester fiber or plant 
based synthetic fiber to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
2. Caps: ratio of the number of caps that meets the criteria to the total number of those 
containing polyester fiber or plant based synthetic fiber to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
 
  159 16. Interior Fixtures and Bedding 
16-1. Curtains, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Curtains 
 
Cloth blinds Evaluation Criteria  
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical) includes polyester fiber 
and/or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfill one of the following. 
(1) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used. If polyester fiber are used less than 50% by 
weight of all fiber, accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber, 
and no less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber used, and a system for collecting, reuse and 
recycling materials after product use is established. 
(3) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers accounts 
for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber used. 
(4) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of environmental 
load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% by weight of all 
fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer content rate accounts for no 
less than 10%. 
(5) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of environmental 
load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all 
fiber used and  bio-based synthetic polymer content rate accounts for no 
less than 4%, also a system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials 
after product use is established. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The use of brominated fire retardants is as minimized as possible. 
(2) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product use is 
established. 
(3) Fiber used for products contains unused fiber or reconstructed fiber as 
much as possible.  
(4) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Metal blinds Evaluation Criteria  
Solar reflectance is no less than the numeric value shown in Table. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into account 
ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1. PET resins denote material that use recycled PET bottles and fiber products, etc. 
2. Weight of all fiber denotes the weight of all product excluding accessories such as 
hook, runner, bracket and sewing thread, etc. from all of product. The weight of 
accessories used recycled plastic (part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful 
product that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, 
or the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 160 recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.)), and synthetic fiber or plastic 
made from plant whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
may be include “the weight of all fiber” and “the weight of polyester fiber from 
recycled PET resins, the weight of polyester fiber from recovered fiber or synthetic 
fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of environmental load has been 
confirmed.” 
3. Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
4. Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materially or chemically recycling 
processes. 
5. Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
denotes material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by 
a third party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the 
product throughout its lifecycle. 
6DBio-based synthetic polymer content rate denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material, which is included in plant based synthetic fiber to the weight of all fiber. 
7. A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling denotes the fulfillment of 
the below requirements. 
A system for collection should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a collection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in response to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or commissioning other companies to 
collect; includes situations where multiple businesses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, specific information for the collection 
(collection method, collection location, etc.) of used products is available from the 
products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse and recycling should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products must be reused, material recycled and chemical recycled. 
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of collected products must energy 
recovered. 
8. Unused fiber denotes fiber made from such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
9. Reconstructed fiber denotes fiber made from linear form materials created by 
decomposition of recovered fiber. 
10. The measuring method and calculating method for solar reflectance are according to 
JIS R 3106. L*value of those are according to JIS Z 8781-4. 
11. When cleaning the products, procurement organization should consider to choice the 
business who executes cleaning that fulfills the evaluation criteria of “Laundry and dry 
cleaning” (refer to Laundry and dry cleaning section).   
 
  161 Table: The standard for solar reflectance 
L* value The solar reflectance(%) 
70.0 or less 40.0 
More than 70.0, but less 
than 80.0 50.0 
More than 80.0 60.0 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the units of curtains, cloth blinds those containing polyester fiber or synthetic fiber 
made form plant and metal blind meet the criteria to the total number of to be purchased in the 
fiscal year. 
  162 16-2. Carpets 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Tufted carpets 
 
Tile carpets 
 
Woven carpets 
 
 Evaluation Criteria  
Recycled material including unused fiber, fiber from recovered fiber, 
recycled plastic and other recycled material makes up at least 25% of 
weight of entire product. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product use 
is established. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact when 
disposing. 
Needle-punch 
carpets Evaluation Criteria  
Fulfill one of the following. 
(1) Recycled material including unused fiber, fiber from recovered fiber, 
recycled plastic and other recycled material makes up at least 25% of 
weight of entire product. 
(2) Products includes synthetic fiber made from plant fulfill one of the 
following. 
a. Products whose fiber content includes biodegradable synthetic fiber 
or plastic made from plant whose reduction effect of environmental 
load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% by weight 
of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer content rate 
accounts for no less than 10%.  
b. Synthetic fiber or plastic made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 4%, also a system for 
collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product use is 
established. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product use 
is established. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Weight of entire product denotes that weight of all fiber, added resins and inorganic 
fraction, etc. 
2. Unused fiber denoted fiber made from such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
3. Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used clothing and 
used cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 163 4. Fiber from recovered fiber denotes fiber made mainly from recovered fiber created 
by materially or chemically recycled. 
5. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or 
the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.). 
6. Recycled material denotes material from part or all of products discarded  after 
used , remnants discarded during the manufacturing process or defective articles 
(This excludes material that has been recycled in the same process of 
manufacturing the product). 
7. Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
denotes material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
by a third party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and 
scientific analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the 
environmental load of the product throughout its lifecycle. 
8.  Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate denotes the rate by weight of 
plant-based material, which is included in plant based synthetic fiber to the weight 
of all fiber. 
9. A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling denotes the fulfillment 
of the below requirements. 
A system for collection should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a collection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in response to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or commissioning other companies 
to collect; includes situations where multiple businesses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, specific information for the 
collection (collection method, collection location, etc.) of used products is 
available from the products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse and recycling should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products must be reused, material recycled and chemical recycled.  
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of collected products must energy 
recovered. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of products that meet the criteria (m2) to the total amount of products to be purchased in 
the fiscal year (m2). 
  164 16-3. Blankets, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Blankets Evaluation Criteria  
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical) includes 
polyester fiber fulfill one of the following. 
(1) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers 
accounts for no less than 25% by weight of all fiber used. If 
polyester fiber are used less than 50% by weight of all fiber, 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber, and no less 
than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less 
than 10% by weight of all fiber used, and a system for collecting, 
reuse and recycling materials after product use is established. 
(3) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber used. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials after 
product use is established. 
(2) Fiber used for products contains unused fiber or reconstructed 
fiber as much as possible. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environmental 
impact upon disposal. 
Comforters Evaluation Criteria  
Fulfill one of the following. 
(1) Comforters that use either as fiber (natural and chemical) for 
both cover and filling polyester fiber products fulfill one of the 
following. 
a. Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no 
less than 50% by weight of all fiber of comforter’s cover 
and the filling. If polyester fiber are used less than 50% by 
weight of all fiber of comforter’s cover and the filling, 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber of 
comforter’s cover and the filling, and no less than 50% by 
weight of polyester fiber. 
b. Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no 
less than 10% by weight of all fiber, and a system for 
collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product use is 
established. 
c. Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered 
fibers accounts for no less than 25% by weight of both cover 
and filling polyester fiber used. 
(2) The filling contains 80% or more by weight of filling obtained 
from used comforters that have been appropriately washed and 
disinfected for recycled use. 
 165 Factors for Consideration  
(1) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials after 
product use is established. 
(2) Fiber used for products contains unused fiber or reconstructed 
fiber as much as possible. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environmental 
impact upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1. PET resins denote material that use recycled PET bottles and fiber products, etc. 
2. Weight of all fiber denotes the weight of all product excluding accessories such as 
button, fastener, hook and sewing thread, etc. from all of product.  The weight of 
accessories used recycled plastic (part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful 
product that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic 
that has been recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.)), may be include 
“the weight of all fiber” and “the weight of polyester fiber from recycled PET resins 
or polyester fiber from recovered fiber.” 
3. Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
4. Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materially or chemically recycling 
processes. 
5. Unused fiber denotes fiber made from such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
6. Reconstructed fiber denotes fiber made from linear form materials created by 
decomposition of recovered fiber. 
7. Filling in the evaluation criteria for comforters refer to cotton, lamb wool, down and 
synthetic material that are used to fill comforters. 
8. A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling denotes the fulfillment of 
the below requirements. 
A system for collection should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a collection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in response to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or commissioning other companies to 
collect; includes situations where multiple businesses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, specific information for the 
collection (collection method, collection location, etc.) of used products is 
available from the products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse and recycling should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products must be reused, material recycled and chemical recycled.  
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of collected products must energy 
recovered. 
9. When cleaning the products, procurement organizations should consider to choose the 
business who executes cleaning that fulfills the evaluation criteria of “Laundry and dry 
cleaning” (refer to Laundry and dry cleaning section). 166  
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
1. Blankets: ratio of the number of blankets meeting the criteria to the total number of those 
containing polyester fiber to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the 
fiscal year. 
2. Comforters: ratio of the number of comforters meeting the criteria to the total number of 
those containing polyester fiber, or containing recycled filling, to be purchased 
(including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  167 16-4. Beds 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Bed frames Evaluation Criteria 
With the exception of metals, the primary material meets, of the criteria 
below, (1) for plastic, (2) for wood, and (3) for paper. In addition, items 
whose secondary material include wood meets (2) a, b, and c. Items whose 
secondary material include paper (with the exception of virgin pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning, or with recycled wood pieces 
obtained from plywood or lumber factories) meets (3) b. 
(1) Recycled plastic makes up no less than 10% in weight of all plastic used. 
(2) Fulfill the following d, and depending on the raw materials used, fulfill   
the following a, b or c. 
a. Lumber from thinning, recycled wood pieces obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories. 
b. Lumber from thinning is in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. 
c. Other than above a, lumber used as raw material is in compliance 
with the regulations concerning forestry in its country or 
geographical area of origin. 
d. Discharge rate of formaldehyde from materials is no greater than 
0.02 mg/m²h, or the equivalent. 
(3) Fulfill the following. 
a. At least 50% recycled pulp content. 
b. If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used is to be 
in compliance with the regulations concerning forestry in its country 
or geographical area of origin. 
c. Above b. does not apply recycled wood pieces obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories, material left over from forestry and 
lumber with a small diameter. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(4) Designed for long-term use, taking into account maintenance, repair, and 
the replaceability of parts that wear. Designed to enable component reuse 
and easy disassembly for refurbishment and recycling, or the appropriate 
disposal of the separated parts after the item’s useful life. Special care 
taken in the design of the item’s metal components to enable long-term 
use, conservation of resources, and reuse of materials. 
(5) If the material includes wood, lumber that is used as the raw material 
(with the exception of lumber from thinning, or recycled wood pieces 
obtained from plywood or lumber factories) is to be obtained from a 
forest that is conducting a sustainable operation. 
(6) If the material includes paper, and furthermore, if virgin pulp is used, 
pulpwood that is used as the raw material is to be obtained from a forest 
that is conducting a sustainable operation. 
(7) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
(8) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 168 considered. 
Mattresses Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Products include polyester fiber or synthetic fiber made from plant used 
for filling components fulfill one of the following. 
a. Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers 
accounts for no less than 25% by weight of all fiber used. 
b. Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber used. 
c. Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
(2) All fiber used for felt are unused fiber or reconstructed fiber. 
(3) The amount of free formaldehyde excreted from material not to exceed 
75 ppm. 
(4) Fluorocarbons are not used as expanding agent for urethane foam. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The item is designed for long-term use, so that any consumable parts can 
be replaced and, after the item’s useful life, it can be dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and recycling, or the 
appropriate disposal of its separated parts. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into account ease 
of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Items that are used for special purposes such as medical care, nursing, or advanced 
medical care shall not be included in bed frames under consideration in the evaluation 
criteria of this section. 
2. Items that are used for advanced medical care (operating table, ICU bed, etc.) shall not be 
included in mattresses under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section. 
3. Fluorocarbons are the materials defined as the Fluorocarbons prescribed in Article 2, 
Paragraph 1 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Proper Management of Fluorocarbons, 
(Act No. 64 of 2001). 
4. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been recycled 
in the process of manufacturing the product.). 
5. PET resins denote material that use recycled PET bottles and fiber products, etc. 
6. Weight of all fiber denotes the weight of all product excluding accessories such as button, 
fastener, hook and sewing thread, etc. from all of product. The weight of accessories used 
recycled plastic and synthetic fiber or plastic made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed may be include “the weight of all fiber”, “the 
weight of polyester fiber from recycled PET resins, the weight of polyester fiber from 
recovered fiber or synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed”. 
7. Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 169 8. Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materially or chemically recycling 
processes. 
9. Discharge rate of no greater than 0.02 mg/m²h, or the equivalent denotes the following.  
Beds for domestic use which meet this formaldehyde discharge according to JIS S 1102 
fill this standard. 
a. Wood material with a corresponding JIS or Japan Agricultural Standards, whose 
criteria for formaldehyde discharge is regulated, must meet the criteria for F. 
b. Wood material that does not qualify for the standards outlined in item (a.) above must 
satisfy the below numbers when evaluated according to the method determined by JIS 
A 1460. 
Average Maximum 
0.5 mg/L 0.7 mg/L 
 
10. Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
denotes material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by  a 
third party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific analysis 
and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
11. Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material, which is included in plant-based synthetic fiber to the weight of all fiber.  
12. Felt denotes items created by forming linear fiber material into a sheet by needle-punch 
processing method. (This does not include items that use thermoplastic material or 
employ a bonding agent.) 
13. Unused fiber denoted fiber made from such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
14. Reconstructed fiber denotes fiber made from linear form materials created by 
decomposition of recovered fiber.  
15. Evaluation criteria for bed frames were determined for products whose primary material 
other than metal is plastic, wood, or paper. Under consideration in the evaluation criteria, 
it does not include products whose primary material is metal and does not use plastic, 
wood, or paper. 
16. When procurement bed frame and mattress as a unit, each part shall comply with the 
respective criteria above. 
17. Evaluation criteria (2) b for bedframes applies to the subject of Clean Wood Act. 
18. Evaluation criteria (3) c for bedframes, for other than the subject of the Clean Wood Act, 
does not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces such as obtained from plywood or lumber 
factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a small diameter. 
19. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest where pulpwood 
producing wood and paper originates from is to be conducted. 
a. For subject of Clean Wood Act, Wood-related Entities is in accordance with Clean 
Wood Act and the Forest Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Legality and 
Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” For other than 
Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in accordance with the Forest Agency’s 
Guideline. 170 b. In the case of items other than subject to Clean Wood Act, to be conducted in 
accordance with the above Guideline. In addition, certification system of forest, 
timber, etc. by prefectures etc. can be utilized for confirmation of legality. 
Regarding raw timber where the contract between the lumber company and the 
processing and marketing companies has been made prior to April 1, 2006, a supplier 
who owns raw materials or products etc. as of April 1, 2006, specifies the raw 
materials or products etc., and reports them in advance to the Forestry Agency once a 
year, and is a specified raw material or product etc. If it is stated in the certificate, the 
proof that it is a legal wood prescribed in the above guidelines is unnecessary. 
 The period of time for which this exceptional clause is applicable will be determined in 
consideration with market trend. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of bed frames, mattresses, and bed frames and mattresses acquired as a 
unit meeting the criteria to the total number of those to be purchased (including lease/rental 
agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  171 17. Work Gloves 
 Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Work gloves Evaluation Criteria  
Products whose main material is fiber content (natural and chemical) fulfill 
one of the following. 
(1) Polyester fiber products shall include polyester fiber from recycled PET 
resins. At least 50% by weight of all natural and chemical fiber used 
(excluding anti-slip coating) shall be polyester fiber from recycled PET 
resins. 
(2) Fiber comprised of post-consumer material makes up at least 50% by 
weight of the entire product weight (excluding anti-slip coating). 
(3) Unused fiber makes up at least 50% by weight of the entire product 
weight (excluding anti-slip coating). 
(4) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used (excluding anti-slip coating) and bio-based 
synthetic polymer content rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) Fiber other than polyester fiber from recycled PET resin should also be 
made of unused fiber or reconstructed fiber (excluding anti-slip 
coating). 
(2) Does not use bleaches. 
Notes: 
1. PET resins denote material that use recycled PET bottles and products, etc. 
2. Post-consumer material refers to material or product discarded after used as a 
product. 
3. Unused fiber denotes fiber made from such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
4. Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
denotes material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by 
a third party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the 
product throughout its lifecycle. 
5. Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material, which is included in plant based synthetic fiber to the weight of all fiber. 
6. Reconstructed fiber is created by decomposing and creating into linear form materials 
such as remnants from manufacturing of clothing, and products that are no longer in 
use. 
 
 
 
 Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of pairs of gloves meeting the criteria to the total number of pairs of 
gloves to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
  172 18. Other Textile Products 
18-1. Tents and Sheets 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Tents Evaluation criteria 
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical) includes polyester 
fiber or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfill one of the following. 
(1) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber. If polyester fiber are used less than 50% 
by weight of all fiber, accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all 
fiber, and no less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber, and a system for collecting, reuse and 
recycling materials after product use is established. 
(3) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber used. 
(4) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
(5) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 4%, also a system for 
collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product use is 
established. 
 
Factors for consideration 
(1) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product 
use is established. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Tarps Evaluation criteria 
At least 50% by weight of fiber (natural and chemical) used in 
polyethylene fiber products shall be recycled polyethylene fiber. 
 
Factors for consideration 
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1. PET resins denote material that use recycled PET bottles and textile products, etc. 
2. Weight of all fiber denotes the weight of all product excluding accessories such as 
pole, fastener and metal parts, etc. from all of product. The weight of accessories used 
recycled plastic (part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that has 
been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 173 recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.)), may be include “the weight of 
all fiber”, “the weight of polyester fiber from recycled PET resins or the weight of 
polyester fiber from recovered fiber”. 
3. Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
4. Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materially or chemically recycling 
processes. 
5. Recycled polyethylene denotes part or all of polyethylene once used as a part of a 
useful product that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, 
polyethylene that has been recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
6. Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
denotes material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by 
a third party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the 
product throughout its lifecycle. 
7. Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material which is included in plant based synthetic fiber to the weight of all fiber 
8. A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling denotes the fulfillment of 
the below requirements. 
A system for collection should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a collection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in response to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or commissioning other companies to 
collect; includes situations where multiple businesses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, specific information for the collection 
(collection method, collection location, etc.) of used products is available from the 
products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse and recycling should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products must be reused, material recycled and chemical recycled.  
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of collected products must energy 
recovered. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of tents that use polyester fiber or synthetic fiber made from plant, or 
tarps that use polyethylene fiber meeting the criteria to the total number of tents that use 
polyester fiber or tarps that use polyethylene fiber to be purchased (including lease/rental 
agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  174 18-2. Safety Nets 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Safety nets Evaluation criteria 
All fiber products (natural and chemical) that use polyester fiber, 
polyethylene fiber and/or synthetic fiber made from plant shall meet one 
of the following.  
(1) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber. If polyester fiber are used less than 50% 
by weight of all fiber, accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all 
fiber, and no less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber, and a system for collecting, reuse and 
recycling materials after product use is established. 
(3) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber used. 
(4) At least 50% by weight of fiber used in polyethylene fiber products 
shall be recycled polyethylene. 
(5) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
 
Factors for consideration 
(1) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product 
use is established. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1. PET resins denote material that use recycled PET bottles and textile products, etc. 
2. Weight of all fiber denotes the weight of all product excluding accessories of metal 
parts, etc. from all of product. The weight of accessories used recycled plastic (part or 
all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that has been discarded, remnants 
discarded during the manufacturing process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles 
(This excludes, however, plastic that has been recycled in the process of 
manufacturing the product)) and synthetic fiber or plastics made from plant that is 
acknowledged for its environmental load reduction effects may be include “the 
weight of all fiber” and “the weight of polyester fiber from recycled PET resins, the 
weight of polyester fiber from recovered fiber or synthetic fiber made from plant that 
is acknowledged for its environmental load reduction effects”. 
3.  Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used clothing and 
used cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
4.  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materially or chemically recycling 
processes. 175 5. Recycled polyethylene denotes part or all of polyethylene once used as a part of a 
useful product that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, 
polyethylene that has been recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
6. Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
denotes material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
by a third party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of 
the product throughout its lifecycle. 
7. Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material, which is included in plant based synthetic fiber to the weight of all fiber. 
8. A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling denotes the fulfillment of 
the below requirements. 
A system for collection should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a collection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in response to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or commissioning other companies 
to collect; includes situations where multiple businesses undertake the 
collection together) used products.  
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, specific information for the 
collection (collection method, collection location, etc.) of used products is 
available from the products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse and recycling should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products must be reused, material recycled and chemical 
recycled.  
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of collected products must energy 
recovered. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of safety nets that use polyester, polyethylene, or plant based synthetic 
fiber meeting the criteria, to the total number of safety nets that use either polyester, 
polyethylene, or plant based synthetic fiber to be purchased in the fiscal year.  
  176 18-3. Flags, Advertisement Flags and Banners, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Flags 
 
Advertisement 
flags 
 
Banners 
 
 
 
 
 Evaluation criteria 
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical) includes polyester 
fiber and/or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfill one of the following. 
(1) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber used. If polyester fiber are used less than 
50% by weight of all fiber, accounts for no less than 10% by weight 
of all fiber, and no less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber used, and a system for collecting, reuse 
and recycling materials after product use is established. 
(3) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber used. 
(4) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
(5) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 4%, also a system for 
collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product use is 
established. 
 
 Factors for consideration 
(1) The use of brominated fire retardants is as minimized as possible. 
(2) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product 
use is established. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Banners under the evaluation criteria of this section denote horizontal banners and 
vertical banners. 
2. PET resins denote material that use recycled PET bottles and textile products, etc. 
3. Weight of all fiber denotes the weight of all product excluding accessories such as pole 
and metal parts, etc. from all of product. The weight of accessories used recycled 
plastic (part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that has been 
discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the recycle/reuse 
of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been recycled in the 
process of manufacturing the product)) and synthetic fiber or plastics made from plant 
that is acknowledged for its environmental load reduction effects may be include “the 
weight of all fiber” and “the weight of polyester fiber from recycled PET resins, the 
weight of polyester fiber from recovered fiber or synthetic fiber made from plant that 
is acknowledged for its environmental load reduction effects”. 177 4. Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
5. Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materially or chemically recycling 
processes. 
6. Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
denotes material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by 
a third party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the 
product throughout its lifecycle. 
7. Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material which is included in plant based synthetic fiber to the weight of all fiber. 
8. A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling denotes the fulfillment of 
the below requirements. 
A system for collection should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a collection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in response to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or commissioning other companies to 
collect; includes situations where multiple businesses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, specific information for the collection 
(collection method, collection location, etc.) of used products is available from the 
products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse and recycling should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products must be reused, material recycled and chemical recycled.  
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of collected products must energy 
recovered. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of flags, advertisement flags and banners, etc. that use polyester fiber or 
synthetic fiber which is made from plant based plastics meeting the criteria to the total number 
of flags, advertisement flags, banners, etc. to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
  178  18-4. Mops 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Mops Evaluation criteria 
Fulfill one of the following. 
(1) Recycled material including unused fiber, recycled fiber, and other 
recycled material makes up at least 25% of weigh of all fiber. 
(2) A system for collecting and reuse after product use is established. 
 
Factors for consideration 
(1) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product 
use is established. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Weight of all fiber denotes the weight of all product excluding accessories such as 
handle, grip and metal parts, etc. from all of product.  The weight of accessories used 
recycled plastic may be includes “the weight of all fiber” and “the weight of unused 
fiber, recycled fiber and other recycled material.” 
2. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles. (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.) 
3. Unused fiber denoted fiber made from such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
4. Recycled fiber is created from part or all of material discarded from the production of 
recycled fiber, from remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or from 
the reuse of defective articles. 
5. Reconstructed fiber is created by decomposing and creating into linear form 
materials such as remnants from manufacturing of clothing, and products that are no 
longer in use. 
6. Recycled material denotes part or all of material once used as a part of a useful 
product that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, material 
that has been recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
7. A system is in place for the collection and reuse denotes the fulfillment of the below 
requirements. 
A system for collection should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a collection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in response to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or commissioning other companies 
to collect; includes situations where multiple businesses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, specific information for the 
collection (collection method, collection location, etc.) of used products is 
available from the products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 179 c. The collected products must be reused. 
d. The parts that cannot be reuse of collected products must material recycled, 
chemical recycled or energy recovered. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of mops that meeting the criteria to the total number of mops to be 
purchased (including lease, rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  180 19. Facilities 
(1)Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Solar power 
generation 
systems (for 
public and 
industrial use) Evaluation Criteria  
(1) The cell effect conversion efficiency of the solar cell module does not 
fall below the standard conversion efficiency at each category shown 
in Table 1. 
(2) Information for solar cell module and peripherals listed for each 
category in Appendix table 1 is publicly listed on website, etc., and 
easy to acknowledge. 
(3) Electric power generated can be easily acknowledged. 
(4) The product is designed and manufactured in such a way that the solar 
cell module can maintain at least 80% of nominal maximum output for 
at least 10 years. 
(5) The power conditioner is designed and manufactured in such a way 
that the effectiveness of its rated load factor and the partial load factor 
at half load can be maintained at a minimum of 90% of its 
effectiveness at shipping. 
(6) The energy payback time of solar cell module is no more than three 
years. 
(7) Regarding the solar cell module, the preliminary assessment of the 
environmentally conscious design listed in Table 2 is being conducted, 
and its contents can be confirmed. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The product is designed either for easy repair and exchange of parts to 
enable long term use, or designed so that any consumable parts can be 
replaced and, after the item’s useful life, it can be easily dismantled 
and its materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and 
recycling, or the appropriate disposal of its separated parts. 
(2) Devices to be installed in facilities with a large number of visitors 
should be equipped with a system that enables effective description to 
the visitors through the display of generated power, etc., as much as 
possible. 
(3) At the time of removal of facilities, collection, reuse or recycling is 
possible by contractor of removal and disposal, and appropriate 
processing is possible for parts that are not reused or recycled. 
(4) In cases where secondary battery containing specified chemical 
substances is used, a collection and recycling system for the secondary 
battery is put in place. 
(5) Products that use aluminum alloy on the frame or platform of the 
battery module use an alloy that uses aluminum secondary ore 
(regenerated ore) as a part of its primary material. 
(6) Hazardous substances such as heavy metals are not used for 
manufacturing the products, or to reduce the amount used as much as 
possible. 
 
 181 Solar heating 
systems (for 
public and 
industrial use) Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Fulfill one of the following criteria. 
aD For the liquid collecting type solar collector, the heat collection 
amount must be 8,372 kJ / (m2*day) or more. 
bD For the air heat collecting type solar collector, the heat collection 
amount must be 6,279 kJ / (m2*day) or more. 
(2) The items listed in Table 2 for the energy collector and its peripheries 
can be easily confirmed on websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The product is designed either for easy repair and exchange of parts to 
enable long term use, or designed so that any consumable parts can be 
replaced and, after the item’s useful life, it can be easily dismantled 
and its materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and 
recycling, or the appropriate disposal of its separated parts. 
(2) The design enables minimum energy requirements for the operation of 
the energy collectors. 
(3) At the time of removal of facilities, collection, reuse or recycling is 
possible by contractor of removal and disposal, and appropriate 
processing is possible for parts that are not reused or recycled. 
(4) Products that use aluminum alloy on the frame or platform use an alloy 
that uses aluminum secondary ore (regenerated ore) as a part of its 
primary material. 
(5) Hazardous substances such as heavy metals are not used for 
manufacturing the products, or to reduce the amount used as much as 
possible. 
Notes: 
1. Solar power generation system under consideration in the Evaluation Criteria refers 
to systems for public and industrial use that supply energy through solar power 
generation using solar cell module of 10kW or more as a replacement for commercial 
energy. 
2. Solar heating system under consideration in the Evaluation Criteria refers to systems 
for public and industrial use that uses solar energy for hot water and heating. 
3. The cell effect conversion efficiency of the solar cell module denotes the cell effect 
conversion efficiency after modularization based on the effect conversion efficiency 
according to JIS C 8960 and to be calculated using the following formula. 
 
The cell effect conversion efficiency = nominal maximum power/ 
(Total area of the solar cell module × irradiance) 
 
Total area of solar battery cell × Total area of one cell × Number of cell in one module  
 
Irradiance =1000W/m2 
  
The total area of one cell includes non-power generation part in the cell. However, 
the total area of one cell as to thin-film silicon solar cell and 
compound-semiconductor solar cell excludes the integrated part. 
 182 4. Rated load factor and Partial load factor are to be calculated in accordance with JIS 
C 8961. 
5. Heat collection amount is calculated in accordance with JIS A 4112: 2011 when the 
value obtained by subtracting the temperature is 10 K and the amount of solar 
radiation is 20,930 kJ / (m 2 day). The value is from the average temperature of the 
heat collection medium in the case of the liquid collecting type solar collector, and 
from the temperature of the inlet collection heat medium in the case of the air 
collecting type solar collector. Solar heating system that fills JIS A 4112:2011 meets 
evaluation criteria (1). 
6. Confirmation of eligibility confirmation examination and of model attestation of 
solar cell module will be determined in accordance with JIS C 8990 or JIS C 8991. 
7. Each procurement organization should take the following into full consideration: 
a. For proper understanding and management of power generated or collected, the 
information in the installment report items in Tables 1 and 2, obtained at the time 
of procurement, must be maintained and preserved until the product is discarded. 
b. Installation requirements and methods of the equipment for power generation or 
collection must be fully considered upon procurement. Excess enlargement of 
platform for installation should be avoided. 
c. For the introduction of solar power generation systems, adequate installation 
requirements and methods must be considered by taking into full consideration 
the characteristics of the solar cell. For the introduction of thin membrane solar 
cells, reduction of environmental load, such as the adequate installation structure 
on the side of the installation dealer, should be fully considered. 
d. The introduction of the solar heating system should be implemented through a 
design that takes the current energy usage in full consideration. 
e. When procuring the facilities, the details of the installation should be requested 
from the installation dealer, and its contents confirmed. The information required 
for the maintenance and management of the facilities concerned (including 
information from the manufacturer) should be obtained from the installation 
dealer. 
f. Upon removal or disposal of used solar power generation system, reuse or 
recycling shall be conducted from the viewpoint of resource recycling. For parts 
that could not be reused or recycled, proper treatment shall be carried out in 
accordance with its properties, etc. based on information on the content of harmful 
substances such as heavy metals. 
 
 
Table 1: Standard for the cell effect conversion efficiency of solar cell module 
Category Standard Conversion Efficiency 
Single-crystal silicon solar cell 16.0% 
Poly-crystal silicon solar cell 15.0% 
Thin-film silicon solar cell 8.5% 
Compound-semiconductor solar cell 12.0% 
 
 
  183 Table 2: Preliminary evaluation method etc., of environmentally conscious design 
related to solar cell module 
Purpose Evaluation item Preliminary evaluation method etc. 
Weight 
reduction / 
commonality Weight reduction Mass has been evaluated to reduce raw 
materials used for modules. 
Parts reduction The number and type of parts used in the 
module have been evaluated. 
Parts commonality The proportion of parts common to other models 
have been evaluated. 
Use of 
recycled 
resources Use of recycled 
resources The proportion of parts using recycled 
resources among the parts used in the module 
has been evaluated. 
Long-term use Improvement of 
durability for long-term 
use The reliability test result of the module has been 
evaluated. 
Improvement of 
contamination 
resistance The contamination resistance of the module 
surface has been evaluated. 
Ease of 
removal work Ease of removal work The structure that makes it easy to remove used 
modules (the time required for removal) has 
been evaluated. 
Utilization of 
recyclable 
resources Improvement of  
recyclability The ratio of the mass of recyclable parts and 
materials among the overall module mass has 
been evaluated. 
Easier 
dismantling / 
sorting 
process Ease of frame 
disassembly For separation processing, the structure of the 
module frame is easy to disassemble (the time 
required for removal) has been evaluated. 
Reduction of quantity 
and type of screws to be 
removed by frame 
disassembly The number and type of screws to be removed 
during frame disassembly must be evaluated. 
Provide information for 
frame disassembly Necessary information for 
disassembling/sorting, such as the method of 
fixing the frame is provided when removing the 
frame, or have a providing system. 
Ease of disassembling 
the terminal box Whether the structure of the terminal box is 
easy to remove from the module (the time 
required for removal) is evaluated. 
Reduction of quantity 
and type of screws to be 
removed by 
disassembling the 
terminal box The number and type of screws to be removed 
when removing the terminal box shall be 
evaluated. 
Provide information for 
frame disassembly Necessary information for 
disassembling/sorting, such as the method of 
fixing the frame is provided when detaching the 
terminal box, or have a providing system. 184 Environmental 
conservation Reduction of 
substances with 
environmental impact Evaluate the mass of environmentally 
hazardous substances contained in the module, 
the mass of the raw material that becomes a load 
factor in the proper disposal / recycling process. 
Provision of 
information Information on use, 
maintenance and safety Information on usage precautions, trouble 
diagnosis and measures, maintenance 
inspection / repair, safety etc. are provided or 
have a providing system. 
Provide necessary 
information for 
removal, dismantling, 
proper disposal / 
recycling Necessary information for removal, 
dismantling, proper disposal / recycling is 
provided or provided or have a providing 
system. 
Reduction of 
environmental 
impact at each 
stage of life 
cycle Implementation of Life 
Cycle Assessment The environmental impact at each stage of a 
series of life cycles from resource extraction, 
manufacturing stage, use stage, removal, 
dismantling, proper disposal / recycling is 
quantitatively evaluated. 
 
 
 
Appendix Table 1: Items for Display of Information Regarding Solar Power Generation 
Equipment 
Category Items Articles for confirmation 
Solar cell 
module Display of estimation 
device for generated energy 
(standard condition) Annual estimated generated energy  
Conditions for calculation (sunlight data 
used, loss of solar cell and power 
conditioner, etc.) 
Conditions and factors for 
inability to obtain 
generated energy at 
standard condition Influence of shadows, sunlight conditions 
(note specifically the correspondence 
between the amount of shadow on the 
module or sunlight conditions and the 
decrease in generated energy) 
Influence of temperature (note 
specifically the correspondence between 
module temperature and the decrease in 
generated energy) 
Climatic conditions, geographic 
conditions (note specifically the 
correspondence between climatic and 
geographic conditions and amount of 
generated energy) 
Others (note specifically losses due to 
wiring and stains on the reception 
surface) 
Peripheries Power conditioner Format, nominal capacity, output energy 185 method, frequency, system connecting 
method, etc. 
Connector box Format, etc. 
Connector protection 
device Possible installation methods 
Secondary cell Whether used or not. If used, method of 
collection and recycling 
Requirements 
for 
maintenance, 
testing and 
repair Maintenance and testing  Scope and method 
Repair Scope and method 
Modules and 
peripheries Disposal Method of disposal, points to consider 
when disposing, etc. (Necessary 
information for proper disposal at the 
time of final disposal of used product, 
etc.)  
Warranty condition Warranty period, etc. 
 
 
 
Appendix Table 2: Items for Display of Information Regarding Solar Heating Systems 
Category Articles Items for confirmation 
Energy 
collector Display of method of 
estimation for amount of 
energy collected Estimated amount of energy collected 
annually 
Conditions for calculation (sunlight data 
used, loss of solar cell and power 
conditioner, etc.) 
Conditions and factors for 
inability to obtain  the 
heating collection of 
evaluation criteria (1) Influence of shadows, sunlight conditions 
(note specifically the correspondence 
between the amount of shadow on the 
module or sunlight conditions and the 
decrease in generated energy) 
Influence of temperature (note 
specifically the correspondence between 
module temperature and the decrease in 
generated energy) 
Climatic conditions, geographic 
conditions (note specifically the 
correspondence between climatic and 
geographic conditions and amount of 
generated energy) 
Others (note specifically losses due to 
wiring and stains on the reception 
surface) 
Energy Disposal Method of disposal, points to consider 186 collector and 
peripheries when disposing, etc. (Necessary 
information for proper disposal at the 
time of final disposal of used product, 
etc.)   
Maintenance and testing Conditions for maintenance and testing 
(frequency of testing), etc. 
Warranty condition Conditions for warranty (scope and 
content of repair and exchange), warranty 
period, etc. 
  
Fuel cells Evaluation Criteria  
System generates electric or heat energy by chemical reaction between 
hydrogen in the fuel and oxygen in the air, as an alternative to 
commercial power. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
The items are designed so that any consumable parts can be replaced 
and, after the item’s useful life, it can be easily dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and recycling, or 
the appropriate disposal of its separated parts. 
Energy 
management 
system Evaluation Criteria  
System that can visualize energy such as electric power used in the 
building by measuring at each point of acceptance, conversion 
transportation and consumption at each application, facility or 
equipment, etc. at the installation site, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
A management system that efficiently controls facilities or equipment, 
etc. 
Garbage 
disposals Evaluation Criteria  
Equipment decreases the amount of garbage by biodegrading or 
dehydration. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The items are designed so that any consumable parts can be replaced 
and, after the item’s useful life, it can be easily dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and recycling, 
or the appropriate disposal of its separated parts. 
(2) Functions that allow for energy saving while in use are built into 
design. 
(3) Product generated from disposal is reused as fertilizer, feed, and 
energy. 
Water saving 
equipment Evaluation Criteria  
<Common Criteria> 
(1)No electric energy shall be used.  
(2)The type to be installed on faucets should be adaptable to a variety of 
faucets. 
 187 < Individual Criteria> 
(1) For water saving top, meet the following requirements: 
a. When the handle is opened 120 degrees, the discharge rate shall 
be more than 20% but not be more than 70% of that when the 
water tap equipped with an ordinary top. 
b. When the handle is fully opened, the discharge rate shall be not 
less than 70%. 
(2) For flow-control valve, when the handle is fully opened, the proper 
flow shall be in the range of 5-8 liters/min at a water pressure of 0.1 
MPa or more and at 0.7MPa or lower. 
(3) For aerator cap, meet the following requirements. 
a. At a water pressure of 0.1 MPa or more and at a water pressure of 
0.7 MPa or less, the discharge shall not be more than 80% of that 
of the tap without the aerator cap. 
b. The discharge shall not be less than 5 liters/min at a water supply 
pressure of 0.1 MPa with a fully opened lever. 
(4) For Flow control valve, meet the following requirements. 
a. At a water pressure of 0.1 MPa or more and at a water pressure of 
0.7 MPa or less, the proper flow shall not be more than 80% of 
that of the faucet without the aerator cap. 
b. The discharge rate at the installed place with the handle (lever) 
fully opened and at water pressure of 0.1 MPa shall not be less 
than the following table. 
   
Table: Discharge rate of flow control valve by installation location 
Installation 
locations Discharge rate 
Washroom 5L/minute 
Kitchen 5L/minute 
Shower room 8L/minute 
 
(5)For faucet with the mechanism of stopping water at hand, equipped 
with the mechanism of discharging and stopping with such switches 
as buttons or sensors which are installed within the area of users’ 
operation, which are independent from the discharge switching 
mechanism or flow and temperature adjustment mechanism. 
(6) For faucet with the small volume discharging mechanism, the 
discharging power from shower head satisfies either of a or b below. 
a. Without the mechanism of aeration into the flow: 0.6N or more 
b. With the mechanism of aeration into the flow: 0.55N or more 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Replacement water saving pieces should be easily replaceable with 
regular pieces. 
(2) After installing the equipment, it shall have the usual feeling in use 
for use applications. 
Notes: 188 1. Water saving top refers to pieces produced to be placed on stopcock for water saving 
purposes. Water supply device supplemented with a water saving piece will yield 
much less water when compared to a device with regular piece when the handle is 
opened to the sane angle. Fixed type tops are included. 
2. Water saving top in Evaluation Criteria in this section is the type to be used for single 
stopcock with an internal diameter of 13mm. It should enable water savings through a 
simple replacement by changing the shape of the stabilizing nut of the valve packing 
into a special shape, etc. 
3. Measuring method for the discharge rate of water saving top is according to measuring 
method of flow volume based on JIS B 2061(Faucets, ball taps and flush valves). 
Water saving equipment that comply with The water tap equipped with a 
water-saving top designated in JIS B 2061 meets the Evaluation Criteria <Individual 
Criteria> (1). 
4. Flow-control valve refers to flow rate setting is fixed type, and an adjustment valve 
that maintains water flow at a fixed rate regardless of the water pressure of either side 
of the valve. 
5. Flow-control valve under consideration in this section are those used for washing 
hands and face, as well as dishes. They are to fulfill the following criteria: 
a. The valve allows for water savings, when replaced with a conventional one, by 
controlling the amount of water discharged. 
b. There is not to be a branching out except for at the installment locations. 
Flow-control valve should be placed after the branching out.  Each Flow-control 
valve should correspond to one stopcock. 
c. Installment criteria for each use are outlined in the user’s manual so that installment 
can be executed according to use. 
6. Aerator cap under consideration in this section refers to caps that enable water savings 
by mixing air into water flow. 
7. Among the control valves that maintain the flow at a fixed amount regardless of 
changes in the pressure at the inlet or the outlet of the valve, the faucet which has a 
control valve with variable flow amount settings. 
8. Faucet with the mechanism of stopping water at hand refers to for kitchens or 
bathroom showers, refers to any one of two types of hot and cold water faucets: single, 
mixing, and thermostat. 
9. Faucet with the small volume discharging mechanism refers to for bathroom showers, 
refers to any one of two types of hot and cold water faucets: single, mixing, and 
thermostat. 
10.  The measurement of the water spillage power in<Individual Criteria>6 of the 
Evaluation criteria prescribed in the “Technological Information Concerning the 
Criteria for Energy-saving of Houses and other Buildings and the Recognition of 
Low-carbon Architecture (method of measuring the designed amounts of primary 
energy consumption of residents)” by the Building Research Institute. 
 
Sunlight 
adjustment film Evaluation criteria 
(1) Shielding coefficient is less than 0.7 and transmission rate for visible 
ray is 10% or more. 
(2) Heat transmission rate is less than 5.9W/(m2.k). 
(3) Adequate weather resistance is confirmed for sunlight adjustment 
function. 189 (4) After use of the product, decrease in environmental load is confirmed 
when compared to the condition before use. 
(5) (1) to (4) above can be easily confirmed on websites, etc., or otherwise, 
is judged objectively by a third party. 
(6) Adequate information is displayed concerning the application of film. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Shielding coefficient is as low as possible. 
Notes: 
1. Sunlight adjustment film refers to films applied onto window glass of buildings and is 
equipped with the ability to shield sunlight in order to increase the efficiency of air 
conditioning. 
2. Shielding coefficient, transmission rate for visible ray, and heat transmission rate are to 
be calculated in accordance with JIS A 5759. 
3. As for evaluation criteria (1), if transmission rate for visible ray is more than 70%, 
shielding coefficient is less than 0.8. 
4. In order to confirm the weather resistance of sunlight adjustment function, conduct 
1,000 hour testing in accordance with weather resistance testing designated in JIS A 
5759, and make sure that the change in shielding coefficient is within 0.10 of the 
standards designated in Evaluation Criteria (1). 
5. After use of the product, decrease in environmental load is confirmed when 
compared to the condition before use means that decrease in cooling load is 
confirmed in a simulation of heat load calculation system that takes radiant heat into 
account. At the same time, disclose information on the environmental impact 
throughout the year. 
6. Each procurement organization must take into account the following. 
a. In procuring sunlight adjustment film, construction by the person having a 
technological qualification of "1st or 2nd grade Certified Skilled Worker of 
Architectural Film" or the equal, to avoid the heat crack, etc. of the glass. 
b. Consider the influence by the electric wave cover when attaching the one to have 
the electric wave cover performance.  
c. Confirm the influence on a peripheral building, etc. when attaching it in the 
situation of remarkable sunlight reflection is concerned. 
d. In case requiring illumination efficiency and passage of daylight, consider to 
attaching the film with high transmission rate for visible ray.   
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
1. For solar power generation systems, target is determined by the total capacity of power 
generation by the facility that meets the criteria to be purchased in the fiscal year (kW). 
2. For solar heating systems, target is determined by the total are of solar collection 
equipment that meets the criteria to purchase in the fiscal year (m2). 
3. For systems combining solar power generation and solar heating, target is determined 
by both the total capacity of power generation (kW) and the total area of solar 
collection equipment (m2) of the facility that meets the criteria to be purchased in the 
fiscal year. 190 4. For fuel cells, target is determined by the total capacity of power generation (kW) in 
the fiscal year. 
5. For energy management system, the number of procurement in the fiscal year.  
6. For garbage disposals, target is determined by the number of equipment to be 
purchased (including lease, rental agreements, and acquisition by companies 
commissioned to operate cafeterias) in the fiscal year.  
7. For water saving equipment, target is determined by the total number of devices 
meeting the criteria to the total number of devices to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
8. For sunlight adjustment films, target is determined by the total area of the product (m2) 
that meets the criteria to the total number of product (m2) to be purchased in the fiscal 
year. 191 20. Stockpiles for Disaster 
20-1 Stockpiles for Disaster (Potable Water) 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
PET bottled 
water Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Expiration date is over five years. 
(2) Name, ingredients, content amount, expiration date, recommended 
method of storage, and name of manufacturer are listed on the product 
and the external package. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) A system exists for minimizing waste production through collection 
and recycling. 
(2) Bottles are designed to be as thin and light weight as possible. 
(3) Taking environmental issues into consideration, bottles, labels/label 
printing, caps etc., are designed to create a container with superior 
adaptability for recycling and reuse. 
Notes: 
1. PET bottled water under consideration in this section is to be obtained with an 
objective of long term stockpiles for disaster. 
2. Evaluation Criteria (2) concerning ingredients does not apply for the external 
package. 
3. If the products had purchased for its own business, it will be excluded from 
consideration as stockpiles for disaster.  
4. Each procurement organization must take into account the following.  
a. In procuring PET bottled water, take into consideration use of automatic vending 
machines equipped with the free-vend function, which is a disaster prevention 
measure that allows products inside the machine to be vended free of charge in 
case of distribution stockpile or an outbreak of disaster. 
b. In procuring stockpiles for disaster, design a system for storage and purchase of 
products based on their expiration date to enable adequate maintenance and 
regular renewal of storage and purchase quantities. 
c. In order to lengthen the storage time of products, consider a contract method that, 
for example, allows a set amount of time until delivery date, so that the supplier 
may prepare products that are as new as possible. 
d. In procuring PET bottled water for the disaster, confirming enough beforehand 
such as quality and safety in the best-before date of a product on account of 
savings and keeping over a long period of time. 
5. In order to consider environmental issues, reference will be made to “Designated 
PET Bottle Voluntary Design Guideline” created by PET Bottle Recycle Promotion 
Association when designing bottles, labels/label printing, caps etc.  
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of PET bottled water meeting the criteria to the total number of PET 
bottled water purchased in the fiscal year. 192 20-2. Stockpiles for Disaster (Foods) 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Quick cooking 
rice 
 
Non-perishable 
breads for an 
emergency 
 
Pilot breads Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Expiration date is over five years. 
(2) Name, ingredients, content amount, expiration date, recommended 
method of storage, and name of manufacturer are listed on the product 
and the external package. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
A system exists for minimizing waste production through collection and 
recycling. 
Retort 
processed 
foods, etc. 
 Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Fulfills one of the following. 
a. Expiration date is over five years. 
b. Expiration date is over three years later, and a system is in place for 
the collection and recycling of the container, accessory material and 
heat generating material. 
(2) Name, ingredients, content amount, expiration date, recommended 
method of storage, and name of manufacturer are listed on the product 
and the external package. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
A system exists for minimizing waste production through collection and 
recycling. 
Health foods/ 
Nutrition foods 
 
Freeze-dried 
foods Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Expiration date is over three years. 
(2) Name, ingredients, content amount, expiration date, recommended 
method of storage, and name of manufacturer are listed on the product 
and the external package. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
A system exists for minimizing waste production through collection and 
recycling.  
Notes: 
1. Quick cooking rice, Non-perishable breads for an emergency, Pilot breads, and 
Retort processed foods, etc., Health foods/Nutrition foods and Freeze-dried foods 
under consideration in this section is limited to those procured for the purpose of 
stockpiles for disaster. 
2. Retort processed food, etc. refers to products that have been processed for long term 
preservation at room temperature by packing food in air-tight containers and sealing 
with heat melting method. 
3. Health foods / Nutrition foods refer to foods of usual food form and strengthened 
nutritional contents such as the vitamins and minerals. 
4. Evaluation Criteria (1) concerning expiration date for Quick cooking rice and Pilot 
breads will be reconsidered taking into consideration future market movements. 
5. Evaluation Criteria (2) concerning ingredients does not apply for the external 
package. 193 6. If the products had purchased for its own business, it will be excluded from 
consideration as stockpiles for disaster. 
7. Each procurement organization must take into account the following.  
a. In procuring stockpiles for disaster, design a system for storage and purchase of 
products based on their expiration date to enable adequate maintenance and 
regular renewal of storage and purchase quantities. 
b. In order to lengthen the storage time of products, consider a contract method that, 
for example, allows a set amount of time until delivery date, so that the supplier 
may prepare products that are as new as possible. 
c. In procuring foods for the disaster, confirming enough beforehand such as quality 
and safety in the best-before date of a product on account of savings and keeping 
over a long period of time. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of products meeting the criteria to the total number of products purchased 
in the fiscal year. 
  194 20-3. Stockpiles for Disaster (Household items and materials, etc.) 
(1)Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Blankets Evaluation Criteria 
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical) includes polyester fiber 
fulfill one of the following. 
(1) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber. If polyester fiber are used less than 50% by weight 
of all fiber, accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber, and no 
less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber, and a system for collecting, reuse and recycling 
materials after product use is established. 
(3) Polyester from recovered fiber of PET resins accounts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber used.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product use 
is established. 
(2) Fiber used for products contains unused fiber or reconstructed fiber as 
much as possible.   
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Work gloves Evaluation Criteria  
Fulfill one of the following. 
(1) Polyester fiber products shall include polyester fiber from recycled PET 
resins. At least 50% by weight of all natural and chemical fiber used 
(excluding anti-slip coating) shall be polyester fiber from recycled PET 
resins. 
(2) Fiber comprised of post-consumer material makes up at least 50% by 
weight of the entire product weight (excluding anti-slip coating). 
(3) Unused fiber makes up at least 50% by weight of the entire product 
weight (excluding anti-slip coating). 
(4) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of environmental 
load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% by weight of all 
fiber used (excluding anti-slip coating) and bio-based synthetic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Fiber other than polyester fiber from recycled PET resin should also be 
made of unused fiber or reconstructed fiber (excluding anti-slip coating). 
(2) Does not use bleaches. 
Tents Evaluation criteria 
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical) includes polyester fiber 
or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfill one of the following. 
(1) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber. If polyester fiber are used less than 50% by weight 195 of all fiber, accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber, and no 
less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts for no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber, and a system for collecting, reuse and recycling 
materials after product use is established. 
(3) Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recovered fibers accounts 
for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber used.  
(4) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% by 
weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer content rate 
accounts for no less than 10%. 
(5) Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 10% by 
weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer content rate 
accounts for no less than 4%, also a system for collecting, reuse and 
recycling materials after product use is established. 
 
Factors for consideration 
(1) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materials after product use 
is established. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Tarps Evaluation criteria 
At least 50% by weight of fiber (natural and chemical) used in polyethylene 
fiber products shall be recycled polyethylene fiber. 
 
Factors for consideration 
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into account 
ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1. PET resins denote material that use recycled PET bottles and textile products, etc. 
2. Weight of all fiber denotes the weight of all product excluding accessories such as 
button, fastener, hook, sewing thread and the metal parts (i.e. pole), from all of 
product.  The weight of accessories used recycled plastic (part or all of plastic once 
used as a part of a useful product that has been discarded, remnants discarded during 
the manufacturing process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, 
however, plastic that has been recycled in the process of manufacturing the product)) 
may be include “the weight of all fiber”, “the weight of polyester fiber from recycled 
PET resins or the weight of polyester from recovered fiber”. 
3. Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
4. Polyester from recovered fiber denotes fiber made mainly from recovered fiber 
created by materially or chemically recycled. 
5. Unused fiber denoted fiber made from such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 196 6. Reconstructed fiber denotes fiber made from linear form materials created by 
decomposition of recovered fiber.  
7. Post-consumer material refers to material or product discarded after used as a 
product. 
8. Recycled polyethylene denotes part or all of polyethylene once used as a part of a 
useful product that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, 
polyethylene that has been recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
9. Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
denotes material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
by a third party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of 
the product throughout its lifecycle. 
10. Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material which is included in plant based synthetic fiber to the weight of all fiber. 
11. A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling denotes the fulfillment of 
the below requirements. 
A system for collection should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a collection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in response to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or commissioning other companies to 
collect; includes situations where multiple businesses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, specific information for the 
collection (collection method, collection location, etc.) of used products is 
available from the products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse and recycling should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products is reused, material recycled and chemical recycled.  
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of collected products must energy 
recovered. 
10. If the products had purchased for its own business, it will be excluded from 
consideration as stockpiles for disaster. 
11. In procuring stockpiles for disaster, design a system for storage and purchase of 
products based on their expiration date to enable adequate maintenance and regular 
renewal of storage and purchase quantities. 
 
 
 
Disposable 
batteries  Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Disposable batteries exceed the smallest average duration listed in 
accordance with load resistance in Table below. 
(2) The product specifications include a period of over five years is required 
until the recommended expiration date. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into account 
ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal.  197 Notes: 
1. Disposable batteries under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section 
denote “D”, “C”, “AA”, or “AAA” 
2. Smallest average duration is to be measured in accordance with the electric discharge 
test criteria designated in JIS C 8515. Disposable batteries that comply with the 
alkaline battery designated in JIS C 8515 meets this Evaluation Criteria (1). 
3. If the products had purchased for its own business, it will be excluded from 
consideration as stockpiles for disaster. 
4. Each procurement organization must take into account the following.  
a. In procuring stockpiles for disaster, design a system for storage and purchase of 
products based on their expiration date to enable adequate maintenance and regular 
renewal of storage and purchase quantities. 
b. In order to lengthen the storage time of products, consider a contract method that, 
for example, allows a set amount of time until delivery date, so that the supplier 
may prepare products that are as new as possible. 
 
 
  198 Table: Smallest Average Duration for Disposable Batteries 
Common 
name Main 
applications Discharge test conditions Smallest Average Duration 
Load 
Resistance 
() Discharge 
time per 
day Cut-off 
voltage Initial 
Usage After 12 
Months 
Storage and 
Recommended 
Period of 
Usage 
D 
(61.5mm : 
34.2mm) Portable light 2.2 Note1 0.9V 750minuits 675minuits 
Equipment 
and toys using 
motors  2.2 1hour 0.8V 16hours 14hours 
Portable 
stereo 600mA 2hours 0.9V 11hours 9.9hours 
C 
(50.0mm : 
26.2mm) Equipment 
and toys using 
motors  3.9 1hour 0.8V 14hours 12hours 
Portable 
stereo 3.9Ω Note1 0.9V 790minuits 710minuits 
Portable 
stereo 400mA 2hours 0.9V 8hours 7.2hours 
AA 
(50.5mm : 
14.5mm) Digital camera 1,500mW 
650mW Note2 1.05V 40times 36times 
Portable light 
(LED) 3.9 Note3 0.9V 230minuits 205minuits 
Equipment 
and toys using 
motors 3.9 1hour 0.8V 5hours 4.5hours 
Toys(without 
motor)  250mA 1hour 0.9V 5hours 4.5hours 
CD player, 
electronic 
games 100mA 1hour 0.9V 15hours 13hours 
Radio, clock, 
Remote 
controller 50mA Note4 1.0V 30hours 27hours 
AAA 
(44.5mm : 
10.5mm) Portable light 5.1 Note5 0.9V 130minuits 115minuits 
equipment 
used motor, 
toys 5.1 1hour 0.8V 120minuits 105minuits 
Digital audio 50mA Note5 0.9V 12hours 10hours 
Remote 
controller 24 Note6 1.0V 14.5hours 13.0hours 
Note 1: The cycle of 4 minutes discharge and 11 minutes discharge pause is continuously 
repeated for 8 hours. 199 Note 2: The cycle of 5 minutes discharge (alternate discharge of 1,500 mW for 2 seconds and 
650 mW for 28 seconds) and the 55 minutes discharge pause are repeated continuously 
for 24 hours. 
Note 3: The cycle of 4 minutes discharge and 56 minute discharge pause is continuously 
repeated for 8 hours. 
Note 4: The cycle of 1 hour discharge and 7 hours discharge pause is continuously repeated 
for 24 hours. 
Note 5: The cycle of 1 hour discharge and 11 hours discharge pause is continuously repeated 
for 24 hours. 
Note 6: The cycle of 15 seconds discharge and 45 second discharge pause is continuously 
repeated for 8 hours. 
 
 
Emergency 
portable fuel 
 
 Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Expiration date is over five years later. 
(2) Name, ingredients, content amount, expiration date, recommended 
method of storage, and name of manufacturer are listed. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Packaging and container of product is as simple as possible, and has been 
considered for ease of reuse and the reduction of environmental load. 
Notes: 
1. If the products had purchased for its own business, it will be excluded from 
consideration as stockpiles for disaster. 
2. Each procurement organization must take into account the following. 
a. In procuring stockpiles for disaster, design a system for storage and purchase of 
products based on their expiration date to enable adequate maintenance and regular 
renewal of storage and purchase quantities. 
b. In order to lengthen the storage time of products, consider a contract method that, 
for example, allows a set amount of time until delivery date, so that the supplier 
may prepare products that are as new as possible. 
 
 
Portable 
generators 
 
 Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Fulfill one of the following. 
a. For generators have a gasoline engine (include the one that uses 
natural gas or LP gas as a fuel) does not exceed the standard rate 
shown in Table 1. 
b. For generators have a diesel engine does not exceed the standard 
rate shown in Table 2.  
(2) The noise level is 98 decibels or less. 
(3) The time for continuous run is three hours or more. However, cassette 
gas cylinder type is one hour or more. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) The fuel cost efficiency is as possible as high. 
(2) Having the function to control the engine rotational speed 
automatically according to the load under use.  200 (3) The miniaturization and lightening the product should be attempted.  
(4) Design consideration takes into account product life, reuse of parts, or 
recycling of raw material. 
(5) Packaging and container of product is as simple as possible, and has 
been considered for ease of reuse and the reduction of environmental 
load. 
Notes: 
1. Portable generators under consideration for evaluation criteria in this section denotes 
power generators whose rated power is 3kVA or less. 
2. The measuring method at the noise level depends on "Measuring method of 
measurements of the noise and the vibration of the construction machinery" (No.1537 
of the Ministry of Construction Notification in 1997). 
3. If the products had purchased for its own business, it will be excluded from 
consideration as stockpiles for disaster. 
4. Each procurement organization must note the frequency of electricity.  
 
 
Table 1: The standard of gas emission of portable generators with gasoline engine 
Category of engine 
displacement Gas emission standard (g/kWh) 
HC+NOx CO 
66cc or less 50 
610 Over 66cc and 100cc or less 40 
Over 100cc and 225cc or less 16.1 
Over 225cc 12.1 
Notes: The measuring method of gas emission is according to JIS B 8008-4 G2 mode. 
 
 
Table 2: The standard of gas emission of portable generators with diesel engine 
Gas emission standard (g/kWh) 
NMHC+NOx CO PM 
7.5 8 0.4 
Notes: The measuring method of gas emission is according to JIS B 8008-4 D2 mode. 
 
 
Portable power 
supply for 
emergency Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Electric capacitance is over 100Wh. 
(2) The product specifications a period of over five years or the 
recommended expiration date is over five years. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
It is easy to separate and take into account ease of recycling and reduced 
environmental impact upon disposal. 
Notes: 201 Portable power supply for emergency under consideration of the evaluation criteria in this 
section refers to an portable power supply for emergency for generating electricity using an 
air battery subject to charging and supplying power to devices such as mobile phones. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of products meeting the criteria to the total number of products to be 
purchased in the fiscal year.  
The total for blankets, work gloves, tents, tarps and disposable batteries will include specified 
items for procurement used for normal business operations as outlined in this Basic Policy. 
 
  202 21. Public-Works Projects 
 Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Public works Evaluation Criteria  
Contract with the participants, vendors and contractors building the public 
work should require the use of materials, construction equipment, 
processes and targets listed in Table 1 that reduce the environmental impact 
of the public works project. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Packaging is to be as simple as possible and take into account ease of 
recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal. 
Notes: It is preferable to implement obligatory clauses within the overall framework that 
considers the reduction of environmental impact. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
A guideline will be examined while studying ways to evaluate performance. 
 
 
Table 1: Materials, Construction Machines, Construction Methods and Others 
Designated 
Procurement 
Item Category Item Evaluation 
Criteria for 
Each Item Item Type Item Name 
Public works Material Banking 
materials, etc. Treated soil recycled from 
construction sludge Table 2 
Granulated blast furnace slag 
for earth work 
Caisson filler using copper 
slag 
Caisson filler using 
ferro-nickel slag 
Ground 
improvement 
material Steel slag for Ground 
improvement 
Slag aggregate 
for concrete Blast furnace slag aggregate 
Ferro-nickel slag aggregate 
Copper slag aggregate 
Electric arc furnace oxidizing 
slag aggregate 
Asphalt 
compound Recycled heated asphalt 
compound 
Asphalt compound with steel 
slag 203 Warm asphalt compound 
Roadbed 
material Roadbed material with steel 
slag  
Recycled aggregate, etc. 
Small 
-diameter logs Lumber from thinning 
Blended 
cement Portland blast furnace cement 
Fly-ash cement 
Cement Eco-cement 
Concrete and 
products Water permeable concrete 
Hydrated 
solidified steel 
slag Steel slag block 
Spray on 
concrete Spray on concrete with 
fly-ash 
Paint Base-coating paint (anti 
corrosive) 
Water based road paint using 
low volatility organic solvent 
High solar reflectance paints 
Water proof High solar reflectance water 
proof 
Pavement- 
Material Pavement blocks using 
recycled material (burnt) 
Pavement block products 
using recycled material 
(precast unreinforced 
concrete products)  
Gardening 
material Bark compost 
Fermented compost using 
sewage sludge (sewage 
sludge compost) 
Road 
illuminations LED road illuminations 
Central 
divider block Central divider block 
manufactured with recycled 
plastic 
Tiles Ceramic tiles 
Doors and 
windows Heat insulating sash, doors 
Lumber, etc. Lumber 
Glued laminated timber 
Plywood 
Laminated veneer lumber 
Cross laminated timber 204 Flooring Flooring 
Reconstituted 
wood boards Particle board 
Fiberboard 
Wood-type cement board 
Wood-plastic 
composite Wood-plastic recycled 
composite 
Vinyl floor 
covering Vinyl floor covering 
Insulation Insulation 
Lighting 
fittings Lighting control system 
Transformers Transformers 
Air 
conditioning 
units Cold and hot water 
absorption units   
Ice thermal storage air 
conditioning units 
Gas heat pump air 
conditioning units 
Fan 
Pump 
Plumbing 
material Recycle unplasticized 
polyvinyl chloride pipes for 
sewage or vent 
Plumbing 
fixtures Automatic shut off faucets 
Toilet and urinals equipped 
with automatic flushing 
system 
Toilets bowls 
 Concrete form Form utilizing recycled 
material  
Plywood form 
Construction 
machines  
N/A 
  Low-emission construction 
machines Table 3 
Low-noise construction 
machines 
Construction 
methods Effective 
usage of soil 
resulting 
from 
construction Effective usage of low 
quality soil Table 4 
Recycling 
treatment of 
construction 
sludge Recycling treatment of 
construction sludge 205 Recycling 
treatment of 
concrete 
masses Recycling treatment of 
concrete masses 
Pavement 
(surface) Road surface recycling 
method 
Pavement 
(roadbed) Roadbed recycling method 
Slope surface 
greening 
method Slope surfaces greening 
method using thinning wood 
or soil obtained from 
construction process 
Sheathing 
method Soil cement pillar line wall 
method of reducing mad  
Others High 
performance 
paving 
material Porous pavement Table 5 
Permeable pavement 
Greening of 
rooftops Greening of rooftops 
 206 Table 2: Materials 
Item Type Item Name Evaluation Criteria, etc. 
Banking 
materials, etc. Treated soil 
recycled 
from 
construction 
sludge Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Be treated soil recycled from construction dirt. 
(2) Content and elution of toxic material such as heavy 
metals, etc., fulfill Regulation for Control of Soil 
Contamination (Regulation No. 53, 2002) and 
Environmental Standards for Soil Contamination 
(Ministry of Environment Notice No. 46, 1991). 
Granulated 
blast furnace 
slag for earth 
work Evaluation Criteria 
Public works material that uses blast furnace slag that can 
replace part or all of natural sand (sea sand and land sand), 
natural gravel, crushed sand, or crushed stone is used. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Manufacturer and seller of the steel slag are identifiable. 
Caisson 
filler using 
copper slag Evaluation Criteria 
Caisson fillers are copper slag that can replace part or all of 
natural sand (sea sand and land sand), natural gravel, 
crushed sand, or crushed stone. 
Caisson 
filler using 
ferro-nickel Evaluation Criteria 
Caisson fillers are ferro-nickel slag that can replace part or 
all of natural sand (sea sand and land sand), natural gravel, 
crushed sand, or crushed stone. 
Ground 
improvement 
material Steel slag for 
ground 
improve- 
ment Evaluation Criteria 
Steel slag is capable of completely replacing natural sand 
(sea sand and land sand) using sand compaction pile 
method. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Manufacturer and seller of the steel slag are identifiable. 
Slag 
aggregate for 
concrete 
 Blast furnace 
slag 
aggregate Evaluation Criteria 
Blast furnace slag that can replace part or all of natural sand 
(sea sand and land sand), natural gravel, crushed sand, or 
crushed stone is used. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Manufacturer and seller of the steel slag are identifiable. 
Notes: As for Blast furnace slag aggregate, material that meet the standard of JIS A 
5011-1(Slag aggregate for concrete-Part 1: Blast furnace slag aggregate) fills this criteria. 
 
Slag 
aggregate for 
concrete 
 Ferro-nickel 
slag 
aggregate Evaluation Criteria 
Ferro-nickel slag that can replace part or all of natural sand 
(sea sand and land sand), natural gravel, crushed sand, or 
crushed stone is used. 207 Notes: As for Ferro-nickel slag aggregate, material that meet the standard of JIS A 
5011-2(Slag aggregate for concrete-Part2 : Ferronnickel slag aggregate) fills this criteria. 
 
Slag 
aggregate for 
concrete 
 Copper slag 
aggregate Evaluation Criteria 
Copper slag that can replace part or all of natural sand (sea 
sand and land sand), natural gravel, crushed sand, or 
crushed stone is used. 
Notes: As for Copper slag aggregate, material that meet the standard of JIS A 5011-3(Slag 
aggregate for concrete-Part3 : Copper slag aggregate) fills this criteria. 
Slag 
aggregate for 
concrete 
 Electric arc 
furnace 
oxidizing 
slag 
aggregate Evaluation Criteria 
Electric arc furnace oxidizing slag that can replace part or 
all of natural sand (sea sand and land sand), natural gravel, 
crushed sand, or crushed stone is used. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Manufacturer and seller of the steel slag are identifiable. 
Notes:  As for Electric arc furnace oxidizing slag aggregate, material that meet the 
standard of JIS A 5011-4(Slag aggregate for concrete-Part 4: Electric arc furnace oxidizing 
slag aggregate) fills this criteria. 
Asphalt 
compound Recycled 
heated 
asphalt 
compound Evaluation Criteria 
Includes aggregate manufactured from asphalt concrete 
masses. 
Asphalt 
compound 
with steel 
slag Evaluation Criteria 
Steel slag for roads is used as aggregate for heated asphalt 
compound. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Manufacturer and seller of the steel slag are identifiable. 
Notes: As for Steel slag for roads, material that meet the standard of JIS A 5015(Iron and 
steel slag for road construction) fills this criteria. 
 
Asphalt 
compound Warm 
asphalt 
compound Evaluation Criteria 
The asphalt compound that lowers the heating temperature 
at about 30 degrees C when it is manufactured, securing a 
necessary quality by adding the adjustment medicine. 
Notes: Warm asphalt compound is promoted to use as the surface and the base-course 
material in the asphalt paving. However, it uses a new aggregate for the present. Moreover, 
it doesn't use it for porous asphalt. 
 
Roadbed 
material Roadbed 
material with 
steel slag Evaluation Criteria 
Steel slag for roads is used for roadbed material. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Manufacturer and seller of the steel slag are identifiable. 208 Notes: As for Steel slag for roads, material that meet the standard of JIS A 5015(Iron and 
steel slag for road construction) fills this criteria. 
 
Roadbed 
material Recycled 
aggregate, 
etc. Evaluation Criteria 
Includes aggregate manufactured from asphalt concrete 
masses or concrete masses. 
Small-diamet
er logs Lumber 
from 
thinning Evaluation Criteria 
Lumber from thinning (including recycled wood pieces 
such as material left over from forestry and lumber with a 
small diameter) that does not contain harmful decays or 
cracks is used. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
In cases other than recycled resource such as left over from 
forestry and lumber with a small diameter, raw timber is to 
be obtained from a forest that is conducting a sustainable 
operation. 
Notes: Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest where lumber from 
thinning originates from is, as for Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in accordance with  
Clean Wood Act and the Forest Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Legality and 
Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” For other than 
Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in accordance with the Forest Agency’s Guideline. In 
order for the National agent to procure, it is necessary to take into consideration the 
operation situation etc. of the industry etc. concerning the proof of legality of the procured 
item. 
 
Blended 
cement Portland 
blast furnace 
cement Evaluation Criteria 
Portland blast furnace cement whose raw material contains 
more than 30% blast furnace slag. 
Notes: As for Portland blast furnace cement, materials that meet the standard of species B 
or species C based on JIS R 5211 fills this criteria. 
 
Blended 
cement Fly-ash 
cement Evaluation Criteria 
Fly-ash cement whose raw material contains more than 
10% fly-ash. 
Notes: As for Fly-ash cement, materials that meet the standard of species B or species C 
based on JIS R 5213 fills this criteria. 
 
Cement Eco-cement Evaluation Criteria 
Cement that uses ashes resulting from incineration of city 
waste, etc. as the main ingredient. Cement contains no less 
than 500kg in dry weight of such waste material per 1 ton of 
final product.  
Notes:  
1. Eco-cement is to be used for concrete structures and concrete products that do not 
require high strength. 
2. As for Eco-cement, materials that meet the standard of JIS R 5214 fill this criteria. 209  
Concrete and 
concrete 
products Water 
permeable 
concrete Evaluation Criteria 
Water permeability of the concrete exceeds 1x10-2cm/sec. 
Notes: 
1. Water permeable concrete is to be used for areas that require rain water to permeate 
but do not require high strength. 
2. As for Water permeable concrete, material that meet the standard of JIS A 
5371(Precast unreinforced concrete products Appendix B pavement/boundary 
blocks Recommended specification B-1 Monotony) fills this criteria. 
 
Hydrated 
solidified 
steel slag Steel slag 
block Evaluation Criteria 
Steel slag listed in Table is no less than 50% by weight of the 
aggregate. Product uses blast furnace slag powder as binder. 
 
Table 
Category 
Converter slag (includes pig iron slag from preliminary 
treatment process) 
Electric furnace oxidized slag 
 
Factors for Consideration 
It is possible to find out the manufacturer and seller of steel 
slag. 
Spray-on 
concrete Spray-on 
concrete 
with fly-ash Evaluation Criteria 
Spray-on concrete that includes at least 100kg per 1m3 fly-ash 
in its admixture. 
Paint Base coat 
paint (anti 
corrosive) Evaluation Criteria 
Does not contain pigment using lead or chrome. 
Water based 
road paint 
using low 
volatility 
organic 
solvent Evaluation Criteria 
Water based road paint that contains no more than 5% of 
volatile organic solvent (VOC) (ratio of volatile solvent to 
total volume of paint). 
 High solar 
reflectance 
paints Evaluation Criteria 
(1) The solar reflectance in the near infrared rays region is 
over the ratio of the applicable in Table. 
(2) The average of the solar reflectance retention in the near 
infrared rays region is 80% or more. 
Notes: 
1. High solar reflectance paints in the evaluation criteria of this section are paints that 
contain pigments with high solar reflectance, and it is necessary to be used for 
construction that gives painting to a metallic side etc. in the rooftop and the roof, etc. 
in the building. 210 2. The solar reflectance in the near infrared rays region, L* value and the solar 
reflectance retention are measured and calculated based on JIS K 5675. 
3. As for High solar reflectance paints, materials that meet the standard of JIS K 5675 
fills this criteria. 
Table: The solar reflectance in the near infrared rays region 
L* value The solar reflectance in the 
near infrared rays region(%) 
40.0 or less 40.0 
More than 40.0, but less 
than 80.0 The ratio of L* value 
More than 80.0 80.0 
 
 
 
  
 
Waterproof High solar 
reflectance 
waterproof Evaluation Criteria 
The solar reflectance in the near infrared rays region is 50.0% 
or more. 
Notes: 
1. High solar reflectance waterproof in the evaluation criteria of this section are paints 
that contain pigments with high solar reflectance in the material in the water-resistant 
layer, or paints that have pigments with high solar reflectance are given as finish of 
the water-resistant layer in the rooftop and the roof, etc. in the building. 
2. The solar reflectance is calculated in accordance with JIS K 5602. 211 Pavement 
material Pavement 
blocks using 
recycled 
material 
(burnt) Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Uses recycled material (material such as those included in 
the left column of Table below, and preprocessed where 
indicated in the right column) as its raw material, and 
burnt. 
(2) Raw material contains 20% or more recycled material by 
weight (total weight when using multiple materials). 
However, when counting the weight of recycled material, 
it may not include scraps from the same factory that is 
usually used. 
(3) According to “Environmental Standards for Soil 
Contamination” (Ministry of Environment Notice No. 46, 
1991), there are no problems concerning the elution of 
toxic material such as heavy metals, etc., in the one that the 
product or the burned product of the reworked material 
used was crushed to 2mm or less.  
 
Factors for Consideration 
According to Regulation for Control of Soil Contamination 
(Regulation No. 53, 2002), there are no problems 
concerning the content of toxic material such as heavy 
metals, etc., in the one that the product or the burned 
product of the reworked material used was crushed to 2 mm 
or less. 
 
Table 
Category of recycled material to 
be used as raw material Preprocessing method 
Quarry or kiln waste No preprocessing 
required Inorganic silica sand 
Steel slag 
Non-ferrous slag 
Foundry sand 
Pottery shards 
Coal ash 
Building material waste  
Waste glass (does not include 
colorless and brown glass 
bottles) 
Paper sludge 
Aluminum sludge 
Polishing sand sludge 
Stone chips 
Municipal waste ashes Convert to molten slag 
Sewage sludge Convert to ashes or 
molten slag 
Waterworks sludge No preprocessing 
required Sludge from lakes, etc. 
 212 Pavement 
block 
products 
using 
recycled 
material 
(precast 
unreinforced 
concrete 
products) Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Uses recycled material (material such as those included in 
the left column of Table below, and preprocessed where 
indicated in the right column) as its raw material. 
(2) Raw material contains 20% or more recycled material by 
weight (total weight when using multiple materials). In 
cases where it is necessary to increase the ratio of 
aggregates in order to maintain water permeability, raw 
material contains 15% or more recycled material by 
weight. However, when counting the weight of recycled 
material, it may not include scraps from the same factory 
that is usually used. 
(3) There are no problems concerning content and elution of 
toxic material such as heavy metals in recycled material.  
 
Table 
Category of recycled material to 
be used as raw material Preprocessing method 
Municipal waste ashes Convert to molten slag Sewage sludge 
 
Notes: Evaluation Criteria (3) is to be determined in accordance with the standards designated 
in JIS A 5031 (Solidified slag aggregate for concrete derived from melting and solidification 
of general waste material, sewage discharge, or their incinerated ash). 
 
Gardening 
material Bark 
compost Evaluation Criteria 
Meets the following criteria, uses as raw material 50% or 
more by dry weight of tree bark that has peeled off from the 
tree component, and uses organic material including 
excrement of domestic animals, animal or plant food residue, 
or wood based scrap material as other raw material with the 
exception of material used for fermentation assistance: 
 Percentage of organic material (dry): no less than 70% 
 Carbon to nitrogen ratio (C/N ratio): no more than 35 
 Cation exchange capacity [CEC] (dry): no less than 
70meq/100g 
 pH: 5.5~7.5 
 Water content: 55`65% 
 Result of young plant test: no abnormalities including 
growth impediment is recognized 
 Nitrogen content [N] (actual): no less than 0.5% 
 Phosphoric acid content [P2O5] (actual): no less than 
0.2% 
 Potassium content [K2O] (actual): no less than 0.1% 213 Fermented 
compost 
using 
sewage 
sludge  
(Sewage 
sludge 
compost) Evaluation Criteria 
Meets the following criteria, uses as raw material 25% or 
more by weight of sewage sludge (dehydrated sludge based), 
and uses organic material including excrement of domestic 
animals, animal or plant food residue, or wood based scrap 
material as other raw material with the exception of 
non-organic soil conditioner. 
 
 Percentage of organic material (dry): no less than 35% 
 Carbon to nitrogen ratio (C/N ratio): no more than 20 
 pH: no more than 8.5  
 Water content: no more than 50% 
 Nitrogen content [N] (actual): no less than 0.8% 
 Phosphoric acid content [P2O5] (actual): no less than 
1.0% 
 Alkaline content (actual): no more than 15% (This does 
not apply when used for the purpose of correcting the 
acidity of the soil.) 
Notes: 
1. Fermented compost using sewage sludge includes those used as a soil conditioner.  
2. Material that satisfy the "Official standard of ordinary fertilizers" (Ministry of 
Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries Notification No. 284) based on the provisions of 
Articles 3 and 25 of the Fertilizer Control Law (Act No. 127, 1957). 
 
 
Road 
illuminations LED road 
illuminations Evaluation Criteria 
Road lighting facilities using LED, to satisfy one of the 
following criteria. 
(1) As road lighting equipment (Continuous lighting, 
sidewalk lighting, local lighting), meet all the following 
criteria.  
a. Standard apparent power is less than the value of the 
applicable design condition type in Table 1. 
b. Average color rendering index Ra of 60 or more. 
c. Rated life of LED module and control device of LED 
modules are at least 60,000 hours. 
(2) Tunnel lighting equipment (basic lighting) meet the 
following criteria.  
a. Standard apparent power is less than the value of the 
applicable design condition type in Table 2. 
b. Average color rendering index Ra of 80 or more 
c. Rated life of LED module and control device of LED 
modules are at least 90,000 hours. 
(3) Tunnel lighting equipment (entrance lighting) meet the 
following criteria.  
a. Standard apparent power is less than the value of the 
applicable category type in Table 3. 214 b. Average color rendering index Ra of 60 or more. 
c. Rated life of LED module and control device of LED 
modules are at least 75,000 hours. 
Notes: 
1. Measuring method of average color rendering index Ra is in accordance with light 
source color and color rendition evaluation method of source of light by JIS C 
7801(Measuring methods of lamps for general lighting) and JIS C 8152-2 (Photometry 
of white light emitting diode (LED) for general lighting-Part 2: LED modules and 
LED light engines). 
2. Rated life denotes the average time that the residual ratio of lifetime of the LED 
modules of the same type produced over a period of time and the life of the LED 
module for the control device of the same type is 50%.Rated life of the LED module 
denotes either a short time of the time until the LED module is not lit when used under 
the conditions prescribed or the total lighting time of up to the luminous flux is less 
than 80% of the values measured in the initial lighting stage (rated luminous flux of the 
LED module) (non-lighting regarded as).Rated life of the control device for LED 
modules denotes the total lighting time of up to becomes unusable; the conditions of 
which the control device for LED module fails or the output power of the device is less 
than the rated output power when used under the conditions prescribed. 
 
 
Table 1 : Standard apparent power for road lighting equipment(continuous lighting, 
sidewalk lighting, local lighting)  
Cate 
gory Design conditions type  Standard 
apparent 
power 
continuous lighting A 2-lane road surface luminance 1.0 cd/m2 with sidewalk 125 VA 
B 2-lane road surface luminance 1.0 cd/m2 without sidewalk 
C 3-lane road surface luminance 1.0 cd/m2 with sidewalk 180 VA D 3-lane road surface luminance 1.0 cd/m2 without sidewalk 
E 2-lane road surface luminance 1.0 cd/m2 high-standard 175 VA 
F 2-lane road surface luminance 0.7 cd/m2 with sidewalk 95 VA G 2-lane road surface luminance 0.7 cd/m2 without sidewalk 
H 3-lane road surface luminance 0.7 cd/m2 with sidewalk 125 VA I 3-lane road surface luminance 0.7 cd/m2 without sidewalk 
J 2-lane road surface luminance 0.7 cd/m2 high-standard 120 VA 
K average road surface luminance 0.5 cd/m2 with sidewalk 70 VA L average road surface luminance 0.5 cd/m2 without sidewalk 
Side 
walk 
lighting - Average road surface illuminance 5 lx 20 VA 
- Average road surface illuminance 10 lx 40 VA 
Local 
lighting M crossroad(2-lane×2-lane)20 lx 160 VA 
N crossroad(2-lane×2-lane)15 lx 125 VA 
O crossroad(2-lane×2-lane)10 lx  95 VA 
p crossroad(4-lane×2-lane)20 lx for continuous 125 VA 215 lighting 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part 120 VA 
Q crossroad(4-lane×2-lane)15 lx for continuous 
lighting  95 VA  
for the intersection 
corner cutting part  95 VA 
q' crossroad(4-lane×2-lane)10 lx for continuous 
lighting  70 VA  
for the intersection 
corner cutting part  70 VA 
R crossroad(4-lane×4-lane)20 lx for continuous 
lighting 125 VA 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part 120 VA 
S crossroad(4-lane×4-lane)15 lx for continuous 
lighting  95 VA  
for the intersection 
corner cutting part  95 VA 
T crossroad(6-lane×4-lane)20 lx for continuous 
lighting 125 VA 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part 120 VA 
U crossroad(6-lane×4-lane)15 lx for continuous 
lighting  95 VA 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part  95 VA 
- T intersection(2-lane×2-lane) 20 lx  95 VA  
- T intersection(2-lane×2-lane) 15 lx  70 VA 
- T intersection(2-lane×2-lane) 10 lx  70 VA  
- T intersection(4-lane×2-lane)20 lx for continuous 
lighting 125 VA 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part 120 VA  
- T intersection(4-lane×2-lane)15 lx for continuous 
lighting  95 VA 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part  95 VA  
- T intersection(4-lane×2-lane)10 lx for continuous 
lighting  70 VA 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part  70 VA  
- Y T intersection(4-lane×2-lane) 20 lx 125 VA 
- Y T intersection(4-lane×2-lane) 15 lx  95 VA  
- Y T intersection(4-lane×2-lane) 10 lx  70 VA 
V System to illuminate the background of the pedestrian 20 lx 180 VA  216 - System to illuminate the background of the pedestrian 10 lx  95 VA 
W System to illuminate the background of the pedestrian 20 lx 180 VA  
- System to illuminate the background of the pedestrian 10 lx  95 VA 
Notes: 
1. Design condition type is according to the "LED road and tunnel lighting introduced 
guidelines (draft)" (by Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transport, March 2015). 
2. Standard apparent power is the value of the apparent power of the rated end-of-life of 
the LED road lighting. 
3. Apparent power in the case of using a light bulb color LED is a standard 1.2 times the 
value in the above table of apparent power. 
 
 
Table 2: Normal apparent power for Tunnel lighting fixture (standard lighting) 
Category Design condition type  Standard apparent 
power 
General national 
highway, etc. 
Roadway width 6m to 
7m (Including 
cross-section of the 
sidewalk) x 
One-half 
reduction design speed 40(km/h) 
2-lane-lane 
0.75(cd/m2) zigzag 
alignment 40 VA 
z 
One-half 
reduction design speed 50(km/h) 
2-lane-lane 
0.95(cd/m2) zigzag 
alignment 50 VA 
bb 
One-half 
reduction design speed 60(km/h) 
2-lane 
1.15(cd/m2) zigzag 
alignment 65 VA 
x design speed 40(km/h) 
2-lane 
1.5(cd/m2) zigzag 
alignment 65 VA 
y design speed 40(km/h) 
2-lane 
1.5(cd/m2 ) face to face 40 VA 
z design speed 50(km/h) 
2-lane 
1.9(cd/m2 ) zigzag 
alignment 75 VA 
aa design speed 50(km/h) 
2-lane 
1.9(cd/m2 ) face to face 50 VA 
bb design speed 60(km/h) 
2-lane 
2.3(cd/m2 ) zigzag 
alignment 95 VA 
cc design speed 60(km/h) 
2-lane 65 VA 217 2.3(cd/m2 ) face to face 
National expressway, 
etc. dd design speed 70(km/h) 
2-lane 
3.2(cd/m2) zigzag 
alignment 95 VA 
ee design speed 70(km/h) 
2-lane 
3.2(cd/m2) face to face 65 VA 
ff design speed 80(km/h) 
2-lane 
4.5(cd/m2) zigzag 
alignment 125 VA 
gg design speed80(km/h) 
2-lane 
4.5(cd/m2) face to face 95 VA 
Notes: 
1. Design condition type is according to "LED road and tunnel lighting introduced 
guidelines (draft) by Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transportation, March, 
2015". 
2. Standard apparent power is the value of the apparent power of the rated end-of-life of 
the LED road lighting. 
 
 
Table 3: Standard apparent power for Tunnel lighting equipment (entrance lighting) 
Type Standard 
apparent power 
NH 70W equivalent  50 VA 
NH 110W equivalent 75 VA 
NH 150W equivalent 105 VA 
NH 180W equivalent 160 VA 
NH 220W equivalent 205 VA 
NH 270W equivalent 250 VA 
NH 360W equivalent 290 VA 
Notes: 
Type refers to the LED tunnel lighting fixtures of high pressure sodium lamp equivalent. 
 
 
Central 
divider block Central 
divider block 
using 
recycled 
plastic Evaluation Criteria 
Raw material contains 70% or more recycled plastic by 
weight. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)A system exists for collection and reuse after removal. 
(2)Plastics used for products should be collected after use 
and do not interfere with re-recycling. 
Notes: 218 1. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the product.) 
2. As for Central divider block using recycled plastic, material that meet the standard of 
JIS A 9401(Recycled plastics median strip block) fills this criteria. 
 
 
Tiles  Ceramic tile Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Uses recycled material (material such as those included in 
the left column of Table below, and preprocessed where 
indicated in the right column) as its raw material. 
(2) Raw material contains 20% or more recycled material by 
weight (total weight when using multiple materials). 
However, when counting the weight of recycled material, it 
may not include scraps from the same factory that is usually 
used. 
(3) According to “Environmental Standards for Soil 
Contamination” (Ministry of Environment Notice No. 46, 
1991), there are no problems concerning the elution of toxic 
material such as heavy metals, etc., in the one that the 
product or the burned product of the reworked material used 
was crushed to 2 mm or less. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
According to Regulation for Control of Soil Contamination 
(Regulation No. 53, 2002), there are no problems concerning the 
content of toxic material such as heavy metals, etc., in the one 
that the product or the burned product of the reworked material 
used was crushed to 2 mm or less. 
 
 
Table Insert 
Category of recycled material to be used 
as raw material Preprocessing Method 
Quarry or kiln waste 
Inorganic silica sand 
Steel slag 
Non-ferrous slag 
Foundry sand 
Pottery shards 
Coal ash 
Waste plastic 
Building material waste 
Waste rubber 
Waste glass (does not include colorless 
and brown glass bottles) No preprocessing required 219 Paper sludge 
Aluminum sludge 
Polishing sand sludge 
Stone chips 
Municipal waste ashes Convert to molten slag 
Sewage sludge Convert to ashes or molten slag 
Waterworks sludge No preprocessing required 
Sludge from lakes, etc. 
 
 
Item Type Item Name Evaluation Criteria, etc. 
Doors and 
windows Heat 
insulating 
sash, doors Evaluation Criteria 
Doors and windows that prevent loss of heat through 
themselves, while meeting any of the followings: 
(1) Sash using multiple glasses. 
(2) Double sash. 
(3) Door using insulation material or other effective 
method of insulation. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) The measures of effective insulation or 
well-insulated material is used in the sash frame, the 
shoji frame or the glasses.  
(2) For sash and multiple glass defined in the Order for 
Enforcement of the Regulation for the Efficient Use 
of Energy (Law No. 267, 1979), Article 22, No. 2 
and No. 3, the value of heat loss prevention 
performance is as small as possible if it is. 
Note: Definition and method of measuring “The value of heat loss prevention 
performance" are based on "The standards of the judgment the sash of the performance 
improvement heat loss prevention building material manufacturers, etc. (Ministry of 
Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No. 234, 2014), and “The standards of 
judgment of heat loss prevention construction manufacturers, etc. related to the 
improvement of the performance of the pair glass (Ministry of economy, Trade and 
industry Notification No. 235, 2014). 220 Lumber, etc. Lumber Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Lumber from thinning and left over forest wood have 
a small diameter and lumber from thinning is to be in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry 
in its country or geographical area of origin. 
(2) For cases other than above (1), the wood used is to be 
in compliance with the regulations concerning 
forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Lumber that is used as the raw material is to be obtained 
from a forest that is conducting a sustainable operation. 
However, recycled resources such as material left over 
from forestry and lumber with a small diameter will not 
be applied. 
Glued 
laminated 
timber 
 
Plywood 
 
Laminated 
veneer    
lumber 
 
Cross 
laminated 
timber Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Lumber such as timber from thinning, obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories, material left over from 
forestry and lumber with a small diameter contain 
10% or more by volume and also lumber that is used 
other than obtained from plywood lumber factories, 
material left over from forestry and lumber with a 
small diameter is to be in compliance with the 
regulations concerning forestry in its country or 
geographical area of origin.  
(2) For cases other than above (1), raw material wood is 
to be in compliance with the regulations concerning 
forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. 
However lumber obtained from plywood or lumber 
factories, material left over from forestry and lumber 
with a small diameter will not be applied. 
(3) For material used to finish the interior of living 
spaces, average formaldehyde discharge may not 
exceed 0.3mg/L, maximum discharge may not exceed 
0.4mg/L. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Lumber that is used as the raw material is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a sustainable 
operation. However, recycled resources such as 
obtained from plywood or lumber factories, material 
left over from forestry, lumber with a small diameter 
will not be applied. 
(2) For wood based materials, the utilization ratio of 
recycled resources and lumber from thinning should 
be as high as possible. 
Notes: 221 1. Lumber, glued laminated timber, plywood, laminated veneer lumber and cross 
laminated timber under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section 
(referred to as lumber, etc.) are to be used for carpentry in buildings. 
2. Evaluation Criteria (2) for lumber, etc. is to be applicable only in cases where 
restrictions exist on either function or demand. 
3. Measurement for formaldehyde discharge should be performed in accordance with 
Japan Agricultural Standards. 
4. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest where lumber and 
glued laminated timber etc., originates from is, as for Wood-related Entities, to be 
conducted in accordance with Clean Wood Act and the Forest Agency’s “Guideline 
for Verification on Legality and Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products 
(February 15, 2006).” For other than Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in 
accordance with the Forest Agency’s Guideline. 
Regarding raw timber where the contract between the lumber company and the 
processing and marketing companies has been made prior to April 1, 2006, a supplier 
who owns raw materials or products etc. as of April 1, 2006, specifies the raw 
materials or products etc., and reports them in advance to the Forestry Agency once a 
year, and is a specified raw material or product etc. If it is stated in the certificate, the 
proof that it is a legal wood prescribed in the above guidelines is unnecessary. The 
period of time for which this exceptional clause is applicable will be determined in 
consideration with market trend. 
 222 Flooring Flooring Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Uses lumber from thinning, obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forestry 
and lumber with a small diameter and also lumber 
that is used other than obtained from plywood 
lumber factories, material left over from forestry and 
lumber with a small diameter is to be in compliance 
with the regulations concerning forestry in its 
country or geographical area of origin.   
(2) For cases other than above (1), raw material wood is 
to be in compliance with the regulations concerning 
forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. 
However lumber obtained from plywood or lumber 
factories, material left over from forestry and lumber 
with a small diameter will not be applied. 
(3) If wood is used for the base material of flooring, 
timber from thinning as a raw material wood is to be 
in compliance with the regulations concerning 
forestry in its country or geographical area of origin.  
(4) For material used to finish the interior of living 
spaces, average formaldehyde discharge may not 
exceed 0.3mg/L, maximum discharge may not 
exceed 0.4mg/L. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Lumber that is used as the raw material is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a 
sustainable operation. However, obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories, material left over from 
forestry, lumber with a small diameter and timber 
from thinning (Only when wood is not used for the 
base material) will not be applied. 
(2) For wood based materials, the utilization ratio of 
recycled resources and lumber from thinning should 
be as high as possible. 
Notes:  
1. Flooring under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section are to be used for 
carpentry in buildings. 
2. Evaluation Criteria (2) for flooring is to be applicable only in cases where restrictions 
exist on either function or demand. 
3. Measurement for formaldehyde discharge should be performed in accordance with 
Japan Agricultural Standards. 
4. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest of wood which 
becomes the raw material of flooring are as follows. 
A. In the case of using wood for the base material, Wood-related Entities must comply 
with the Clean Wood Act for the timber, to be conducted in accordance with the 
Forest Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Legality and Sustainability of Wood 
and Wood Products (February 15, 2006)”, which is incorporated herein by 223 reference. Also, in order for the state agencies procure, it is necessary to take into 
consideration the operation situation etc. of the industry etc. concerning the proof of 
legality of the procured items. For non-timber-related business operators, they shall 
be conducted in compliance with the guidelines. In order for a national agency to 
procure, it is necessary to take into consideration the operation situation etc. of the 
industry etc. concerning the proof of legality of the procured item.  
B. For goods other than the item (a) above, it shall be carried out in compliance with 
the above guidelines. The certification system of forests, timber etc. by prefectures 
etc. can also be used for confirmation of legality. 
Regarding raw timber where the contract between the lumber company and the 
processing and marketing companies has been made prior to April 1, 2006, a supplier 
who owns raw materials or products etc. as of April 1, 2006, specifies the raw 
materials or products etc., and reports them in advance to the Forestry Agency once a 
year, and is a specified raw material or product etc. If it is stated in the certificate, the 
proof that it is a legal wood prescribed in the above guidelines is unnecessary. The 
period of time for which this exceptional clause is applicable will be determined in 
consideration with market trend. 
5. "When wood was used for the base material" of Evaluation Criteria (3), and "When 
using wood for the base material" in Factors for Consideration (1), "Wood was used as 
a base material for the base material of Note 4 Wood "refers to what is subject to the 
Clean Wood Act. 
 
Reconstituted 
wood boards Particle 
board 
 
 
Fiberboard 
 Evaluation Criteria  
(1) At least 50% (by weight) of the material consists of 
lumber from thinning,  lumber obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories, lumber recovered from 
dismantled structures, used crates, wood chips left 
over from paper manufacturing, logging scrap, 
shrubs, and lumber with a small diameter or plant 
fiber. In this case, it is possible to calculate the weight 
ratio blend ratio without accounting for adhesives, 
admixtures or the like (such as a phenolic adhesive in 
a particle board) having a volume ratio blend ratio of 
20% or less in the whole recycled material. 
(2) Lumber as the raw material is to be in compliance 
with the regulations concerning forestry in its 
country or geographical area of origin. However  
lumber obtained from plywood or lumber factories, 
lumber recovered from dismantled structures, used 
crates, wood chips left over from paper 
manufacturing, logging scrap, shrubs, and lumber 
with a small diameter will not be applied. 
(3) For material used to finish the interior of living 
spaces, formaldehyde discharge may not exceed 
0.3mg/l, maximum discharge may not exceed 0.4 
mg/l. 
 
Factors for Consideration 224 (1) Lumber is to be obtained from a forest that is 
conducting a sustainable operation. However lumber 
obtained from plywood or lumber factories,  lumber 
recovered from dismantled structures, used crates, 
wood chips left over from paper manufacturing, 
material left over from forestry, shrubs, and lumber 
with a small diameter will not be applied.  
(2) For wood based materials, the utilization ratio of 
recycled resources and lumber from thinning should 
be as high as possible. 
 
Reconstituted 
wood boards Wood-type 
cement 
board Evaluation Criteria  
(1) At least 50% (by weight) of the material consists of 
lumber from thinning,  lumber obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories, lumber recovered from 
dismantled structures, used crates, wood chips left 
over from paper manufacturing, logging scrap, 
shrubs, and lumber with a small diameter or plant 
fiber. In this case, it is possible to calculate the weight 
ratio blend ratio without accounting for adhesives, 
admixtures or the like (such as cement in a woody 
cement board) having a volume ratio blend ratio of 
20% or less in the whole recycled material. 
(2) Lumber as the raw material is to be in compliance 
with the regulations concerning forestry in its 
country or geographical area of origin. However  
lumber obtained from plywood or lumber factories, 
lumber recovered from dismantled structures, used 
crates, wood chips left over from paper 
manufacturing, logging scrap, shrubs, and lumber 
with a small diameter will not be applied. 
(3) For material used to finish the interior of living 
spaces, formaldehyde discharge may not exceed 
0.3mg/l, maximum discharge may not exceed 0.4 
mg/l. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Lumber that is used as the raw material is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a 
sustainable operation. However  lumber obtained 
from plywood or lumber factories, lumber recovered 
from dismantled structures, used crates, wood chips 
left over from paper manufacturing, logging scrap, 
shrubs, and lumber with a small diameter will not be 
applied.  
(2) For wood based materials, the utilization ratio of 
recycled resources and lumber from thinning should 
be as high as possible. 225 Notes:  
1. Measurement for formaldehyde discharge should be performed in accordance with JIS 
A 1460. 
2. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest where particle board 
and fiberboard originates from is to be conducted in accordance with the Forest 
Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Legality and Sustainability of Wood and 
Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” In addition, certification system of forest, 
timber, etc. by prefectures etc. can be utilized for confirmation of legality.  
3. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest where Wood-type 
cement board originates from is, as for Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in 
accordance with  Clean Wood Act and  the Forest Agency’s “Guideline for 
Verification on Legality and Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (February 15, 
2006).” For other than Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in accordance with the 
Forest Agency’s Guideline.  
4. As for Particle board and Fiberboard, concerning Evaluation Criteria(3), materials 
that meet the standard of F four stars based on JIS A 5908 and A 5905 fill this criteria. 
 
Wood-plastic 
composite Wood-plastic 
recycled 
composite Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Materials that are recognized as recycled materials etc. are 
used at a weight ratio of raw materials of 60% or more (in 
the case where a plurality of materials are used, the sum of 
those materials) is used. 
(2) The woody material used as a raw material has 100% of the 
woody raw material recognized as a recycled material or 
the like. 
(3) There is no problem concerning the inclusion and elution of 
harmful substances such as heavy metals. 
(4) Plastics used for products shall be collected after use and 
shall not interfere with recycling 
 
Factors for Consideration 
There is a system to collect and recycle after removal. 
Notes:  
1. Wood-plastic recycled composite subject to the Evaluation criteria in this section shall 
be used for construction of the outer structure of the building, construction of the 
garden road in the urban park, maintenance work of the port green area. 
2. Evaluation criteria (1) (2) and (3) according to the criteria stipulated in Wood-Plastic 
Recycled Composite specified in JIS A 5741. 
3. Regarding Evaluation criteria (1) (3) and (4),  Wood-Plastic Recycled Composite 
specified in JIS A 5741 4.2 Content Ratio of Recycled Materials, etc. Classification 
R60, R70, R80 and R90 satisfy this criteria. 
 
 226 Vinyl floor 
covering Vinyl floor 
covering Evaluation Criteria 
Total weight of recycled vinyl resin material used is no less than 
15% of total weight. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
A system for collection and reuse/recycling of material left over 
from construction work is considered. 
Notes: Types of vinyl flooring material determined by JIS A 5705 (Vinyl floor covering) that 
is applicable to symbol KS is not to be included in vinyl floor covering discussed in 
Evaluation Criteria. 
 
Insulation Insulation Evaluation Criteria 
Material that prevents loss of heat through the outer walls of 
buildings, and meet the below criteria.  
(1) Fluorocarbons are not used. 
(2) Uses recycled material, or may be recycled after use. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
As for extruded polystyrene foam insulator, the glass-wool 
insulation and the rock wool heat insulation, the numerical value 
of the heat loss prevention performance are small as small as 
possible. 
Notes: 
1. Fluorocarbons are the materials defined as the Fluorocarbons prescribed in Article 2, 
Paragraph 1 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Proper Management of 
Fluorocarbons, (Act No. 64 of 2001). 
2. Definition of the heat loss prevention performance and the measuring method are 
according to “Criteria of judgment such as manufacturing entrepreneurs of materials 
for building construction for heat loss prevention concerning improvement of 
performance of insulation” (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry Act No.270 of 
December, 2013). 
 
Lighting 
fittings Lighting 
control system Evaluation Criteria 
Comprised of equipment capable of continuous lighting, 
LED lighting equipment and lighting control system that 
controls the equipment. It possesses functions for the control 
and correction of initial luminance and the control of natural 
light. 
Transformers Transformers Evaluation Criteria 
Energy consumption efficiency shall not exceed the amount 
determined by the appropriate formula for each category. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Load factor during actual operation is taken into 
consideration. 
Notes:  227 Transformers under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section refers to items 
whose rated primary voltage exceeds 600V and is 7000V or less, and is used for an 
alternating current circuit. Items that meet any of the following criteria will not be 
considered as transformers. 
 
(1) Items that use gas as insulating material. 
(2) Items that use H type insulating material. 
(3) Scott connection transformers. 
(4) Items equipped with more than 3 round rotors. 
(5) Pole transformers. 
(6) Single phase transformers with rated capacity of 5kVA or less, or over 500kVA. 
(7) Triple phase transformers with rated capacity of 10kVA or less, or over 2000kVA. 
(8) Triple phase transformers using resin insulation material used to transform triple 
phase alternating current to single phase and triple phased alternating current. 
(9) Items whose rated secondary voltage of less than 100V or more than 600V. 
(10) Wind cooled, or water cooled items. 
 
 
Table: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Transformers 
Category Formula for 
calculating standard 
energy consumption 
efficiency Type of 
transformer Phase 
number Rated 
frequency Rated capacity 
Oil-filled 
transformers Single 
phase 50 Hz  E=11.2S0.732 
60 Hz  E=11.1S0.725 
Triple 
phase 50 Hz 500 kVA or less E=16.6S0.696 
Over 500 kVA E=11.1S0.809 
60 Hz 500 kVA or less E=17.3S0.678 
Over 500 kVA E=11.7S0.790 
Molded 
transformers Single 
phase 50 Hz  E=16.9S0.674 
60 Hz  E=15.2S0.691 
Triple 
phase 50 Hz 500 kVA or less E=23.9S0.659 
Over 500 kVA E=22.7S0.718 
60 Hz 500 kVA or less E=22.3S0.674 
Over 500 kVA E=19.4S0.737 
Notes: 
1. Oil-filled transformers refer to items that use insulation oil as the insulating material. 
2. Molded transformers refer to item that uses resin insulation material. 
3. E and S stand for the following: 
E: Standard energy consumption efficiency (unit: W) 
S: Rated capacity (unit: kVA) 
4. The table designation will be applied correspondingly to those items not used in the 
standard specification conditions designated in JIS C 4304 and C 4306 and Japan 
Electrical Industry Standards 1500 and 1501. In such cases, the formula for calculating 
standard energy consumption efficiency listed in the right column of the chart will be 
modified by multiplying the right side of the formula by 1.10 (for mold transformers, 
multiply by 1.05). 228 5. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods”, based on “Criteria for judgment of manufacturers 
of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy consumption 
performance of transformers (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry notification 
No.71 of 2012). 
 
 
 
Air 
conditioning 
units Cold and hot 
water 
absorption 
air 
conditioning 
unit   Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Coefficient of Performance for cooling is no less 
than what is designated in Table 1. 
(2) Integrated part load value for cooling is no less than 
what is designated in Table 2. 
Notes:  
1. Evaluation criteria for Cold and hot water absorption air conditioning unit under 
consideration in the evaluation criteria in this section only applies to units whose 
cooling capacity is no less than 105kW. However, equipment that uses wood pellets as 
a fuel is excluded. 
2. Coefficient of performance and integrated part load value for cold and hot water 
absorption air conditioning unit shall be calculated in accordance with JIS B 8622. 
 
Table 1: Coefficient of Performance for Cooling 
Category Coefficient of 
performance 
Cooling capacity is lower than 352kW 1.20 
 
Table 2: Integrated Part Load Value for Cooling 
Category Integrated part load value 
for Cooling 
Cooling capacity is 352kW or higher 1.45 
 
 
Air 
conditioning 
units Ice thermal 
storage air 
conditioners Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Includes an ice thermal storage tank. 
(2) Cooling material does not use material capable of destroying 
the ozone layer. 
(3) Coefficient of performance for cooling is no less than what is 
specified in Table 3. 
Notes: 
1. Ice thermal storage air conditioner denotes an ice thermal storage unit or an ice 
thermal storage packaged air conditioner. 
2. Evaluation criteria for Ice thermal storage air conditioner apply to ice thermal 
storage units whose non-thermal storage equivalent cooling capacity exceeds 28kW, 229 or ice thermal storage packaged air conditioners whose rated thermal storage cooling 
capacity exceeds 28kW. 
3. Coefficient of performance is calculated with the below formula using 10 hours as the 
daytime heat source unit operating duration.  
(1) Ice thermal storage unit 
Coefficient of performance =Rated daily cooling capacity (kW.h) / 
Rated electricity consumption for thermal storage (kW.h) + Electricity 
consumption for daytime cooling operation of heat source unit (kW.h) 
(2) Ice thermal storage packaged air conditioner 
Coefficient of performance=Daily cooling efficiency using thermal storage 
4. Non-thermal storage equivalent cooling capacity denotes the peak heat load with the 
average head load factor per one hour of cooling (the ratio of average load when the 
load factor per hour of peak load is 100%) at 85%.  
5. Rated thermal storage cooling capacity denotes the amount of heat load that the ice 
thermal storage packaged air conditioner removes from a room by primarily using 
thermal storage in accordance with the rated cooling temperature conditions indicated 
on Table 1. 
 
Table 1: Temperature conditions  Unit : degrees C 
 
 Temperature condition 
inside entryway Exterior temperature 
condition 
Dry bulb 
temperature Wet bulb 
temperature Dry bulb 
temperature Wet bulb 
temperature 
Air 
conditioning Rated cooling 27 19 35 | 
Thermal 
storage for 
rated cooling | | 25 | 
 
6. Rated daily cooling capacity denotes the total daily heat value that may be supplied to a 
secondary source with the temperature of cold water outlet at 7 degrees C. The amount is 
calculated by adding the net effective heat storage capacity derived from the heat 
value stored inside the heat storage tank, and the heat value cooled by the daytime 
operation of heat source equipment. 
7. Rated electricity consumption for thermal storage denotes the sum of electricity 
consumed (including electricity consumed by primary supplementary equipment such as 
a brine pump) in order to reach standard thermal storage capacity in accordance with the 
thermal storage temperature conditions indicated on Table 2. 
 
Table 2: Temperature conditions   Unit: degrees C 
 Exterior temperature condition 230 Dry bulb 
temperature Wet bulb 
temperature 
Air 
condition- 
ing Rated cooling 35 - 
Thermal storage 
for rated cooling 25 - 
 
8. Electricity consumption for daytime cooling operation of heat source unit denotes the 
sum of electricity consumed when heat source and thermal storage tank is connected in 
series and operated in accordance with the rated cooling temperature condition indicated 
on Table 2. 
9. Daily cooling efficiency using thermal storage denotes the result of daily thermal storage 
cooling capacity divided by electricity consumed by daily thermal storage cooling. 
10. Daily thermal storage cooling capacity denotes the amount of heat removed from the 
room during the time that an ice heat storage packaged air conditioner is operated under 
stable conditions for thermal storage for rated cooling indicated on Table 1 for a maximum 
of 10 hours, and then operated using thermal storage for the duration of thermal storage 
cooling period. 
11. Electricity consumed by daily thermal storage cooling denotes electricity consumed 
during the time that an ice heat storage packaged air conditioner is operated under stable 
conditions for thermal storage for rated cooling indicated on Table 1 for a maximum of 10 
hours, and then operated using thermal storage for the duration of thermal storage cooling 
period. 
 
Table 3: Coefficient of Performance for Cooling 
Category Coefficient of performance 
ice thermal storage unit 2.2 
ice thermal packaged air 
conditioner 3.0 
 
Air 
condition- 
ing units Gas engine 
heat pump 
air 
conditioner Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Annual Performance does not fall below the values listed in 
Tables. 
(2) Refrigerant does not include material capable of destroying the 
ozone layer. 
Notes: 
1. Gas engine heat pump air conditioner under consideration in the evaluation criteria 
includes units defined by JIS B 8627 whose rated cooling capacity is 28kW or more. 
2. The calculation of Primary Annual Performance Factor (APFp) will be executed in 
accordance with JIS B 8627. 
 
 
Table : Annual Performance Factor 
Category Annual Performance Factor (APFp) 231 Cooling capacity is 28kW or higher and 
lower than 35.5kW 1.22 or higher 
Cooling capacity is 35.5kW or higher  
and lower than 45kW 1.37 or higher 
Cooling capacity is 45kW or higher and 
lower than 56kW 1.59 or higher 
Cooling capacity is 56kW or higher 1.70 or higher 
 
 
Air conditioning 
units Fan Evaluation Criteria 
Uses premium efficiency motor. 
Notes: 
1. Premium efficiency motor is to be JIS C 4213 (Low-voltage three-phase squirrel-cage 
induction motors-Low-voltage Top Runner Motor). 
2. Range of applicability should include centrifugal fan for air conditioning and 
ventilation that uses three-phase induction motor with nominal voltage of 600V or 
lower. This does not include direct style induction motor and smoke ventilator. 
 
 
Air conditioning 
units Pump Evaluation Criteria 
Uses high efficiency motor. 
Notes: 
1. Premium efficiency motor is to be JIS C 4213 (Low-voltage three-phase squirrel-cage 
induction motors-Low-voltage Top Runner Motor). 
2. Range of applicability should include air conditioning pump that uses three-phase 
induction motor with nominal voltage of 600V or lower, and in particular, a centrifugal 
pump whose motor is directly connected to the pump. 
 
 
Plumbing 
material Recycle 
Recycled rigid 
PVC pipe for 
drainage and 
vent  Evaluation Criteria 
The item is recycled rigid polyvinyl chloride pipes for drainage or 
vent and the use ratio does not fall below the numbers listed in 
Table. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
A system for collection and reuse/recycling after the useful life of 
the item is considered. 
Notes: 
1. Evaluation criteria  applies to the no pressure piping only when used rigid polyvinyl 
chloride pipes are used for the indoor drainage and vent, and for the outdoor drainage in 
facilities for drainage in the site. 
2. "Recycled rigid PVC pipe for drainage and vent" is according to "recycled rigid 
polyvinyl chloride three-layer pipe" specified in JIS K 9797, "recycled rigid polyvinyl 232 chloride foamed three-layer pipe" specified in JIS K 9798 and "Recycled rigid PVC pipe 
for drainage" specified in AS58, 
3. “Recycled material usage rate” refers to the ratio of “recycled polyvinyl chloride” made 
from rigid polyvinyl chloride pipes and fittings to the mass of the pipe. 
4. “Reused polyvinyl chloride” according to JIS K 9797 3.a) 4), JIS K 9798 3.a) 4) and AS 
58 3.1. 
 
 
 
Table: Recycled Material Usage Rate  
Classification of pipe Type of pipe Content ratio 
Three layer pipes Recycled rigid PVC pipe three layer pipes 50% 
Recycled rigid PVC pipe foam three layer pipes 30% 
Single layer pipes Recycled rigid PVC pipe for drainage 80% 
 
 
 
Plumbing 
fixtures Automatic 
faucet Evaluation Criteria 
By electric control system, water comes out in the automatic 
operation when the hand is close to the faucet without touch 
and water stops in the automatic operation when the hand is 
kept away. 
Toilet and 
urinal 
equipped with 
automatic 
flushing 
system Evaluation Criteria 
Amount of water flushed in one procedure does not exceed 4 
liters. Amount of water can be controlled depending on 
usage. 
 
Toilet bowls Evaluation Criteria 
Amount of water flushed in one procedure does not exceed 
6.5 liters. 
Notes: 
1. Automatic faucet in the evaluation criteria of this section is the one to be used for wash and 
toiletry of public washroom. It must be prompt still water after the hand is kept away to stop 
water. 
2. Among the toilet bowls, high seat type and Japanese style toilet bowls are excluded. 
3. In introducing the toilet bowls, sufficient consideration should be given to ensuring the 
drainage function of the entire drainage facility. 
 
Concrete 
form 
 
 Form utilizing 
recycled 
material Evaluation Criteria 
Form utilizing recycled material is to be comprised at least 
50% by weight of recycled material (those that uses those 
listed in Attached Table as raw material), and is being 
recycled again after use. 
 
Attached Table 233 Category of material that can be used as raw material 
for recycling 
Recycled plastic 
Pulp from recycled paper 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Form utilizing recycled material has been confirmed for 
efficiency in construction and economy (material cost, 
reusability, cost of collection, recycling, etc.) that is 
equivalent to non-recycled examples. 
(2) Plastics used for products should be collected after use 
and do not interfere with re-recycling. 
 
Notes: 
1. Forms used as a part of structural components including precast forms, and ornamental 
molds are not to be included in this category. 
2. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been recycled 
in the process of manufacturing the product.). 
 
Concrete 
form Plywood 
form Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Lumber from thinning, obtained from plywood or 
lumber factories, material left over from forestry and 
lumber with a small diameter contain 10% or more 
by volume and also lumber that is used other than 
obtained from plywood lumber factories, material 
left over from forestry and lumber with a small 
diameter is to be in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical 
area of origin.  
(2) For the cases other than (1), used lumbers are to be in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry 
in its country or geographical area of origin. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Lumber that is used as the raw material is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a 
sustainable operation. However, obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories, material left over from 
forestry, lumber with a small diameter will not be 
applied. 
(2) For wood based materials, the utilization ratio of 
recycled resources and lumber from thinning should 
be as high as possible. 
Notes: 
1. Evaluation Criteria (2) for Plywood form is to be applicable only under the 
restrictions of either function or supply. 234 2. Confirm that the contents shown in Note3 are displayed on the surface of the 
plywood form when confirming the legality of lumbers and the sustainability of the 
forest where the lumbers are produced from. 
3. It is necessary to display the following content on the surface of the plywood form. 
Those contents are based on Forest Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Legality 
and Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” In addition, 
certification system of forest, timber, etc. by prefectures etc. can be utilized for 
confirmation of legality. 
a. The words or certificated marks which assure the use of lumbers that are produced 
through appropriate procedure described in Evaluation Criteria (1) or (2) in this 
section. 
b. Number of accreditation or certification, and the name of certification 
organization. 
Those contents are displayed clearly in the area which can easily be found on the 
surface of each plywood form. As for plywood for processed surface plywood form 
which are coated by paint or overlay even in the back side, those contents are clearly 
displayed which can easily be found on the side surface of plywood if it is difficult to 
display on the surface. 
In addition, plywood formwork should endeavor to be reused, even plywood form in 
which the display above a. and b. on the plate surface, the case where the display on 
the plate surface cannot be confirmed because of reusing, etc., it is considered as a 
designated item by the contractor of public works projects submit a document 
showing that using plywood form in which the display on the plate surface to the 
procurement organization. 
In addition, certification system of forest, timber, etc. by prefectures etc. can be 
utilized for confirmation of legality. 
  235 Table 3: Construction Machines 
Item Name Evaluation Criteria, etc. 
Low-emission 
construction 
machines Evaluation Criteria  
Low-emission construction machines in attached Tables 1 and 2, emissions and soot 
from on-board engines do not exceed the ratio of secondary standard or less described 
below. 
 
Attached Table 1: Construction Machines for Tunnel 
Machine Type Application 
Back hoes Diesel engine output :30kW or more less than 560 kW 
(include with a heavy weight breaker) 
Wheel loaders 
Crawler loaders Diesel engine output :30kW or more less than 560 kW 
Dump trucks Diesel engine output:30kW or more less than 560 kW. 
However, exclude the one to have received the delivery of an 
effective motor vehicle inspection certificate. 
Mixer trucks Diesel engine output :30kW or more less than 560 kW. 
However exclude the one to have received the delivery of an 
effective motor vehicle inspection certificate. 
 
Attached Table 2:Construction Machines for General Construction 
Machine Type Application 
Back hoes Diesel engine output :8kW or more less than 560 kW 
Wheel loaders Diesel engine output :8kW or more less than 560 kW 
Bulldozers Diesel engine output :8kW or more less than 560 kW 
 
The Ratio of Secondary Standard 
 Substance (unit) 
 
 
Output classification HC 
(g/kWh) NOx 
(g/kWh) CO 
(g/kWh) PM 
(g/kWh) Soot 
(%)  
  
 8kW or more less than 
19kW 1.5 9 5 0.8 40  
 19kW or more less than 
37kW 1.5 8 5 0.8 40  
 37kW or more less than 
75kW 1.3 7 5 0.4 40  
 75kW or more less than 
130kW 1 6 5 0.3 40  
 130kW or more less than 
560kW 1 6 3.5 0.2 40  236  1. The measuring method is according to Specified Procedure for 
Low-emission Construction Machines (October 8, 1991, No.249, issued 
by The Ministry of Construction, Construction and Economic Bureau, 
Construction Equipment Division) additionally provided. 
2.  The soot standard for tunnel construction machine is 1/5 or less of the above 
standard.  
 
Low-emission construction machines in attached Tables 3 and 4, emissions 
and soot from on-board engines do not exceed the ratio of primary standard or 
less described below  
 
Attached Table 3: Construction Machines for Tunnel 
Machine Type Application 
Drill Jumbo Diesel engine output :30kW or more less than 260 
kW(40.8PS or more less than 353PS) 
Concrete 
spraying 
machine Diesel engine output :30kW or more less than 260 
kW(40.8PS or more less than 353PS) 
 
Attached Table 4: Construction Machines for General Construction 
Machine Type Application 
Power 
generators Diesel engine output :7.5kW or more less than 260 
kW(10.2PS or more less than 353PS), 
transportable(including double as machine of welding) 
Air 
compressors Diesel engine output :7.5kW or more less than 260 
kW(10.2PS or more less than 353PS), transportable 
Hydraulic units Diesel engine output :7.5kW or more less than 260 
kW(10.2PS or more less than 353PS), independent with 
machine for foundation work  
Rollers Diesel engine output :7.5kW or more less than 260 
kW(10.2PS or more less than 353PS), Road rollers, Tyre 
rollers, Vibration rollers 
Wheel Cranes Diesel engine output :7.5kW or more less than 260 
kW(10.2PS or more less than 353PS), rough terrain 
crane 
  237  
The Ratio of Primary Standard 
Substance 
(unit) 
Output classification HC 
(g/kWh) NOx 
(g/kWh) CO 
(g/kWh) Soot  
(%) 
7.5kW or more less than 15kW 2.4 12.4 5.7 50 
15kW or more less than 30kW 1.9 10.4 5.7 50 
30kW or more less than 272kW 1.3 9.2 5 50 
1. The measuring method is according to Specified Procedure for Low-emission 
Construction Machines (October 8, 1991, No.249, issued by The Ministry of 
Construction, Construction and Economic Bureau, Construction Equipment 
Division) additionally provided. 
2. The soot standard for tunnel construction machine is 1/5 or less of the above 
standard. 
Notes: In case of using the construction machine which specified as a target for Act on Regulation, Etc. of 
Emissions from Non-road Special Motor Vehicles (Act No. 51 of May 25, 2005), it is necessary to use the 
machine that meets the technological standard of this law. 
 
 
Low-noise 
construction 
machines Evaluation Criteria  
Emissions and soot from on-board engines do not exceed levels in attached Table. 
 
Attached Table. 
       
 Machine Type Machine Output 
(kW) Noise Standard 
(dB)  
 Bulldozers P < 55 
55  P <103 
103  P 102 
105 
105  
 Back hoes P < 55 
55  P <103 
103  P < 206 
206  P 99 
104 
106 
106  
 Drag lines 
Clamshells P < 55 
55  P <103 
103  P < 206 
206  P 100 
104 
107 
107  
 Front-end loaders P < 55 
55  P <103 
103  P 102 
104 
107  
 Crawler cranes 
Track cranes 
Wheel cranes P < 55 
55  P <103 
103  P < 206 
206  P 100 
103 
107 
107  
 Vibro-hammers  107  238  Hydraulic pile drivers 
Hydraulic steel pipe 
driver/extractors 
Hydraulic pile extractors P < 55 
 
55  P <103 
103  P 98 
 
102 
104  
 Earth augers P < 55 
55  P <103 
103  P 100 
104 
107  
 All-casing excavators P < 55 
55  P <103 
103  P < 206 
206  P 100 
104 
105 
107  
 Earth drills P < 55 
55  P <103 
103  P 100 
104 
107  
 Concrete breakers  106  
 Load rollers 
Tire rollers 
Vibration rollers P < 55 
55  P 101 
104  
 Concrete pumps (vehicle) P < 55 
55  P <103 
103  P 100 
103 
107  
 Concrete conditioners P < 55 
55  P <103 
103  P < 206 
206  P 99 
103 
106 
107  
 Asphalt finishers P < 55 
55  P <103 
103  P 101 
105 
107  
 Concrete cutters  106  
 Air compressors P < 55 
55  P 101 
105  
 Power generators P < 55 
55  P 98 
102  
       
 
 239 Table 4: Construction Methods 
Item Type Item Name Evaluation Criteria, etc. 
Effective 
usage of soil 
resulting 
from 
construction Effective 
usage of low 
quality soil Evaluation Criteria 
The method decreases the amount of soil resulting from 
construction to be transported off site by using clayey low 
quality soil resulting from construction at the same 
construction site. 
Recycling 
treatment of 
construction 
sludge Recycling 
treatment of 
construction 
sludge Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Method for reusing construction sludge obtained from a 
construction sites within the same site by recycling the 
sludge into banking material and treated fluid soil.  
(2) Liquation of hazardous material such as heavy metal, etc., 
complies with measures against soil contamination (Law 
No. 53, 2002) and the environmental standards for soil 
contamination (Ministry of Environment Notification 
No.46, 1991). 
Recycling 
treatment of 
concrete 
masses Recycling 
treatment of 
concrete 
masses Evaluation Criteria 
Method for reusing concrete masses obtained from a 
construction site within the same site by recycling the concrete 
masses into concrete or aggregate. 
 
Pavement 
(surface) Road surface 
recycling 
method Evaluation Criteria 
Method for replacing the road surface on site or the vicinity of a 
site concerned by pulverizing the existing asphalt pavement, 
adding new asphalt compound or additives as needed, and 
mixing and compacting. 
Pavement 
(roadbed) Roadbed 
recycling 
method Evaluation Criteria 
Method for replacing the road surface on site by pulverizing and 
mixing the existing roadbed and asphalt or concrete pavement, 
and stabilizing the resulting material. 
Notes: To be used on roads with the thickness of the layer of an asphalt mixture of 10cm or 
less. 
 
Slope surface 
greening 
method Slope surface 
greening 
method using 
thinning 
wood or soil 
obtained 
from 
construction 
process Evaluation Criteria 
Method for effectively using thinning wood or soil obtained 
from construction process at a construction site within the same 
site. However, the amount used which added together felling 
material and the construction generating ground should occupy 
70% or more by the capacity ratio of the growth base material 
except the water added there. 
Sheathing 
method Soil cement 
pillar line 
wall method 
of reducing Evaluation Criteria 
The construction method to which the mud that generates the 
mud partially of the cement system solidification medicine by 
reducing the injection rate of recycling or the cement system 240 mad solidification medicine along with construction can be 
decreased. 
Notes: Soil cement pillar line wall method of mud reducing in the evaluation criteria of this 
section is to be used for temporary construction. 
 
Table 5: Other 
Item Type Item Name Evaluation Criteria, etc. 
High 
performance 
paving 
material Porous 
pavement Evaluation Criteria 
Paving material that is capable of allowing rain water to 
permeate through the road surface to be discarded to drain pipes, 
and reducing traffic noise. 
Notes: To be used when reduction of traffic noise is needed. 
 
High 
performance 
paving 
material Permeable 
pavement Evaluation Criteria 
Paving material that is capable of allowing rain water to permeate 
through the road surface. 
Notes: To be used on roads without automobile traffic, such as pedestrian paths that require 
rainwater to permeate through the surface. 
 
Greening of 
rooftops Greening of 
rooftops Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Healthy growth of plants as well a bed for growth of plants. 
(2) Contributes to improvement of the improvements by 
alleviating heat island phenomenon, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Uses plants suited for rooftops. 
(2) Structure takes into consideration the use of rain water for 
sprinklers, as well as the securing of water and drainage for the 
plant beds. 
Notes: To be placed on the roof of buildings, etc. 
  241 22. Services 
22-1. Energy Conservation Diagnosis 
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Energy 
conservation 
diagnosis Evaluation Criteria 
Persons with a technical qualification listed in Table 1, or persons 
acknowledged to have skills equivalent to such qualification, 
investigate and analyze the running status, operational manner and 
the amount of the energy use of equipment such as public office 
buildings. Additionally, based on the results of those investigation 
and analysis, proposal to improve energy conservation, are made, 
such as introducing new equipment or facilities, refurbishment,  
operational improvement and energy management system or 
management method, including those listed in Table 2 
Note: 
Proposals for setting various goals necessary for implementing energy management at the 
government building concerned are included in the energy management method. 
 
Table 1 
First class registered architects 
First class registered construction execution managing engineers 
First class registered electrical engineering execution managing engineers 
First class registered piping works execution managing engineers 
Engineers (construction, electrical/computer, mechanical, sanitation, environmental) 
Energy management professionals 
Building engineers 
Electrical chief engineer 
 
Table 2 
History of energy consumption, actual lighting, heating, cooling, and water use costs, 
and state of facility maintenance and operation over the past 3 years. 
Performances or estimates of energy consumption by the facility and equipment, with 
the basis for the estimates. 
Estimates of the amount of energy conservation by the installation of new facilities and 
equipment, and refurbishment, with the basis of estimates. 
Estimates of the amount of energy conservation by the operational improvement items, 
with the basis of estimates. 
Estimated funds necessary for introduction of new equipment with the basis for the 
estimates. 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Number of energy conservation diagnosis contracts to be procured for the fiscal year.  
Notes: facilities which are eligible to undergo this diagnosis shall be concretely defined each 
fiscal year. 
  242 22-2. Printing 
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Printing  Evaluation Criteria 
<Common Criteria> 
(1) Paper that conforms to the evaluation criteria for printing paper 
(refer to Paper section). Cover page of bounded material will 
be excluded and if virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the 
pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of 
origin. This does not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with 
lumber from thinning, or virgin pulp manufactured by using 
recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood or lumber 
factories, material left over from forestry, or lumber with a 
small diameter. 
(2) Material that will interfere with the recycle for paper indicated 
in Table 1 Rank B, C and D are not used. When they must be 
used for the usage and purpose of the printed material, it is 
necessary to note the part in which the material is used as well 
as method of discarding or recycling. 
(3) Recyclability is indicated on the printed material. 
(4) At the each stage of work the printing, the measures for the 
environmental consideration shown in Table 2 shall be taken. 
 
<Individual Criteria> 
(1) Offset Printing 
a. Inks contain biomass and inks whose aromatic compounds 
are less than 1% are used. 
b. Chemical safety of inks is confirmed. 
 
 Digital Printing 
a. As for xerographic (Limited to dry toner method.), the 
toner is used that meets the evaluation criteria lies chemical 
safety of the toner cartridge (Refer to “Toner cartridge”). 
b. As for xerographic (Limited to wet toner method.) and as 
for inkjet method, chemical safety of toner and inks is 
confirmed. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Considering the usage and the purpose of printed matter, it is 
lightened as much as possible. 
(2) Waste products are to be minimized through the promotion of 
digitization (employment of DTP, CTP, and DDCP methods, 
etc.). 
(3) Control of volatile organic material (VOC) is taken into 
consideration. 
(4) Materials and parts such as used ink can, containers of inks or 
toners, and ink photosensitive drums use again or will be 
recycled. 243 (5) Use of the material that may produce harmful material for  
surface processing of cover page, etc. of printed matter, should 
be limited as much as possible. 
(6) If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used is 
to be in compliance with the regulations concerning forestry in 
its country or geographical area of origin. This does not apply 
to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or 
virgin pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces 
obtained from plywood or lumber factories, material left over 
from forestry, or lumber with a small diameter. 
(7) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environmental 
impact upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Printing under consideration in the evaluation criteria in this section denotes the 
printing service for production of report documents, posters, flyers and pamphlets, it 
doesn't apply when procuring it as other category items such as stationary.  However, if 
it is purchased as other category items, effort must be made to purchase which meet the 
evaluation criteria of printing section. 
2. Offset printing is the printing method of shifting the printing inks to printing plate and 
re-shifting the inks to papers etc. 
3. Digital printing is the printing method of without printing plate by electrophotography 
method or inkjet method. 
4. Recyclability noted in Evaluation Criteria <Common Criteria> (2) and (3) should be 
listed in accordance with “Guidelines for Producing Recyclable Printed Matter” 
created by Paper Recycling Promotion Center and operated by Japan Federation of 
Printing Industries. However, it does not apply if recyclability ranking test for used 
paper is not provided in the material used. 
5. Recyclability in Evaluation Criteria <Common Criteria> (3) should be indicated as 
follows. However, it does not apply to the printed matter not to assume to recycle, for 
instance, in the case of preserves or keeps it for a long term. Recyclability Ranking 
Test for used paper and method of display should take into account the investigation 
results of “Guidelines for Producing Recyclable Printed Matter” and make alterations 
as needed.  
a. When only material from rank A is used, May be recycled into printing paper 
must be indicated. 
b. When only material from rank A or B is used (with the exception of (1)), May be 
recycled into cardboard must be indicated. 
c. When material from ranks C or D is used, Unsuitable materials to recycling are 
used. 
In addition, calendars bound and processed, if the binding part and the body paper 
can be separated, the recycling suitability should be displayed for each sheet of the 
body paper. 
6. Each procurement organization must confirm material used with the Material 
Confirmation Sheet shown in Table 3. It is considered that it might be preferable to do 
the luster lamination etc. for long-term use and the strength reinforcement etc. of 
printed matter. Select materials suitable for use appropriately. 244 7. Inks contain biomass  refers to the proportion of biomass (the proportion of the content 
of renewable organic raw materials (including plant-derived oils and excluding fossil 
resources)) and the proportion of petroleum-based solvents (to the ink). The ratio of the 
content of the solvent contained in petroleum (fossil fuel) as a raw material) satisfies 
the requirements specified in the following table for each type of ink. UV inks contain 
less than 3% of VOC components (volatile organic compounds classified as "highly 
volatile organic compounds" and "volatile organic compounds" in the classification of 
chemical substances of the World Health Organization) and are recyclable. Judgment 
criteria <Individual matters> Pair criteria shall be deemed to be the type UV ink. 
 
Ink types Ratio of biomass 
content Ratio of the 
solvent contained 
in petroleum 
Sheet-fed printing ink 30% or more 30% or less 
Offset printing ink for rotary 
press 20% or more 45% or less 
Gold inkiSheet-fed ink / offsset 
printing ink for rotaryj 10% or more 25% or less 
Journal inkiNon heat offset ink 
for rotaryj 30% or more 30% or less 
Notes: 
1. Ink includes OP varnish and medium. 
2. For oil-based business foam inks, apply the sheet-fed ink standard. 
 
8. Aromatic compounds denote aromatic hydrocarbon compounds detected when 
applying component testing method of petroleum products determined by JIS K2536. 
9. Green Standards for Off-set Printing and Green Printing Qualification System by 
Japan Federation of Printing Industries should be referenced for Evaluation Criteria 
<Common Criteria> (4), Factors for Consideration (2) ,(3), (4) and (5). 
10. Each procurement organization must confirm the execution of standard of print at each 
stage of work, referring check list described as Table 4, if necessary. 
11. Chemical safety of Evaluation Criteria <Individual Criteria> (1) b. denotes that fulfill 
the following a. and c. Chemical safety of Evaluation Criteria < Individual Criteria> 
(2) b. denotes that fulfill the following a. or b. and c. 
a. Comply with the Japan Printing Ink Maker’s Association’s 
Self-imposed Controls on Printing Ink (Negative List Control) 
(revision on September, 2011). 
b.The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the 
standard rate provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the 
specific chemical substances for electrical and electronic equipment) 
Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical substances, chemical 
element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and standard 
content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the standard is 
allowed are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the 
above JIS. 
c. Identifying the target substances of Act on Confirmation, etc. of 
Release Amounts of Specific Chemical Substances in the Environment 245 and Promotion of Improvements to the Management Thereof (Act No. 
86 of 1999) (It is necessary to have SDS (Safety Data Sheet).). 
12. Each procurement organization must try to estimate the necessary number or amount of 
printed matter properly so as not to become an excessive order.  
13. Each procurement organization shall make digital calibration without using actual 
machine calibration equipment when proofreading printed matter so as to control VOC 
emissions as much as possible. 
14. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability of the forest where paper originates 
from is to be conducted in accordance with the Forest Agency’s “Guideline for 
Verification on Legality and Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (February 15, 
2006).” In addition, certification system of forest, timber, etc. by prefectures etc. can 
be utilized for confirmation of legality. 246 Table 1: Recyclability Ranking Test for Used Paper 
 Rank A Rank B Rank C Rank D 
Will not interfere 
when recycling 
into paper or 
cardboard Will interfere 
when recycling 
into paper, but 
will not interfere 
when recycling 
into cardboard Will interfere 
when recycling 
into paper or 
cardboard Cannot be 
recycled into 
paper or 
cardboard as 
even small 
amounts cannot 
be removed 
(1)Paper Regular paper 
Construction 
paper, coated 
paper, high 
quality paper, 
medium quality 
paper, straw 
paper    
Processed 
paper 
Colored paper 
(Rank A), fancy 
paper (Rank A) 
Resin permeated 
paper (water 
soluble) Processed 
paper 
Colored paper 
(Rank B), fancy 
paper (Rank B), 
paper coated 
with resin such 
as polyethylene, 
etc., paper 
laminated with 
resin such as 
polyethylene, 
glassine paper, 
India paper Processed 
paper 
Colored paper 
(Rank C), fancy 
paper (Rank C) 
resin permeated 
paper (excluding 
water soluble 
types), sulfate 
(parchment) 
paper, tarpaulin 
paper, wax 
paper, 
cellophane, 
synthesized 
paper, carbon 
paper, 
carbon-less 
paper, thermal 
paper, solderless 
paper Processed 
paper 
Sublimation 
transfer paper, 
thermal foam 
paper, aromatic 
paper 
(2) Inks Regular inks 
Relief printing 
inks, flat printing 
inks (offset 
printing inks), 
gravure ink 
solvent, 
flexo-ink 
solvent, screen 
inks Regular inks 
Water based 
gravure ink, 
water based 
flexo-ink   247 Specialty inks 
Recycle-ready 
UV ink, Silver 
and gold ink for 
offset printing, 
pearl ink, OCR 
ink (oil-based) Specialty inks 
UV ink, silver 
and gold ink for 
gravure printing, 
OCR UV ink, 
EB ink, 
fluorescent ink Specialty inks 
Thermal ink, low 
sensitivity ink, 
magnetic ink Specialty inks 
Sublimating ink, 
foam ink, 
aromatic ink 
Specialty 
processing 
OP varnish    
 Digital Printing 
Inks 
Recycle- 
ready Dry Toner 
 Digital Printing 
Inks 
 Dry Toner   
(3) 
Processing 
material Binding 
Processing 
Binding wire, 
stapler, etc.; fine 
retardant EVA 
hot melt; PUR 
hot melt; 
water based glue Binding 
Processing 
Binding thread, 
EVA hot melt Binding 
Processing 
Cross 
coating(cloth 
cross, paper 
cross)  
Surface 
processing 
Glossy coat 
(varnished, press 
coating) Surface 
processing 
Glossy 
laminating (PP 
coating); UV 
coating; UV 
laminating; foil 
coating   
Other 
processing 
Recycle-ready 
seals (all 
dissolve 
adhesive paper) 
 Other 
processing 
Seals (with the 
exception of 
recycle-ready 
types) Other 
processing 
Three 
dimensional 
printed material 
(lenticular lens 
used)  
(4) Others  Foreign 
substance 
Adhesive tape 
(recycle-ready 
type) Foreign 
substance 
Stone, glass, 
metal (excluding 
binding stapler, 
metal, etc.), 
sand, wood 
chips, plastic, 
cloth, building Foreign 
substance 
Fragrant 
accessories 
(deodorant, 
perfume, 
lipstick, etc.) 248 material 
(gypsum board, 
etc.), non-woven 
cloth, adhesive 
tape (excluding 
recycle-ready 
types) 
Notes: 
1. Each organization must confirm publishing in data base of “Producing Recyclable 
Printed Matter” operated by Japan Federation of Printing Industries, to use materials 
marked “” (Fine retardant EVA hot melt; PUR hot melt Recycle-ready UV ink, 
Recycle-ready seals, Recycle-ready Dry Toner). 
2. Each organization must confirm the recycling aptitude of each product about 
materials marked “*” (colored paper and fancy paper), published by “The Ministry of 
the Environment Law on Promoting Green Purchasing. net.” 
 
 249 Table 2: Environmental Consideration Item and Criteria Relating Offset and Digital 
Printing at Each Process 
Process Item Criteria 
Proofing 
process Digitization The process digitization ratio (adoption of DTP) is 
50% or more. 
Silver recovery from 
waste liquid and 
plate-making film In the process to use plate-making film, silver is 
recovered from waste liquid and plate-making film. 
Plate 
process Reuse or recycling of 
printing plates Printing plates (of aluminum base material) are reuse 
or recycled. 
Printing 
process Offset VOC 
emission 
suppressing 
 Take one of the following measures. 
E Waterless printing system is introduced. 
E Damping water circulation system is introduced. 
E To introduce environmentally friendly 
dampening water that contributes to measures for 
VOC. 
E Automatic cloth washing is introduced or in case 
of automatic liquid washing, circulation system is 
introduced. 
E To introduce environmentally friendly detergents 
contribute to measures for VOC. 
E VOC emission suppressing measures such as 
placing covers to discarded waste-cloths 
containers and detergent containers are taken. 
In the case of hot air drying printing in rotary 
presswork, VOC emission treatment equipment is 
installed and properly operated and managed. 
Recycling for 
papermaking 
stock The recycle ratio of spoilage, etc. (waste sheet and 
remain sheet generated from the presswork) to 
papermaking stock shall be 80% or more. 
Digital Decrease of 
negative 
environmental 
impact of the 
printing 
machine The activity of conservation of energy is taken such as 
use of power-saving feature and power off when 
unused. 
Recycling for 
papermaking 
stock The recycle ratio of spoilage, etc. (waste sheet and 
remain sheet generated from printing process) to 
papermaking stock shall be 80% or more. 
Surface 
treatment VOC emission 
suppressing Alcohols are used at the concentration less than 30%. 
Recycling for 
papermaking stock The recycle ratio of spoilage, etc. (waste sheet, remain 
sheet and remain film generated from gloss coating 
process) to papermaking stock shall be 80% or more. 
Binding 
treatment Suppress noise and 
vibrations Approaches are made to suppress noise and vibrations 
such as prohibiting windows and doors from being 
kept open, etc. 250 Recycling for 
papermaking stock The recycle ratio of spoilage, etc. (waste sheet 
generated from binding treatment process) to 
papermaking stock shall be 70% or more. 
Notes: 
1. This criteria is assumed the one applied to the other party does the main process of the 
print service regardless of the main contractor or the subcontract of the print service, and 
not applied to the other party who does a part of process of the print service that relates 
to the offset printing or digital printing. 
2. In proofing process, it only has to fill either of Digitalization or Silver recovery from 
the waste liquid and the make-up film. 
3. Silver recovery in proofing process indicates having a silver collection system or hand it 
over to the recycling trader and the waste collection trader who has adopted the silver 
collection system. It is necessary to execute the silver recovery from the waste liquid 
and the plate-making film, exclude an impossible case technically. 
4. It is necessary to execute the printing plates reuse or recycling (recycling is included 
which the printing plates while keeping the quality and the reproducing to the printing 
plates again.) in plate process, exclude an impossible case technically. 
5. Environmentally friendly dampening water and environmentally friendly detergents in 
offset generation of VOC in the offset printing process were certified in the Green 
Printing Equipment Certification System operated by the Japan Printing Industry 
Association. For the etchant (dampening water) and detergent can refer to the certified 
product. 
6. It is considered as meeting the evaluation criteria if making and operating the .manual 
etc., to execute measures concerned about VOC emission in offset printing process, 
installation of VOC processing equipment for covering waste clogs container and 
washing agent container, etc. , appropriate operation management for rotary printing 
process decrease of negative environmental impact of the printing machine in digital 
printing process and suppress noise and vibrations in binding treatment process. 
7. Recycling to the papermaking stock etc. in digital printing process and surface 
treatment process includes recycling (processing to RPF and energy recovery etc.) other 
than recycling for papermaking stock etc.  
 251 Table 3: Material Confirmation Sheet (sample) 
Date: 
To: 
XYZ Company 
Subject: 
Material Confirmation Sheet 
Printing material Used  Recyclability 
ranking Category Manufacturer, 
product name Note 
Paper Text  X A High quality 
paper xx paper 
manufacturing  
Front 
cover  X A Construction 
paper xx paper 
manufacturing  
Back 
cover X A High quality 
paper xx paper 
manufacturing  
Covering 
material      
      
      
Ink X A Flat printing 
ink xx ink 
company  
     
     
     
Processing Binding 
processing 
 X A PUR Hot 
melt    
Surface 
processing X A OP varnish xx chemicals  
Other 
processing      
Others      
     
     
     
« 
Recycling procedures Evaluation 
Only material from rank A 
is used May be recycled into 
printing paper X 
Only material from ranks A 
and B are used May be recycled into 
cardboard  
Material from ranks C or D 
are used Unsuitable materials to 
recycling are used  
 
Notes:  252 1. Refer to latest “Guidelines for Producing Recyclable Printed Matter, published in 
Producing Recyclable Printed Matter,” when filled in Material Confirmation Sheet 
about the printing material.  
2. In case of using materials such as paper and ink that recyclability ranking test for used 
paper is not provided, fill out "Outside the rank" in the column of recyclability ranking.  
3. This sheet form can be changed according to the necessity for the inquiry of content and 
the necessity for stamps, etc. 
 
 253 Table 4 : Environmental Consideration Checklist for Offset Printing Process (sample) 
Date: 
To: 
XYZ Company 
Environmental Consideration Checklist for Offset Printing Process 
Process Achievement Standard (Content of demand) 
Proofing 
process  Yes^No (1) Meet the one of the following. 
A: The process digitization ratio (adoption of 
DTP) is 50% or more. 
B: In the process to use plate-making film, 
silver is recovered from waste liquid and 
plate-making film. 
Plate 
process Yes^No (2) Printing plates (of aluminum base material) 
are reuse or recycled. 
Printing 
process Offset Yes^No 
  VOC emission suppressing measures such 
as introducing a waterless printing system, 
introducing a dampening water circulation 
system, introducing environmentally friendly 
dampening water, introducing automatic cloth 
cleaning, in case of automatic liquid cleaning, 
circulation system has introduced, introducing 
environmentally friendly cleaning agents, 
placing covers to discarded waste-cloths 
containers and detergent containers are taken. 
Yes^No (4) In the case of hot air drying printing in rotary 
presswork, VOC emission treatment 
equipment is installed and properly operated 
and managed. 
Yes^No (5) The recycling ratio of spoilage (waste sheet 
and remain sheet generated from the 
presswork) to papermaking stock shall be 80% 
or more. 
Digital Yes^No (6) The activity of conservation of energy is taken 
such as use of power-saving feature and 
power-off when unused.  
Yes^No (7) The recycle ratio of spoilage, etc. (waste sheet 
and remain sheet generated from printing 
process) to papermaking stock shall be 80% or 
more. 
Surface 
processing Yes^No (8) Alcohols are used at the concentration less 
than 30%. 
Yes^No (9) As an approach for promoting recycling, the 
recycle ratio of waste sheets, etc. (waste sheet, 
remain sheet and remain film generated from 
gloss coating process) to recycled paper, etc. is 
80% or more. 
Binding 
processing Yes^No (10) Approaches are made to suppress noise and 
vibrations such as prohibiting windows and 254  doors from being kept open, etc. 
Yes^No (11) The recycle ratio of spoilage, etc. (waste 
sheet generated from binding treatment 
process) to papermaking stock shall be 70% or 
more. 
 
Notes: This sheet form can be changed according to the necessity for the inquiry of content and 
the necessity for stamps, etc. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of printing jobs that meet the criteria to the number of printing jobs to be 
procured (including those that are ordered as a part of other services such as commissions to 
outside groups) in the fiscal year. 
  255 22-3. Cafeteria 
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Cafeteria  Evaluation Criteria 
Cafeteria operating under commission in a government building or its 
grounds fulfills the criteria below: 
(1) Cafeteria practices appropriate measures for recycle and reuse including 
the reduction in type and volume of garbage. 
(2) Dishes used are capable of repeated use. 
(3) Do not use single-use plastic containers, etc. in providing food and 
drink in the cafeteria. However, this item shall not apply in cases where 
it disrupts the eating and drinking of the user, and when there is no 
alternative means. 
(4) To grasp the amount of food waste emission, formulate plans and setting 
of goals for suppressing occurrence and recycling. 
(5) When the category of industry falls under in which the target value of 
suppression of food waste, etc. is set, the amount generated per unit 
food waste, etc., shall be less than its target value. 
(6) Ministerial Ordinance that specifies matters that should be standards for 
food-related business operators to promote recycling and recycling of 
food circulation resources (Ministry of Finance, Ministry of Health,  
Labor and Welfare, Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries, 
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, Ministry of Land, 
Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism, Ministry of the Environment 
Ordinance No.4, hereinafter referred to as Ministerial ordinance of 
Judgment Standards) or formulate plans to achieve the target value for 
the target year. 
(7) To make it possible to adjust the amount of food and drink to be 
provided or to reduce food loss such as leftover foods by providing a 
takeaway container when asked by consumers. 
(8) In order to reduce leftovers of food and drink, calls and enlightenment, 
etc. to the user are carried out by using postings in the cafeteria. 
(9) To grasp the amount of energy used (electricity, gas, etc.) and water 
usage amount accompanying the operation of the cafeteria, and to take 
measures for energy conservation and water conservation. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Garbage that has been treated in a disposal, etc. shall be used as 
fertilizer, livestock feed, or converted into energy. 
(2) Biodegradable bags and draining nets, if used, are composted with 
garbage. 
(3) Ingredients used in cafeteria are the one contributing to the promotion 
of utilization of the agriculture, forestry and fishery products in the 
region.  
(4) Sustainable raw materials are used if plant oils and fats are used as raw 
materials of processed foods and chemical products used in the 
cafeteria. 
(5) Dishes shall be used that can be used again by mending, or for which 
the reworked material are used. 256 (6) Return and collect of the containers and packaging are executed to 
re-use. 
(7) Take measures for reduction of environmental impact associated with 
transportation of foodstuffs, etc. 
Notes: 
1. Evaluation criteria listed here is to be applied when ordering food and drinks to be used 
for conferences, etc., from cafeterias, coffee shops, etc. that is operating under a 
commission agreement in the government buildings and their sites. 
2. Recycling, etc. of the evaluation criteria (4) and (6) refer to recycling etc. based on the 
Law Concerning the Promotion of Recycling Food Cyclical Resources (Act No. 116 of 
2000, hereinafter referred to as the Food Recycling Law). 
3. Suppression of the occurrence of food waste etc. of the evaluation criteria (4) and (5) 
refer to suppression of the occurrence of food waste etc. based on the Ministerial 
Ordinance of Judgment Standards). 
4. With regard to evaluation criteria (5), in cases where it does not fall under the food 
waste generation large volume generation business operator under the Food Recycling 
Law, the amount of food waste generated per unit is below the target value or achieves 
the target value, regarded as conforming by formulating a voluntary plan to do. 
5. With regard to evaluation criteria (7), when the cafeteria is asked to take out foods from 
the customer, provide container after adequately explaining hygiene precautions, such 
as food poisoning risks and handling methods. In addition, if the high risk of food 
poisoning etc., adjust amount of food not to customer’s request and make efforts to 
avoid as much residue as possible, if items such as raw or half-raw foods or when the 
outside temperature is high in midsummer. 
6.  For evaluation criteria (9), it is applied when it is possible to grasp the energy usage 
amount and water usage amount accompanying the cafeteria operation. 
7. Utilization the of the agriculture, forestry and fishery products in the region in 
Factors for consideration (3) refers to consume agriculture, forestry and fishery 
products produced in domestic region and to consume agriculture, forestry and fishery 
products produced in other region when the supply of those are insufficient. It is based 
on the outline of Article 25 of Law concerning creation of new business such as 
agriculture and forestry fishermen utilizing regional resource and promotion of 
utilization of agriculture, forestry and fishery products in the region (Law No.67, 
2010). 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
The number of cafeteria meeting the criteria in the fiscal year. 
  257 22-4. Recapped Automobile Tires 
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Recapped 
automobile 
tires  Evaluation Criteria 
Fulfills one of the following: 
(1) Automobile tire that has ended its first life due to wear is restored by 
replacing the surface rubber material so that it may be used for a 
second life. 
(2) Tire that can be cutting tread again (Regroovable) without recapped. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Extended life of the item should be accounted for by the use of radial 
tires, etc.  
(2) Noise reduction during operation is taken into account. 
(3) (3)Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Recapped automobile tires under consideration in the evaluation criteria in this section 
refers to “tires for small trucks” and “tires for trucks and busses,” as well as “tires for 
industrial automobiles” and “tires for construction automobiles,” 
2. Recapped automobile tires that meet the standard of JIS K 6329 (Retreaded tires) fills 
Evaluation Criteria (1). 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
The number of recapped automobile tires to be purchased in the fiscal year (including those 
that are purchased as a part of automobile maintenance). 
  258 22-5. Automobile Maintenance 
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Automobile 
maintenance  Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Automobile recycled parts (refers to reuse parts (commercial 
automobile parts removed from a car that can no longer be used for its 
original purpose, certified for quality, and cleaned), or rebuilt parts 
(commercial automobile parts removed from a car that can no longer be 
used for its original purpose, worn or degenerated parts replaced and 
rebuilt, certified for quality, and cleaned)) are used. 
(2) When cleaning the engine, the following are fulfilled: 
a. The cleaning process decreases material that causes environmental 
pollution (hydrocarbon and carbon monoxide) by 20% or more. 
Cleaning of the engine should be performed on automobiles whose 
hydrocarbon and carbon monoxide levels as determined by 
measuring instruments of respective material after performing the 
typical maintenance required for the prevention of environmental 
emission prevention exceed those listed category-wise in Table. 
b. Effect of the evaluation criteria is assessed immediately after the 
engine is cleaned, as well as at the designated twelve month 
inspection. A system is set up so that a service that is free of charge 
is available when the cleaning process does not decrease 
aforementioned material by 20% or more when engine is cleaned 
on automobiles on which the necessary maintenance has been 
adequately performed. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Measures are in place for the collection and compilation of information 
concerning the reduction of environmental load through engine 
cleaning. Detailed information concerning effects on the reduction of 
environmental through engine cleaning and its cost are actively 
provided. Relevant information is open to public. 
(2) Effort is made for recycling of long life coolant. 
(3) Concerning automobile maintenance, efforts are made for the adequate 
use of resources including energy and solvent; consideration is made 
for the reduction of environmental load. 
(4) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Evaluation criteria (1) in this section refers to procedures referred to automobile 
maintenance businesses that involves replacement of parts (excluding replacement of 
expendable parts), including regular inspection, and automobile maintenance required 
as a result of a breakdown or an accident. 
2. Automobile under consideration refers to passenger cars, small-size cars, and mini-size 
cars (but does not include motorcycles). 
3. When automobile parts are not available or difficult to obtain, maintenance using new 
parts will be considered in this section.  259 4. Engine cleaning in Evaluation Criteria (2) refers to a service commissioned to 
automobile maintenance company, etc. for a regular inspection and maintenance, etc. 
that includes assessment using instruments for measuring hydrocarbon and carbon 
monoxide levels. In cases where levels exceed the criteria listed in Table, engine 
combustion room will be cleaned in order to remove carbon, sludge, etc. that have 
accumulated inside. 
5. Evaluation Criteria (2) applies to regular automobiles, small-sized automobiles, and 
light automobiles (excluding those with two cycle engines) that use gasoline as its fuel. 
6. Criteria for gas emission that requires engine cleaning noted in Evaluation Criteria (2) 
must comply with allowable limit of automobile gas emission based on environmental 
pollution prevention guideline (Ministry of the Environment Notification No.1, January 
21, 1974). 
7. A system is in place to accommodate requests for above tasks from automobile 
maintenance businesses and automobile dealers that do not perform engine cleaning. 
 
 
Table: Criteria for Gas Emission that Requires Engine Cleaning 
Type of Automobile Carbon Monoxide (CO) Hydrocarbon (HC) 
Regular Automobiles, 
Small-Sized Automobiles 1% 300ppm 
Light Automobiles  2% 500ppm 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of automobile maintenances that meet the criteria to the number of 
Automobile Maintenances conducted in the fiscal year. 
  260 22-6. Management of Government Office Buildings, etc. 
 Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Management of 
government 
office buildings 
 Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Products used for management of government office buildings, when 
applicable to the designated procurement items, fulfill the evaluation 
criteria of each items. 
(2) To rationalize energy use based on management standards concerning 
facilities, measurement and recording, maintenance and inspection of 
facilities related to from the following a to d. 
a. Air conditioning equipment, ventilation equipment 
b. Boiler equipment, hot water equipment 
c. Lighting equipment, elevator, power plant 
d. Receiving and transforming equipment 
(3) Specify plans for energy conservation at the facility, select energy 
conservation measures to be implemented, and report the 
implementation status and countermeasure effect to the facility 
manager on a monthly basis based on the implementation standard 
etc., of the measures. Also, based on the implementation results of the 
countermeasures, review necessary energy saving measures. 
(4) In stationed management, monthly reports are provided to the facility 
manager on the usage of energy and water, and amount of waste 
material discharged. When a substantial increase is observed when 
compared to the previous month or the same month of the previous 
year, the measures listed below are proposed to the facility manager. 
When a substantial decrease is observed, the cause of the decrease is 
examined. 
a. In the case of increase in energy usage, analyze the cause of the 
increase, and put in place appropriate energy saving measures that 
takes into account the analysis (includes energy saving measures 
that are conducted in cooperation with facility users). 
b. In the case of increase in water usage, analyze the cause of the 
increase, and put in place appropriate energy saving measures that 
take into account the analysis (includes water saving measures that 
are conducted in cooperation with facility users). 
c. In the case of increase in discharge of waste material, analyze the 
cause of the increase and put into place appropriate measures for 
decreasing waste material and for material saving (includes 
measures for decreasing waste material and for material saving that 
are conducted in cooperation with facility users). 
(5) In non-stationed management, when substantial increase in energy 
consumption, water consumption and amount of discharge in waste 
material are observed compared to the previous month or the same 
month of the previous year, analysis of its cause is performed and 
measures to decrease are proposed in cooperation with the facility 
manager. When a substantial decrease is observed, the cause of the 
decrease is examined.  
(6) For a building that conducted energy conservation diagnosis, measures 
to improve the operation of facilities and equipment etc., are being 261 taken based on the results. 
(7) For facilities installing energy management system, measures are 
taken to visualize energy consumption and measures to improve 
energy consumption efficiency based on the analysis result of the data. 
(8) When the maintenance of air conditioning and heating installation are 
included in the management of government office buildings, 
appropriate measures for prevention of chlorofluorocarbon leakage of 
chlorofluorocarbon are made. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Being considerate to building environmental health management 
standards etc. based on Act on Maintenance of Sanitation in Buildings 
(Act No. 20 of 1970). 
(2)  An appropriate and effective methods for energy efficiency in 
government buildings and measures to contribute to leveling of 
demand for electricity are to be conducted in consideration of 
“Guidelines for Companies in Relation to the measures to contribute to 
leveling of demand for electricity in Factories” (No.271 of the Ministry 
of Economy, Trade and Industry notification in 2013), based on the 
Regulations for the Efficient Use of Energy (Act No.49 of 1979), in 
consideration of Criteria for Sanitation Management of Architectural 
Environment, etc. based on Architectural Sanitation Law. 
(3) To reduce greenhouse gas emissions, 
based on analyzing and evaluating of energy use, etc. in detail, 
appropriately managing and operating facilities, equipment, etc. and 
systems. 
(4) Efforts should be made to utilize various tools for management and 
evaluation in the analysis and evaluation of energy management and 
use in facilities. 
(5) Personnel with expertise are placed involved in energy conservation, 
resource saving, waste emission control, etc. necessary for government 
building management, and continuous implementation of education 
and training, etc. to train engineers will be conducted. 
(6) When considerable increase compared to the previous month is 
identified upon tallying the collected garbage, the causes are to be 
identified and measures are to be proposed. 
Notes: 
1. Stationed management refers to a system of management where personnel that 
performs the operation, surveillance, and daily inspection and maintenance, etc. is 
stationed on site. 
2. Evaluation Criteria (2) to (5) for Government Building Management should be applied 
to the case where the scope of the business subject to the contract includes the contents 
related to the criteria. 
3. The management standards on evaluation criteria (2) concerning government building 
management are based on Act on the Rational Use of Energy. (Law No. 49 of 1947) 
shown in Attachment 1, with reference of “The standard of judgement for a business 
operator concerning the rational use of energy in factories, etc. (Notification No. 66 of 262 the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry)", and shall decide upon consultation with 
the facility manager as necessary. 
4. The plan concerning energy conservation at the facility in accordance with Evaluation 
Criteria (3) for Government Building Management shall be included targets for energy 
conservation, energy saving measures to be implemented and promotion system, etc. 
with an understanding of the management status of the facility, size of buildings, usage 
of facilities and machines in the building, in consultation with the facility manager. In 
addition, energy saving measures to be implemented (including the implementation 
standards concerning the measures) shall be selected with reference to Appendix Table 
2. 
5. Building users refers to people who work in or visit the building. 
6. Evaluation Criteria (2), (3) and (4) for Government Building Management shall not 
include renovation of the facility, or the renewal or introduction of large scaled facilities 
and equipment. 
7.  Energy Conservation Diagnosis noted in Evaluation Criteria (6) referred to “22-1 
Energy Conservation Diagnosis” section in this Basic Policy. 
8. Energy Management system noted in Evaluation Criteria (7) referred to “19 Facilities” 
section Energy Management System noted in this Basic Policy. 
9. Fluorocarbons are defined as the Fluorocarbons prescribed in Article 2, Paragraph 1 of 
the Act for Rationalized Use and Proper Management of Fluorocarbons, (Act No. 64 of 
2001). 
10. Factors for Consideration (4) Various management and evaluation tools, etc. includes 
manuals and guidelines prepared by academic societies, industry associations, etc. 
11. From the viewpoint of promoting energy conservation and low carbonization, each 
procurement organization should pay attention to the following. 
a. With a multiple-year contract of government building management, set targets 
for greenhouse gas emission reduction, etc. according to the contract period, 
evaluate achievement situation every year and try to continuous improve 
operation. Even in the case of contracts for a single year, make efforts to ensure 
appropriate measures. 
b. Regarding the introduction of energy conservation diagnosis and energy 
management system, make efforts to positively respond by giving priority to 
possible facilities. 
 
 
Appendix Table 1: Standards of Judgment for Business Operators on the Rational Use 
of Energy for Factories, etc. (abstract) 
Object Management  Measurement and Record Maintenance and 
Inspection 
Air 
conditio
ning 
equipm
ent, 
Ventilat
ion 
equipm
ent a. Set management 
standards concerning 
load reduction by 
management of blinds 
etc., operation time of 
facilities, indoor 
temperature, number of 
ventilation, humidity, 
effective use of outside a. Management 
standards for 
measurement and 
recording of matters 
necessary for 
grasping the 
temperature, 
humidity and other 
air conditions and a. Heat source 
equipment, heat 
conveyance 
equipment and air 
conditioner 
equipment 
constituting the air 
conditioning 
equipment are 263 Object Management  Measurement and Record Maintenance and 
Inspection 
air, etc. by limiting the 
section to be 
air-conditioned. The 
cooling / heating 
temperature shall be the 
management standard 
taking into consideration 
the setting temperature 
recommended by the 
government. 
b. Management of heat 
source equipment that 
performs combustion 
sets management 
standards on air ratio. 
c. Management of heat 
source equipment, heat 
conveying equipment 
and air conditioner 
equipment improves 
comprehensive energy 
efficiency of air 
conditioning equipment 
by setting cooling water 
temperature, cold / hot 
water temperature, 
pressure etc. according to 
changes in outside air 
conditions set 
management standard to 
make it. 
d. In the case where it is 
composed of multiple 
heat source machines, it 
is necessary to adjust the 
number of operating 
machines or select the 
operating equipment 
according to the seasonal 
fluctuation of the outside 
air condition and the load 
fluctuation, etc. so as to 
improve the total energy 
efficiency of the heat 
source equipment 
standards. improving the 
efficiency of air 
conditioning are set 
for each section 
subject to air 
conditioning. 
Periodically measure 
these items and 
record the results. 
b. Heat source 
equipment, heat 
conveyance 
equipment and air 
conditioner 
equipment 
constituting the air 
conditioning 
equipment 
management 
standards related to 
measuring and 
recording matters 
necessary for 
improving the 
efficiency of 
individual 
equipment and the 
overall efficiency of 
the air conditioning 
equipment. 
Periodically measure 
these items and 
record the results. 
c. Establish a 
management 
standard for 
measurement and 
recording of items 
necessary for 
grasping the 
temperature, carbon 
dioxide 
concentration and 
other air conditions 
and improving 
ventilation required to 
maintain heat 
insulation 
materials and heat 
insulation 
materials, to clog 
filters, to remove 
scale attached to 
condensers and 
heat exchangers, 
etc. Set 
management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection of 
matters necessary 
for improvement 
of efficiency and 
overall efficiency 
of air conditioning 
equipment. 
Maintain regular 
maintenance and 
check, keep it in 
good condition. 
b. Setting 
management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection of 
matters necessary 
for management 
of automatic 
control equipment 
of air conditioning 
equipment and 
ventilation 
equipment. 
Maintain regular 
maintenance and 
check, keep it in 
good condition. 
c. Fans, ducts, etc. 
constituting the 
ventilation facility 
set management 264 Object Management  Measurement and Record Maintenance and 
Inspection 
e. When the heat transport 
facility is composed of 
multiple pumps, the 
management standard is 
set so as to improve 
overall energy efficiency 
by adjusting the number 
of operating units or 
selecting operating 
equipment according to 
seasonal fluctuations and 
the like. 
f. In the case that the air 
conditioner equipment is 
composed of multiple air 
conditioners, in order to 
prevent mixing loss and 
to adjust energy 
efficiency more 
comprehensively by 
adjusting the number of 
operating machines or 
choosing operating 
equipment according to 
the state of load Set 
management standard to. 
g. For the management of 
ventilation equipment, 
limit the section to be 
ventilated, set 
management standards 
for ventilation volume, 
operation time, 
temperature, etc. 
 efficiency for each 
section to be 
ventilated. 
Periodically measure 
these items and 
record the results. standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection of 
matters necessary 
for improving the 
efficiency of 
individual 
equipment such as 
filter clogging and 
overall efficiency 
of ventilation 
equipment. 
Maintain regular 
maintenance and 
check, keep it in 
good condition. 
Boiler 
equip- 
ment, 
water 
heater 
equip- 
ment a. The boiler facility sets 
management standards 
on the air ratio according 
to the capacity of the 
boiler and the type of fuel 
used. 
b. The management 
standard of a. is set to 
lower the air ratio with 
reference to the reference 
air ratio value on the a. Boiler facility shall 
control the 
measurement and 
recording of matters 
necessary for 
improving the 
efficiency of boilers, 
such as the supply 
amount of fuel, the 
pressure of steam, 
the temperature of a. Set management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection of 
matters necessary 
for improving the 
efficiency of 
boiler facilities. 
Maintain regular 
maintenance and 
check, keep it in 265 Object Management  Measurement and Record Maintenance and 
Inspection 
boiler. 
c. The boiler facility sets 
management standards 
concerning the pressure, 
temperature and 
operation time of steam 
etc., operates 
appropriately, and 
eliminates supply of 
excessive steam and the 
like and supply of fuel. 
d. Water supply to boiler 
sets water quality 
management standards 
and controls water 
quality. Management of 
feed water quality is 
performed according to 
JIS B 8223 (water quality 
of boiler feed water and 
boiler water) (including 
standards equivalent to 
this). 
e. When using multiple 
boiler facilities, set 
management standards to 
improve overall energy 
efficiency, and set the 
number of suitable 
operating units. 
f. In the management of hot 
water supply facilities, 
management standards 
are set for items 
necessary for improving 
the supply point, supply 
hot water temperature, 
hot water supply 
pressure, hot water 
supply pressure and other 
hot water supply 
efficiency according to 
the season and work 
content. 
g. In management of heat 
source facilities of hot water, the 
amount of oxygen 
remaining in exhaust 
gas, the temperature 
of waste gas, boiler 
feed water volume 
Set standards. 
Periodically measure 
these items and 
record the results. 
b. Hot water supply 
facilities set 
management 
standards related to 
measurement and 
recording of matters 
necessary for 
improving the water 
supply volume, hot 
water supply 
temperature and 
other hot water 
supply efficiency. 
Periodically measure 
these items and 
record the results. 
 
 
 
 
 good condition. 
b. Establish 
management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection so as to 
prevent heat 
retention and 
insulation of 
boiler facilities, 
steam leakage of 
steam trap, and 
clogging. 
Maintain regular 
maintenance and 
check, keep it in 
good condition. 
c. The hot-water 
supply facility sets 
items necessary 
for improving 
hot-water supply 
efficiency, such as 
removal of scale 
attached to the 
heat exchanger, 
and management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection of 
matters necessary 
for management 
of the automatic 
control device. 
Maintain regular 
maintenance and 
check, keep it in 
good condition. 266 Object Management  Measurement and Record Maintenance and 
Inspection 
hot-water supply 
facilities, management 
standards are set to 
improve comprehensive 
energy efficiency 
including auxiliary 
equipment such as heat 
source equipment and 
pumps according to load 
fluctuations. 
h. When the heat source 
equipment of the hot 
water supply facility 
consists of multiple heat 
source equipment, the 
management standard is 
set so as to improve the 
overall energy efficiency 
of the heat source 
equipment by adjusting 
the number of operating 
units according to the 
load condition. 
 
Lightin
g 
equipm
ent, 
elevator
, power 
plant a. The lighting equipment 
is used after setting the 
management standard 
according to JIS Z 9110 
(Illuminance standard) 
or Z 9125 (Lighting 
standard of indoor 
workshop) and standards 
conforming to these 
standards. In addition, a 
management standard is 
set so as to eliminate 
excessive or unnecessary 
lighting, and dimming or 
turning off is performed 
by dimming. 
b. The elevator sets a 
management standard 
concerning the limitation 
of the stopping floor due 
to the time zone, the day 
of the week, etc., the The lighting equipment 
management standards 
related to measuring and 
recording the illuminance 
of the work place where 
the lighting is applied. 
Measure regularly and 
record the result. a. Lighting 
equipment 
management 
standards 
concerning 
maintenance and 
inspection such as 
cleaning of 
lighting fixtures 
and lamps, 
replacement of 
light sources, etc. 
Maintenance and 
inspection at 
regular intervals. 
b. The elevator sets 
management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection so as to 
reduce the 
mechanical losses 267 Object Management  Measurement and Record Maintenance and 
Inspection 
limitation of the number 
of operating units when 
there are plural units, 
and performs efficient 
operation. of the equipment 
that serves as the 
load of the electric 
motor, the power 
transmission part, 
and the electric 
motor. 
Maintenance and 
inspection at 
regular intervals. 
c. Power facilities 
such as plumbing 
and drainage 
facilities, machine 
parking facilities, 
etc. shall be 
managed in 
accordance with 
the standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection so as to 
reduce the 
mechanical losses 
in the load 
machine (meaning 
the machine 
serving as the load 
of the motor, the 
same shall apply 
hereinafter), the 
power 
transmission unit 
and the motor The 
set. Maintenance 
and inspection at 
regular intervals. 
In addition, when 
the load machine 
is a fluid machine 
such as a pump or 
a fan, control 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection are set 
so as to prevent 
fluid leakage and 268 Object Management  Measurement and Record Maintenance and 
Inspection 
to reduce the 
resistance of 
piping and ducts 
transporting 
fluids. 
Maintenance and 
inspection at 
regular intervals. 
Receivi
ng and 
trans- 
forming 
equip- 
ment a. Transformers and 
uninterruptible power 
supply units shall be set 
up with management 
standards so that the 
overall efficiency of the 
transformer and 
uninterruptible power 
supply will be high 
considering the 
efficiency at partial load 
and the adjustment of the 
number of operating 
units and the appropriate 
load Distribute. 
b. The power factor at the 
power receiving end is 
managed by setting the 
management standard to 
control the phase 
advancing capacitor etc. 
based on the fact that the 
power factor is 95% or 
more. Establishment of 
management standards 
concerning the 
measurement and 
recording of items 
necessary for reducing 
the amount of electricity 
used at offices and other 
business sites and the 
loss of electricity such as 
voltage and current of 
receiving and 
transforming equipment. 
Periodically measure 
these items and record 
the results. Set up the management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection so that the 
receiving and 
transforming 
equipment is kept in 
good condition. 
Maintenance and 
inspection at regular 
intervals. 
 
 
Appendix Table 2: Examples of Energy Efficient Strategies for Management and Use of 
Government Buildings 
Facilities  Energy Efficient Strategies (examples) Standards for 
Practice(examples) 
Stationed 
Manage- 
ment Non- 
Stationed 
Manage- 
ment 269 Common 
factors for 
heating and 
air-conditioni
ng facilities Change in standards for interior temperature 
and humidity In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature Seasonally 
Setting the optimal operation and suspension 
of machines, including reduction of operation 
hours Daily Seasonally 
Setting the optimal operation methods based 
on interior load factors for each season Weekly or 
more Seasonally 
Promote the practice of turning off related 
functions (outdoor units and thermal source 
devices) before turning off the air conditioner Daily -- 
Seasonal operation of heating and cooling in 
the interior perimeter area In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature -- 
Confirmation and prevention of mixing loss 
due to simultaneous use of cooling and heating As needed As needed 
Mount the temperature / humidity sensor in the 
proper position   As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Unification of temperature distribution 
through adjustment of placement and direction 
of vents As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Reduction of heating and cooling period In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature -- 
Stoppage of ventilation in empty rooms, 
storage, etc. As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Reduction of operation period  Daily -- 
Restricting air conditioning during overtime 
hours Daily -- 
Closing blinds and curtains before the 
weekend to lessen the air-conditioning load at 
the beginning of the work week  Daily -- 
Restricting air conditioning during early 
morning and late night cleaning period Daily -- 
Prohibiting opening of windows and doors 
during air conditioning hours In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature -- 
Change in the layout of partitions and desks 
that obstruct air conditioning As needed -- 270 Employ milder temperatures for common 
areas  Daily Seasonally 
Implementation of Cool Biz / Warm Biz  Seasonally Seasonally 
Sprinkling water on the rooftop, etc. during 
summertime In 
accordance 
with 
outdoor 
temperature 
for the 
relevant 
period -- 
Individual air 
conditioning 
units Optimization of automatic control functions 
including sensors  As needed As needed 
Regular cleaning of air filters Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Regular cleaning of hot and cold water fin 
coils Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Elimination of obstructive objects from the 
vent area As needed -- 
Application of warm-up control Daily -- 
Increase in thermostat temperature by 2~3 
degrees C after air conditioner has started up 
and is running normally In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature -- 
Natural ventilation through opening and 
closing of windows In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature -- 
Application of night purge to capture optimum 
temperature outside air during nighttime 
outside air temperature is low In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature -- 
Prevention of short circuiting caused by the 
proximity of the inlet and the outlet As needed As needed 
Enforcement of scheduled operation As needed As needed 
Prevention of air and water leakage from ducts 
thorough enforcement of maintenance of 
insulation material Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 271 Cleaning and maintenance of heat 
interchanger Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Suspension of heat interchanger operation In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature Seasonally 
Setting of zero-energy band to control 
temperature and humidity within a certain 
range Daily -- 
Central air 
conditioning 
system For temperature management, set cold water is 
high, hot water is low, cooling water is low Daily -- 
Controlled operation of maximum temperature 
difference operation (reduction of pump 
transportation ability) As needed -- 
Periodic water quality management in hot and 
cold water as well as cooling water (prevention 
of decrease in ratio of heat transmission)  Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Suspension of heat source machine operation 
30 minutes prior to turning off the air 
conditioning system  Daily -- 
Freezers Optimization of freezer operation pressure As needed As needed 
Cleaning tube interior of equipment including 
chemical and brush cleansing of vaporizers 
and condensers As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Maintenance and inspection of measuring 
instruments including thermometers and 
pressure gauges Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Maintenance of function, inspection, and 
maintenance of measuring equipment 
including manometers and sensors Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Maintenance of COP value (efficiency) in 
equipment As needed -- 
Cold and hot 
water 
generators, 
absorption 
freezers Optimization and maintenance of airtight 
components of the equipment As needed As needed 
Cleaning tube interior of equipment including 
chemical and brush cleansing of vaporizers 
and condensers Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Maintenance and inspection of measuring 
instruments including thermometers and 
pressure gauges Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Maintenance of function, inspection, and 
maintenance of measuring equipment 
including manometers and sensors Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Maintenance of COP value (efficiency) in 
equipment As needed -- 272 Cooling tower Optimization of cooling water inlet / outlet 
temperature As needed -- 
Management and removal of filth from fillers, 
management of water quality As needed As needed 
Cleaning of cooling tower tank As needed As needed 
Check valve opening / closing state As needed -- 
Maintenance of chemical components in 
cooling water As needed As needed 
Heat storage 
tank Implementation of optimum operation of 
water / ice heat storage amount in heat storage 
tank based on air conditioning load prediction 
etc. As needed -- 
Optimization of temperature distribution in 
tank As needed -- 
Fan coil Optimum operation of the fan coil for the 
perimeter(time period, temperature setting) In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature -- 
Periodic cleaning of air filters Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Period cleaning of cold and hot water fin coils Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Ventilation of air conditioners, removal of 
obstructive material from vents  As needed -- 
Air-cooled 
heat pumps Period cleaning of outdoor unit fin coils Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Period cleaning of indoor unit fin coils Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Period cleaning of indoor unit air filters Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Confirmation and maintenance of operation 
conditions including operation pressure and 
operation current Daily -- 
Cleaning of heat transformer Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Suspension measures for heat transformer 
operation In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature Seasonally 273 Water-cooled 
packaging 
method Periodic cleaning of indoor unit fin coil Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Periodic cleaning of air filters Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Confirmation and maintenance of operation 
conditions including operation pressure and 
operation current Daily -- 
Cleaning of heat transformer Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Suspension measures for heat transformer 
operation In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature Seasonally 
Chemical cleansing of cooling water Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Ventilation 
facilities Restriction of ventilation in machine and 
electric rooms and storage As needed As needed 
Turning off ventilation in unused rooms 
(storage, machine room, etc.) As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Natural ventilation through opening and 
closing of windows In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature -- 
Inspection and replacement of fan belts Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Changing activation setting temperature of 
ventilation fan for waste heat As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Remove clogging of filters such as fans and 
ducts 
 As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Setting the ventilation air volume to an 
appropriate value, reducing the amount of 
outside air As 
appropriate -- 
Pump related Set up so that startup, stop, pressure, and flow 
rate of the secondary pump are optimized As needed -- 
Optimization of water quantity in ground 
packing, etc. Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Maintenance of insulation material Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 274 Suspension of operation as needed for three or 
four pipe equipment As needed -- 
Boilers Appropriate setting of combustion equipment 
including air ratio, exhaust gas temperature, 
etc. As needed As needed 
Appropriate setting of pressure of steam etc., 
temperature of hot water As needed As needed 
Cleaning of heat transmission surfaces, 
removal of scales, etc. Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Maintenance of heat transmission surfaces. Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Boiler water quality management(JIS B 8223) Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Maintenance of steam trap function (drain 
recovery) Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Maintenance of COP value (efficiency) in 
equipment As needed -- 
Hot water 
supply facility Limitation of hot water supply time and 
reduction of hot water supply range In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature Seasonally 
Stop hot water supply such as hand wash place 
in summer Daily in 
summer Daily in 
summer 
Change of hot water supply temperature 
setting 
 In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature Seasonally 
For use, narrow down the branch valves of hot 
water in a range that does not interfere As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Lighting 
facilities Turn off excessive lighting in the work space, 
utilize natural lighting turn off the window 
area Based on 
usage Based on 
usage 
Dimming Based on 
usage Based on 
usage 
Turning off, or selective lighting in hallways Based on 
usage Based on 
usage 
Turning off lights in un-occupied restrooms 
and kitchens Daily -- 
Turning off lights in empty rooms and storage Daily As 
appropriate 
Turning off lights during lunch break Daily -- 275 Partially turning off in overtime hours by 
concentrating overtime work areas Daily -- 
Shortening or restricting of lighting during 
opening time Daily -- 
Cleaning of lighting fixtures for increased 
lighting efficiency Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Periodic exchange of lamps(Fluorescent lamp, 
HID lamp, etc.) Once every 
2~3 years Once every 
2~3 years 
Initialization of initial illuminance correction 
at lamp replacement Implemente
d at 
replacement -- 
Elimination of partitions As 
appropriate -- 
Proper disposition of desks and work areas that 
are easy to turn off partially in the lighting 
range  As 
appropriate -- 
Frequent adjustment of solar timers Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Employment of area-specific lighting As needed -- 
Displayed lighting range on light switch As 
appropriate -- 
Operation check of lighting control equipment. As 
appropriate -- 
Frequent manual turning off of light switches As needed -- 
Transportation 
system Selective operation of elevators and escalators 
Controlling the number of elevators / 
escalators to be operated (limitation of stop 
floor, control of the number of operating units) Daily -- 
Promotion of stairway use Daily -- 
Cooperation with in-building delivery system Daily -- 
Maintenance and inspection to reduce the 
equipment loss of the motor, the power 
transmission section and the motor losses As 
appropriate -- 
Plumbing and 
sanitary 
facilities Confirmation of rust, corrosion and water leak 
in piping As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Improve energy consumption efficiency 
including auxiliary equipment such as heat 
source equipment and pump As 
appropriate -- 
Narrowing of branch valves for  water supply 
to an extent that does not result in 
inconvenience As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 276 Stoppage of hot water in restrooms, etc. during 
summer In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature Seasonally 
Receiving and 
transforming 
electricity Reconsideration of interior temperature of 
substations Seasonally -- 
Frequent load adjustment by demand situation  As needed -- 
Thorough management of power factor using 
phase acceleration condensers As needed -- 
Detachment of transformer in unnecessary 
period or time zone. As 
appropriate -- 
Adjustment of the number of transformers 
operating and maintenance of proper load As needed -- 
Adjust the number of uninterruptible power 
supply units in operation and maintain proper 
load As needed -- 
Others Energy conservation in vending machines 
(turning off illumination, turning off the 
machine at night) Daily -- 
Disconnection of the power of the office 
equipment during the period not in use such as 
lunch break Daily -- 
Efficient use of blinds and curtains Daily -- 
Confirmation of set values of target 
facilities/equipment, etc., 
measurement/recording of operation result Daily Once or 
more per 
month 
Understanding and utilization of energy data 
necessary for energy conservation Daily Once or 
more per 
month 
 
  277 Landscape 
management Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Products that fulfill the evaluation criteria are to be used when products 
used for landscape management apply to specified items for 
procurement. 
(2) A system is in place for comprehensive management of vermin and 
harmful insects and weeds capable of maintaining them at a low 
concentration through appropriate pruning and trimming that would 
result in improved ventilation and securing of adequate sunlight, in 
addition to executing appropriate prevention and control methods. 
(3) Efforts should be made to decrease the frequency and quantity of 
pesticides. Only the appropriate pesticides that have been registered in 
accordance with pesticide control law should be used adequately and 
effectively by following the label instructions on method of use 
(frequency, quantity, concentration, etc.) and label warnings. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Consideration is made for use of irrigated rainwater. 
(2) A system is in place for the reduction of environmental load from 
compost, etc. when disposing branches and leaves resulting from 
pruning and weeding. 
(3) Compost created from leaves, etc. that resulted from landscape 
management (soil improvement material) is used for fertilization. 
(4) When using a chain saw for pruning, logging, etc., the chain saw oil 
must be biodegradable. 
(5) When transplanting is required, a proposal should be made to facility 
manager for the selection of tree types with low possibility of 
harvesting vermin and harmful insects, while in consideration for the 
existing landscape. 
(6) Equipment and tools used for landscape management should be 
selected upon taking into consideration their ability to decrease 
environmental load. 
(7) Using the planting material that substitute for the soil for landscape 
management as much as possible. 
Notes: 
1. Landscape management under consideration in Evaluation Criteria refers to the 
management of landscaping around government office buildings, etc. and rooftop 
landscaping, etc. 
2. A system for comprehensive management of vermin and harmful insects and weeds in 
Evaluation Criteria (2) of Landscape Management refers to a system that considers 
comprehensively the reduction of load upon health and environment while taking 
financial efficiency in consideration. Measures include research of outbreak conditions, 
early detection of damage, and selection of physical removal strategies including 
pruning and catch-and-kill. 
3. Evaluation Criteria (2) and (3) of Landscape Management should conform to “Use of 
Agricultural Chemicals in Residential Districts (No.175, April 26, 2013, decision No. 
1304261; joint notice by Director of Consumption and Safety of Ministry of 
Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries, and Director of Water and Atmospheric 
Environment of Ministry of Environment),” related such as information provision for 278 the dissemination facilities manager who lies use of pesticides and for the surrounding 
area, splash prevention and retention of records for agricultural chemicals. 
4. Biodegradation testing should employ one of the following methods. 10-d window shall 
not be used for these testing methods. 
*OECD (Organization for Economic Co-Operation and Development) Chemical 
Substance Testing Guideline 
 301B (CO2 Production Testing) 
 301C (Modified MITI (I) Testing) 
 301F (Manometric Respirometry Testing) 
*ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) 
 D5864 (Standard testing method to determine the degree of aerobic 
biodegradation in water environment for lubricants and lubricant components) 
 D6731 (Standard testing method to determine the degree of aerobic 
biodegradation in water environment for lubricant inside an airtight respirometer 
and lubricant components) 
 
Smoke 
Detectors Test 
 Evaluation Criteria 
Fluorocarbons are not used in smoke bodies of smoke tester.  
 
Factors for Consideration 
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into account 
ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1. The Evaluation criteria in this section shall also be applied even when the smoke-free 
test is included in fire-fighting equipment inspection work etc. 
2. Fluorocarbons are the materials defined as the Fluorocarbons prescribed in Article 2, 
Paragraph 1 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Proper Management of Fluorocarbons 
(Act No. 64 of 2001). 
 
 
Cleaning Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Products used for cleaning of government office buildings, when 
applicable to the specified items for procurement, fulfill the evaluation 
criteria. 
(2) From the perspective of efficient use of resources, liquid soap or soap 
used for hand washing in the lavatory are to use as raw materials waste 
oil or animals and plant oil. However, sustainable raw materials are 
used if plant oils and fats are used as raw materials of detergents used 
for cleaning. 
(3) Waste collection is to be distinguished between recyclable waste 
(paper, cans, glass bottles, plastic bottles, etc.), kitchen waste, 
combustible waste, and incombustible waste, and collected 
appropriately. 
(4) Among the recyclable recycled paper waste is separated and collected 
with consideration for recycling of used paper. In cases where 
separation is inadequate or discharge amount has dramatically 
increased when compared to the previous month or the same month of 
the previous year, a plan for improvement should be presented in 279 cooperation with the facility manager. 
(5) The content of volatile organic compound in products for floor 
maintenance (wax), detergent, etc. is below the amount specified in the 
guideline. 
(6) The business possesses the skills that contributes to the reduction of 
environmental load, and makes specific proposals to further decrease 
environmental load in their cleaning methods. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Consideration is made for the reduced use or appropriate use of 
material for floor maintenance, detergents, etc. used for cleaning. 
(2) Replacement items will not be supplied in excess. 
 
(3) Cleansers have the hydrogen ion concentration (pH) that is appropriate 
for their use. 
(4) Wax, cleaning agent used for floor maintenance, cleaning, etc. do not 
contain designated chemical material.as much as possible. 
(5) When cleaning, effort is made to reduce the amount of energy 
resources such as electricity and gas, as well as resources such as 
water. 
(6) Effort is made to suggest frequency of cleaning that is appropriate for 
the building condition. 
(7) Even when items necessary for the cleaning of government office 
buildings do not apply to the designated procurement items, 
consideration will be paid to the reduction of environmental load 
during its lifecycle from the collection of resources to disposal. 
Notes: 
1. The use of sustainable raw materials in evaluation criteria (2) means that the 
manufacturer of the soap solution or soap creates a sustainable procurement policy 
pertaining to the raw materials and procures raw materials based on the policy. 
2. For Evaluation Criteria (4) of Cleaning, each procurement organization should refer to 
Appendix Tables 1 and 2, while taking into consideration the state of paper use and 
disposal in government buildings, etc., and determine the separation criteria for 
discharged used paper in cooperation with cleaning businesses. Separation must be 
conducted thoroughly by eliminating material that may obstruct paper recycling. 
Recyclable printed matter that fulfils the Evaluation Criteria for printed matter should 
be adequately separated so that it may be used as raw material for paper. 
3. The specified amount for volatile organic compound in Evaluation Criteria (5) of 
Cleaning is to conform to the amount for indoor concentration designated by the 
Ministry of Health, Labor and Welfare. 
4. Cleaning methods that contribute to the reduction of environmental load, as noted in 
Evaluation Criteria (6) refers to tactics such as the application of cleaning methods 
based on the level of contamination, application of preventative cleaning methods that 
removes before the contamination of room environment, enforcement of reliable 
contamination removal through maintenance of cleaning machinery performance. 
5. In Factors for Consideration (3) of Cleaning, reference should be made to the 
hydrogen ion concentration (pH) of synthetic detergent based on Household Products 280 Quality Indicator. The hydrogen ion concentration of products for floor maintenance 
and floor detergents as undiluted solution should ideally be between pH5 and pH9. 
6. Designated chemical material noted in Factors for Consideration (4) of Cleaning 
refers to material that apply to “Act on Confirmation, etc. of Release Amounts of 
Specific Chemical Substances in the Environment and Promotion of Improvements to 
the Management Thereof (Act No. 86 of July 13, 1999).” 
7. Each procurement organization shall take necessary measures to properly treat the 
waste liquid accompanying the cleaning work of buildings such as flushing washing 
liquid of floor maintenance agent.  
 
Appendix Table 1: Separation procedure for used paper (sample) 
Classification Item 
Newspaper Newspaper (includes enclosed advertisements) 
Cardboard Cardboard 
Magazines  Poster, ads, magazines, reports, catalogs, pamphlets, bound material such 
as books, notes 
OA paper Copier paper and its equivalents 
Recyclable 
printed matter Printed matter that May be recycled into printing paper (uses only 
materials in Rank A) 
Printed matter that May be recycled into cardboard (uses only materials 
in Ranks A and B) 
Other 
miscellaneous 
paper Envelopes, paper boxes, DM, memo paper, wrapping paper, and others 
that are not included in the above 
Shredder pieces Paper that has been shredded within government buildings, etc. 
Notes: Recyclable printed matter refers to printed matter on which the recyclability is 
displayed in the standards for judgments concerning printing (refer to printing section) of the 
printed matter. 
 
 
Appendix Table 2: Materials that may interfere with recycling of used paper (sample) 
Category Type 
Paper products Envelopes with adhesive material 
Paper treated with waterproof material 
Carbon paper, carbon-less paper (duplicate receiving slip for package 
delivery, etc.) 
Privacy sealed postcards 
Thermal paper 
Photographs, Inkjet photo paper, blueprint paper 
Paper made of composite material such as plastic film and aluminum foil 
Paper on which metal foils such as gold and silver are mounted 
Fragrant paper (wrapper for soap, detergent container made of paper, paper 
box for incense) 
Sublimation transfer paper, iron print paper, etc. 
Thermal foam paper 
Composite paper 281 Dirty paper (used sanitary paper, dirty paper due to food residue, etc.) 
Material other 
than paper Adhesive tape 
Iron on patch 
Metal used in files 
Film 
Styrofoam 
Cellophane 
Plastic products 
Glass products 
Cloth products 
Carpet tile 
cleaning  Evaluation Criteria 
(1) The power consumption of the equipment used for cleaning is 0.22 
kWh / m2 or less. 
(2) The amount of water used for cleaning is 40 L / m 2 or less. 
(3) The detergent etc. used for cleaning shall meet the criteria for judgment 
concerning cleaning (see Cleaning section). 
(4) The transparency of the recovered water which wash the tile carpet after 
completion of cleaning is 5 points or more 
 
Factors for Considerations 
(1) The detergent etc. to be used for cleaning is considered to reduce the 
amount used or to use the proper amount. 
(2) In the case where plant oils and fats are used as raw materials of 
detergent, sustainable raw materials are used. 
(3) The detergent etc. to be used for cleaning is those which do not contain 
designated chemical substances. 
(4) To make efforts to reduce energy such as electricity and water used for 
cleaning. 
Notes: 
1. Carpet tile cleaning under the evaluation criteria in this section denote remove the tile 
carpet laid, release dirt, disassemble and wash away at the work site or office etc., as well 
as leave no sewage so as to aspirate or dehydrate. 
2. Transparency noted of in the evaluation criteria (4) is according to JIS K 0120. 
3. Designated chemical material noted in Factors for Consideration (3) refers to material 
that apply to “Act on Confirmation, etc. of Release Amounts of Specific Chemical 
Substances in the Environment and Promotion of Improvements to the Management 
Thereof (Act No. 86 of July 13, 1999).” 
 
Treatment of 
confidential 
documents Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Type and amount of paper to be discharged at the facility concerned is 
taken into consideration, methods of separation and treatment is 
proposed in accordance with the facility conditions, and adequate 
collection is enforced to use as raw material for paper. 
(2) For disposal of confidential documents, the following should be 
fulfilled in order to enable reuse as raw material for paper upon taking 
adequate measures to avoid leaking of confidential information during 
each step of treatment, including discharge and temporary storage, 282 collection, transportation, and disposal. 
a. Facilities and systems are in place to remove material that may 
obstruct paper recycling. 
b. Direct dissolution treatment is to be conducted at a facility equipped 
with a system for removal of foreign material. 
c. Treatment involving crushing should be conducted in a way that 
would preserve as much fiber in the paper as possible. 
(3) Confidential treatment / Recycling management manifest indicating 
that proper processing of confidential documents has been performed 
can be shown to the client. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Discharge amount of confidential documents is measured regularly and 
reported to the client. 
(2) Treatment is conducted in such a way to enable recycling as paper 
(printing paper, information paper and hygienic paper). 
(3) For transportation, planning is conducted to enable efficiency for 
loading methods, transportation methods and transportation routes. 
(4) Transportation utilizes as much as possible vehicles with fuel efficiency 
and low environmental impact.  
Notes: 
1. Each procurement organization should consider the degree and necessity of 
confidentiality when discharging documents, and reduce as much as possible the 
amount of confidential documents to be discharged. 
2. Each procurement organization should fully consider the following: 
a. For ordering treatment involving crushing noted in the evaluation criteria (2), size 
of the cut paper pieces should be confirmed (From the standpoint of paper 
recycling, larger sized paper is desirable. Standard for paper size as noted by 
businesses is 10mmx50mm or larger.). 
b. Keeping in mind that shredder treatment inside government buildings etc. 
generally decreases the applicability for recycling, it should be conducted with 
consideration for the degree and necessity of confidentiality. Efforts should be 
made to request for collection of shredded paper by businesses that collect paper 
for recycling, businesses that treat confidential documents, etc., so that they may 
be used appropriately according to paper type (paper width appropriate for 
recycling is 5mm or more). 
c. By referring to Appendix 1 shown in "Cleaning" in this section, set up a separation 
method according to the situation of the facility and remove materials that will 
inhibit the recycling of used paper shown in Appendix 2 and strive for appropriate 
sorted collection about. 
3. A certification that indicates that the disposal of confidential documents noted in the 
evaluation criteria (3) refers to documents that certify that the collected confidential 
documents have been used as raw material for paper after being treated to eliminate 
confidential information. This document only applies to instances when an outside 
business is commissioned to conduct treatment such as melting and crushing, and does 
not apply to shredded paper pieces resulting from shredder treatment within each 
procuring facility. 
 283  
Pest prevention Evaluation Criteria 
(1) When material used for pest prevention falls in the category of specified 
items for procurement, products that fulfill the evaluation criteria is 
used. 
(2) Abuse of rodenticides and pesticides is avoided. A comprehensive 
prevention method taking into consideration research of their habitation 
condition, etc. is in place. 
(3) Measures for preventing outbreak and invasion of pests, etc. are in 
place. 
(4) A predetermined plan or target for prevention work is in place. 
Judgment of effectiveness (confirmation and examination, evaluation 
of prevention effectiveness, etc.) is conducted after the prevention 
work. 
(5) Rodenticides and pesticides are pharmaceutical products that have been 
approved of manufacture and sales through “Act on securing quality, 
effectiveness and safety of pharmaceuticals, medical equipment, 
etc.(Act No.145 of 1960)”, and applied appropriately in accordance 
with the designated frequency, amount and concentration. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Effort is made to propose pest prevention method that is most appropriate 
for the habitat condition. 
Note: Pest prevention that is under consideration in the evaluation criteria refers to the 
prevention of animals, etc., including mice, insects, and foreign life that can potentially cause 
damage to people’s health in government office buildings based on Laws Concerning the 
Securing of Hygienic Environment in Buildings (Law No.20 of 1970). 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of jobs per category that meet the criteria to the number of jobs conducted 
in the fiscal year. 
 
  284 22-7 Transportation and Delivery 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Transportation 
and delivery  Evaluation Criteria 
(1) The state of energy use, as well as the effects of energy efficiency 
efforts is being reviewed periodically. 
(2) System and organization for environmental conservation is being 
developed.  
(3) Measures are in place for eco-drive promotion. 
(4) Inspection and maintenance of cars for environmental protection 
including reduction of environmental pollutant emission and 
maintenance of energy efficiency is being conducted. 
(5) Modal shift is put in place. 
(6) Measures are put in place for improved efficiency in transportation and 
delivery. 
(7) Information regarding the above criteria (the actual state of use and 
numbers showing the effect for criteria (1), and whether or not the 
measures are put in place for criteria (2) to (5)) are publicized on 
websites and environmental reports, etc., so that they may be easily 
confirmed, or, is judged objectively by a third party. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Adequate and effective application for the efficient use of energy and 
measures to contribute to leveling of demand for electricity in 
transportation and delivery is arranged, with consideration for 
“Evaluation Criteria for Freight Transportation Companies in Relation 
to the Efficient use of Energy in Freight Transportation (Ministry of 
Economy, Trade and Industry; Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and 
Transport (Notification No.7 of 2006) and “Guidelines for Freight 
Transportation Companies in Relation to the measures to contribute to 
leveling of demand for electricity in Passenger Transportation” 
(Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry; Ministry of Land, 
Infrastructure and Transport (Notification No.2 of 2014), based on the 
Regulation for the Efficient Use of Energy (Act No.49 of 1979). 
(2) Incorporation of fuel-efficient, low pollution cars promoted. At the 
same time, transportation and delivery using fuel-efficient, low 
pollution cars is being conducted as much as possible. 
(3) Improvements in carrying capacity are considered in order to decrease 
the number of cars being used for transportation and delivery. 
(4) Cooperative transportation and delivery is considered in order to 
decrease the frequency of transportation and delivery. 
(5) Efforts to reduce redelivery are being implemented. 
(6) Devices to promote eco-drive are in place as much as possible. 
(7) Measures are taken for the incorporation of Intelligent Transport 
System (ITS) including Vehicle Information and Communication 
System (VICS) adaptable car navigation system, and Electronic Toll 
Collection System (ETC). 
(8) Commercial packaging for home delivery service items and small 
postal packages are to take into account ease of recycling and reduced 285 environmental impact upon disposal. 
(9) Maintain an understanding of energy use conditions at offices and 
delivery distribution centers, and make an effort to decrease energy use 
rate in said facilities. 
(10) Request to those who are undertaking by contract part of the 
transportation and delivery to undertake, as much as possible, 
measures constructive towards the reduction of environmental load.  
(11)Being conducted by car fills the emission standard as much as 
possible, when driving in the measures region of the Law concerning 
Special Measures for Total Emission Reduction of Nitrogen Oxides 
and Small Particles from automobiles in specified areas (June 3, 1992 
No.70). 
Notes: 
1. Transportation and delivery under consideration includes domestic letter 
correspondences, home delivery service, small postal packages (general, documents, 
etc.), as well as mail service. 
a. Letter correspondences refer to documents that are meant to express the 
intentions of the sender, or to notify factual information, to a specified recipient. 
b. Home delivery service refers to delivery service that uses one or more of the 
following: special cargo transportation undertaken by general automotive cargo 
transportation business, or a corresponding cargo transportation, and train cargo 
transportation, domestic sea transportation, automotive cargo transportation, and 
air cargo transportation. Each cargo is to be 30 kg or less. 
c. Mail service refers to a transportation service that receives from the sender, 
relatively light packages of books, magazine, product catalogs, etc., and 
completes the delivery by placing those material into the mail box, etc. of the 
receiver. Each package is to be comprised of one document, and weigh 1 kg or 
less. 
2. Establishment of mechanisms and systems for environmental conservation means to 
formulate plans and targets related to the environment, establish implementation 
systems for such plans, and promote efforts toward environmental conservation.  
3. Eco-drive refers to “Recommendation for Eco-drive 10” published by Eco-drive 
Popularization Network (October 2012). 
Notes: (1) Soft accelerator e-start; (2) Keep a distance between cars and driving with 
little acceleration and deceleration; (3) Early stopping of acceleration when 
deceleration; (4) Appropriate use of air conditioner; (5) Stop a useless idling; (6) 
Avoid getting congested, have time and leave; (7) Inspection and maintenance of cars 
start from air pressure in the tires; (8) Removal of unnecessary load from car; (9) Stop 
parking that disturbs running.; and (10) Understand own fuel cost. 
4. Measures are in place for eco-drive promotion noted in Evaluation Criteria (3) 
requires the fulfillment of the following: 
a. The driver has been informed of eco-drive. 
b. A manager responsible for eco-drive has been assigned, manual has been created 
(including the use of an existing manual), and a system for promoting eco-drive 
has been put in place. 
c. Education and training regarding eco-drive is being performed. 
d. Energy use is being maintained through the maintenance of operation records 
under the categories of driver and car type. 286 5. Inspection and maintenance of cars in the evaluation criteria (4) refers to the 
observance of the items outlined in the Regulations for Road Transportation and 
Delivery, including daily and regular inspections, as well as the establishing and 
execution of voluntary maintenance standards based on inspection and maintenance 
factors listed in Table. The objective here is to secure an environment that can maintain 
energy efficiency in automobiles. 
6.  Modal-shift refers to the shifting of transportation mode through the employment of 
mass transportation system with little environmental load including cargo 
transportation and domestic sea transportation. However, if its main task does not 
involve trunk transport, the evaluation criteria (5) is not applied. 
7. Measures are put in place for improved efficiency in transportation and delivery 
noted in evaluation criteria (6) requires the fulfillment of the following: 
a. An energy efficient delivery route is selected beforehand, and the driver is notified 
thereof. 
b. A system for an appropriate delivery route, taking into account traffic information, 
is put in place. 
c. An adequate automobile type, taking into account amount of delivery items and 
regional characteristics, is selected. 
d. Transportation and delivery distance is shortened by differentiating between 
delivery station-based method and direct method. 
8. Environmental Report refers to the environmental report designated by Regulations 
for Promoting Businesses that Takes into Consideration Environment of Specified 
Businesses, etc. through Promotion of Environmental Information Provision (2004 
Regulation 77) Article 2, Item 4. 
9. Fuel-efficient, low pollution cars in Factors for Consideration (2) should be referred 
to “13-1 Vehicles” in this Basic Policy. 
10. Those who are undertaking by contract part of the transportation and delivery refers 
to cases where part of transportation and delivery operation under consideration here is 
being undertaken for the services concerned. 
 287 Table: Inspection and Maintenance Items for Environmental Preservation, Including 
Maintenance of Automobile Energy Efficiency, etc. 
Promotional structure for inspection and maintenance 
   Inspection and maintenance is conducted in accordance with specified operation 
plan, and the results are recorded. 
  A system is put in place to review the contents of inspection and maintenance, based 
on the results of inspection and maintenance. 
Adequate inspection and maintenance of automobiles 
 ¡ When commissioning inspection and maintenance to a maintenance business, 
maintain an understanding of the automobile condition on a daily basis, and relay the 
condition when commissioning. 
¡ Conduct inspection and maintenance when an increase in black smoke is confirmed 
by the eye. 
¡ When the air-conditioner gas is considered to have decreased, based on the 
effectiveness of the car air-conditioner, conduct inspection and maintenance of the car 
air-conditioner, in order to prevent the discharge of chlorofluorocarbon into the 
atmosphere. 
Inspection and maintenance based on voluntary maintenance standards 
 (Air cleaner element-related) 
¡ For cleaning and replacement of air cleaner element, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance 
standard based on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since 
the previous maintenance. Conduct inspection and maintenance accordingly. 
(Engine oil related) 
¡ For the change of engine oil, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by the 
manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on either the 
distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous maintenance. 
Conduct oil change accordingly. 
¡ For the replacement of engine oil filter, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based 
on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct replacement accordingly. 
(Fuel equipment related) 
  For overhauling or replacement of fuel equipment, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance 
standard based on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since 
the previous maintenance. Conduct overhaul or replacement accordingly. 
(Related to equipment for the reduction of gas emission) 
¡ For the inspection of equipment for the reduction of gas emission (DPF, Oxidized 
catalyst), refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and 
determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on either the distance driven or the 
amount of time that has passed since the previous maintenance. Conduct inspection 
accordingly. 
(Others) 
 ¡ For the inspection and adjustment of tire air-pressure, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance 288 standard based on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since 
the previous maintenance. Conduct adjustment in accordance with the actual 
measurement of air-pressure. 
  For the inspection of transmission oil leakage, refer to the maintenance notebook, 
etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard 
based on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the 
previous maintenance. Conduct maintenance accordingly. 
  For changing the transmission oil, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided 
by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on either 
the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct change accordingly. 
  For the inspection of deferential oil leakage, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based 
on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct maintenance accordingly. 
  For changing the deferential oil, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by 
the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on either the 
distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous maintenance. 
Conduct change accordingly. 
¡ refers to items that must be conducted for inspection and maintenance of automobiles. 
  refers to items for which execution is desirable for inspection and maintenance of 
automobiles. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of transportation and delivery businesses that meet the criteria to the 
number of transportation and delivery businesses commissioned in the fiscal year. 
  289 22-8 Passenger Transportation (Automobiles) 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Passenger 
transportation  Evaluation Criteria 
(1) The state of energy use, as well as the effects of energy efficiency 
efforts is being reviewed periodically. 
(2) System and organization for environmental conservation is being 
developed. 
(3) Measures are in place for eco-drive promotion. 
(4) Inspection and maintenance of cars for environmental protection 
including reduction of environmental pollutant emission and 
maintenance of energy efficiency is being conducted. 
(5) Measures are put in place for improved efficiency in passenger 
transportation, or decrease in traveling distance of non-passenger 
occupied cars. 
(6) Information regarding the above criteria (the actual state of use and 
numbers showing the effect for criteria (1), and whether or not the 
measures are put in place for criteria (2)-(5)) are publicized on websites 
and environmental reports, etc., so that they may be easily confirmed, 
or, is judged objectively by a third party. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Adequate and effective application for the efficient use of energy and 
measures to contribute to leveling of demand for electricity in 
passenger transportation is arranged, with consideration for 
“Evaluation Criteria for Passenger Transportation Companies in 
Relation to the Efficient use of Energy in Passenger Transportation 
(Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry; Ministry of Land, 
Infrastructure and Transport (Notification No.6 of 2006)), and 
“Guidelines for Passenger Transportation Companies in Relation to the 
measures to contribute to leveling of demand for electricity in 
Passenger Transportation (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry; 
Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transport(Notification No.3 of 
2014)) based on the Regulation for the Efficient Use of Energy (Act 
No.49 of 1979). 
(2) Incorporation of fuel-efficient and low pollution cars is promoted.  At 
the same time, passenger transportation using fuel-efficient, low 
pollution cars is being conducted as much as possible. 
(3) Devices to promote eco-drive are in place as much as possible. 
(4) Measures are taken for the incorporation of Intelligent Transport 
System (ITS) including Vehicle Information and Communication 
System (VICS) adaptable car navigation system, and Electronic Toll 
Collection System (ETC). 
(5) Maintain an understanding of energy use conditions at business and 
sales offices, and make an effort to decrease energy use rate in said 
facilities. 
(6) Effort is made for efficient dispatching of cars with the incorporation of 
GPS-AVM system. 290 Notes: 
1. Eco-drive refers to “Recommendation for Eco-drive 10” published by Eco-drive 
Popularization Network (October 2012). 
Notes: (1) Soft accelerator e-start; (2) Keep a distance between cars and driving with 
little acceleration and deceleration; (3) Early stopping of acceleration when  
deceleration; (4) Appropriate use of air conditioner; (5) Stop a useless idling; (6) 
Avoid getting congested, have time and leave; (7) Inspection and maintenance of cars 
start from air pressure in the tires; (8) Removal of unnecessary load from car; (9) Stop 
parking that disturbs running.; and (10) Understand own fuel cost. 
2. Establishment of mechanisms and systems for environmental conservation means to 
formulate plans and targets related to the environment, establish implementation 
systems for such plans, and promote efforts toward environmental conservation. 
3. Measures are in place for eco-drive promotion noted in Evaluation Criteria (3) 
requires the fulfillment of the following: 
a. The driver has been informed of eco-drive. 
b. A manager responsible for eco-drive has been assigned, manual has been created 
(including the use of an existing manual), and a system for promoting eco-drive has 
been put in place. 
c. Education and training regarding eco-drive is being performed. 
d. Energy use is being maintained through the maintenance of operation records under 
the categories of driver and car type. 
4. Inspection and maintenance of cars in Evaluation Criteria (4) refers to the 
observance of the items outlined in the Regulations for Road Transportation and 
Delivery, including daily and regular inspections, as well as the establishing and 
execution of voluntary maintenance standards based on inspection and maintenance 
factors listed in Table. The objective here is to secure an environment that can maintain 
energy efficiency in automobiles. 
5. Measures are put in place for improved efficiency in passenger transportation and 
decrease in traveling distance of non-passenger occupied cars noted in Evaluation 
Criteria (5) require the fulfillment of the following  
General charted passenger automobiles must fulfill items a. and b. below.  
a. An energy efficient route is selected beforehand, and the driver is notified thereof. 
b. An appropriate automobile type, taking into account number of passengers to 
transport and regional characteristics, is selected. 
General passenger automobiles must fulfill item c. below.  
c. Dispatching of automobiles utilizes wireless transmission. Otherwise, a system is 
put in place that enables communication with the driver through other means of 
communication or information devices. 
6. Fuel-efficient, low pollution cars noted in Factors for Consideration (2) should be 
referred to “13-1 Vehicles” section in this Basic Policy. 
7. Environmental Report refers to the environmental report designated by Regulations 
for Promoting Businesses that Takes into Consideration Environment of Specified 
Businesses, etc. through Promotion of Environmental Information Provision (2004 
Regulation 77) Article 2, Item 4. 291 Table: Inspection and Maintenance Items for Environmental Preservation, Including 
Maintenance of Automobile Energy Efficiency, etc. 
Promotional structure for inspection and maintenance 
   Inspection and maintenance is conducted in accordance with specified operation 
plan, and the results are recorded. 
  A system is put in place to review the contents of inspection and maintenance, 
based on the results of inspection and maintenance. 
Adequate inspection and maintenance of automobiles 
 ¡Inspection and maintenance is conducted immediately when the phenomenon with 
the environmental influence is found by daily understanding the state of the 
automobiles.  
¡ For diesel-fueled automobiles, conduct inspection and maintenance when an 
increase in black smoke is confirmed by the eye. 
¡ When the air-conditioner gas is considered to have decreased, based on the 
effectiveness of the car air-conditioner, conduct inspection and maintenance of the car 
air-conditioner, in order to prevent the discharge of chlorofluorocarbon into the 
atmosphere. 
Inspection and maintenance based on voluntary maintenance standards 
 (Air cleaner element-related) 
¡ For cleaning and replacement of air cleaner element in diesel-fueled automobiles, 
refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a 
voluntary maintenance standard based on either the distance driven or the amount of 
time that has passed since the previous maintenance. Conduct inspection and 
maintenance accordingly. 
(Engine oil related) 
¡ For the change of engine oil, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by 
the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on either the 
distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous maintenance. 
Conduct oil change accordingly. 
¡ For the replacement of engine oil filter, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based 
on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct replacement accordingly. 
(Fuel equipment related) 
  For overhauling or replacement of fuel equipment in diesel-fueled automobiles, 
refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a 
voluntary maintenance standard based on either the distance driven or the amount of 
time that has passed since the previous maintenance. Conduct overhaul or 
replacement accordingly. 
(Related to equipment for the reduction of gas emission) 
¡ For the inspection of equipment for the reduction of gas emission (DPF, Oxidized 
catalyst) in diesel-fueled automobiles, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based 
on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct inspection accordingly. 
(Others) 292  ¡ For the inspection and adjustment of tire air-pressure, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance 
standard based on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed 
since the previous maintenance. Conduct adjustment in accordance with the actual 
measurement of air-pressure. 
  For the inspection of transmission oil leakage, refer to the maintenance notebook, 
etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard 
based on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the 
previous maintenance. Conduct maintenance accordingly. 
  For changing the transmission oil, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided 
by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on either 
the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct change accordingly. 
  For the inspection of deferential oil leakage, refer to the maintenance notebook, 
etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard 
based on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the 
previous maintenance. Conduct maintenance accordingly. 
  For changing the deferential oil, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided 
by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on either 
the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct change accordingly. 
¡ refers to items that must be conducted for inspection and maintenance of automobiles. 
  refers to items for which execution is desirable for inspection and maintenance of 
automobiles. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of passenger transportation businesses that meet the criteria to the number 
of passenger transportation businesses commissioned in the fiscal year.  
  293 22-9 Illumination Services 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Fluorescent 
illumination 
services 
 
 Evaluation Criteria 
The service is a function supplying service (servicizing) that fulfills the 
following criteria: 
(1) Fluorescent light that fulfills the Evaluation Criteria for fluorescent light 
(refer to Lamps section) is used as long as it does not cause any issues for 
objective of use and is suitable for the equipment. 
(2) The recycle rate of collected used fluorescent lamps that are in its 
complete form should comprise 95% or more of the collected fluorescent 
lamps. 
(3) A certificate for the completion of adequate processing of fluorescent 
lamp is issued, and presented to the client upon request. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Collection bin for used fluorescent lamps should be capable of recycling 
in order to decrease environmental load. 
(2) Collection of used fluorescent lamps will be conducted upon cooperation 
with facility manager. Efforts should be made to collect without damage. 
(3) An effective method of distribution network utilizing regular collection, 
collaborative shipping, etc. is in place for shipping and collecting of 
fluorescent lamps. 
(4) Packaging and stowage is as simple as possible, and ease of reuse and 
decrease in environmental load upon disposal is considered. 
Notes: 
1. Function supplying service (servicizing) noted in Evaluation Criteria refers to a 
service in which only the function of the fluorescent lamp is supplied; the ownership of 
the fluorescent lamp remains with the service provider who remains responsible for 
transportation, collection and disposal. 
2. Certificate for the completion of adequate processing of fluorescent lamp noted in 
Evaluation Criteria (3) can be an equivalent of a certificate including electronic 
manifesto and manifesto management system utilizing IT. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
The total number of function supplying service provider for fluorescent lamps commissioned 
in the fiscal year. 
  294 22-10 Retail Businesses 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Retail 
businesses that 
operate in 
government 
buildings, etc.  Evaluation Criteria 
Stores for retail businesses that operate through commission in 
government buildings and associated sites need to fulfill one of the 
following criteria: 
(1) An original system is put in place to restrict excessive use of containers 
and packaging.  
(2) An original system is put in place to restrict consumers’ excessive use 
of single-use plastic products, containers and packaging. 
(3) If providing foods, the following requirements shall be satisfied. 
a. It is necessary to understand the amount of food waste generated, 
to formulate plans and to set targets for restraining occurrence and 
recycling. 
b. To suppress the occurrence of food waste, announce to 
consumers, enlightenment, etc. are being carried out. 
c.  To ensure sustainable production and consumption of raw 
materials in procurement of food, procurement policies on 
sustainability have been proclaimed. 
d. When the target value of suppression of food waste, etc. is 
applicable, the amount generated per unit such as food waste shall 
be less than this target value. 
e. To make sure that the implementation rate of recycling and 
utilization of food circulation resources has reached the standard 
implementation rate specified by ministerial criteria or plan to 
achieve target value in target year. 
(4) Among the containers and packages of products handled at stores, 
those that are premised on reuse must be returned and collected at the 
store. 
(5) In the case of providing single-use plastic shopping bags, all shopping 
bags to be provided is made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 10% 
by weight. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Containers and packaging of merchandise sold at the stores are 
reduced amount of through simplified packaging, etc. 
(2) When filling in beverages at a store and offering it, it is possible to 
correspond to reusable cup or bottle of customers. 
(3) In the case of providing single-use plastic shopping bags, all shopping 
bags to be provided is made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight. 
(4) When handling foods, treat foods produced using feeds, fertilizers, 
etc. manufactured by recycling food waste, etc. with priority. 
(5) To cooperate in efforts that contribute to reducing the environmental 
impact of the entire food chain, such as relaxing the delivery deadlines 
to reduce food losses. 295 Notes: 
1. Original system noted in the evaluation criteria (1) refers to measures taken by the retail 
businesses to promote the control of discharge of waste material derived from containers 
and packaging through the use of thinner or light weight containers and packaging, 
choosing adequately-sized containers and packaging for the merchandise, etc. 
2. Original system noted in the evaluation criteria (2) refers to measures to promote the 
control of discharge of waste material derived from containers and packaging by the 
consumers through providing containers and packaging for sold merchandise at a cost, 
providing reusable shopping bags for those consumers who do not bring their own 
shopping bags, etc., and confirming with the consumers the retailer’s intent concerning the 
use of containers and packaging. 
3. Recycling etc. of the evaluation criteria (3) and factors for consideration (4) refer to 
recycling etc. based on Food Recycling Law. 
4. Suppression of the occurrence of food waste etc. of the evaluation criteria (3) refer to 
suppression of the occurrence of food waste etc. based on the ministerial ordinance. 
5. "Procurement policies on sustainability, etc. the evaluation criteria (3) c  means policies 
that businesses showed in the direction of the environment, society, economic activities, 
etc. including a description on sustainable procurement.  
6. Sustainable procurement means procurement that contributes to sustainable production 
and consumption, including procurement from producers and distributors that clearly 
indicate sustainability policy. 
7. With regard to the evaluation criteria (4) d, in cases where it does not fall under the Food 
Waste Generation Large Volume Generation Business Operator under the Food Recycling 
Law, the amount of food waste generated per unit is below the target value or achieves the 
target value It is regarded as conforming by formulating a voluntary plan to do. 
8. Evaluation criteria (4) means to install a collection box or the like so that when selling 
beverages using the reuse bottle at the store, the container packaging of the product sold 
can be returned or collected. 
9. Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by a third party 
such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific analysis and 
evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
10. Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate of the evaluation criteria (5) and factors for 
consideration (3) based on the bio-based synthetic polymer content is multiplied by the 
bio-based synthetic polymer content rate (ratio of the weight of the plant-derived material 
component contained in the plastics based on the plant to the plastic weight). 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
The number of retail businesses in operation in government buildings etc. that meet the 
criteria in the fiscal year. 
  296 22-11 Laundry and Dry Cleaning  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Laundry and 
dry cleaning Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Measures are put in place for energy conservation and the water 
resource saving, etc., collecting and recycling of the drain water for 
reduction of environmental impact. 
(2) Measures are put in place for eco-drive promotion. 
(3) A system for collection and reuse or recycling of used hangers is 
established. 
(4) An original approach is put in place to reduce bags and packaging 
materials. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Control of volatile organic material is taken into consideration. 
(2) Efforts are made for the adequate use of laundry water and detergent. 
(3) Maintain an understanding of energy use conditions at business and 
sales offices, and make an effort to decrease energy use rate in said 
facilities. 
(4) Incorporation of fuel-efficient, low pollution cars is promoted. 
(5) When providing plastic bags, plant-based plastic whose reduction effort 
of environmental load has been confirmed are used. 
(6) The introduction in the cleaning equipment, the machine, and air 
conditioning facilities, etc. of the energy conservation type are 
attempted. 
Notes: 
1. Laundry and dry cleaning under consideration in the evaluation criteria in this section 
denotes the cleaning business, based on the Law of cleaning business (Act No.207 of 
1950). However, evaluation criteria in this section is not applied to the cleaning of the 
product that the procurement destination does concerned when procuring as other 
items such as “Blankets,” “Comforters,” and “Mops” by lease or rental agreements. 
2. Drain water means the steam (saturated steam) is the one that the state changed into the 
flocculated water by radiating heat and using heat. 
3. Eco-drive refers to “Recommendation for Eco-drive 10” published by Eco-drive 
Popularization Network (October 2012). 
Note: (1) Soft accelerator e-start; (2) Keep a distance between cars and driving with 
little acceleration and deceleration; (3) Early stopping of acceleration when 
deceleration; (4) Appropriate use of air conditioner; (5) Stop a useless idling; (6) Avoid 
getting congested, have time and leave; (7) Inspection and maintenance of cars start 
from air pressure in the tires; (8) Removal of unnecessary load from car; (9) Stop 
parking that disturbs running.; and (10) Understand own fuel cost.  
4. Measures are put in place for eco-drive promotion noted in the evaluation criteria (2) 
requires the fulfillment of the following: 
a. The driver has been informed of eco-drive. 
b. A manager responsible for eco-drive has been assigned, manual has been created 
(including the use of an existing manual), and a system for promoting eco-drive has 
been put in place. 297 c. Energy use is being maintained under the categories of driver and car type. It is 
desirable to use the operation records of automobile. 
 
5. A system for collection and reuse or recycling of used hangers is established noted in 
the evaluation criteria (3) denotes fulfillment of the below requirements. 
a. Specific information for the collection of used hanger (collection method, 
collection location, etc.) is available for the users to collect appropriately. 
b. A system is in place to wash and reuse used hangers. 
c. If collected plastic hangers are enable to reuse, it is material recycled as much as 
possible. 
6. Bag / packaging material refers to a bag for storing a cleaned goods or the like for 
take-out, a bag for preventing dust, dirt, or the like from adhering to the cleaned goods. 
7. Original approach of the Evaluation criteria (4) is refers to recommend the use of 
eco-bags, etc. to confirm the intention of using take-out bags, etc. or any other action 
taken to encourage users to reduce their take-out bags and packaging in providing 
services. 
8. Fuel-efficient, low pollution cars refer to “13-1 Vehicles” section. 
9.. Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific analysis 
and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
10. Each procurement organization should use less bags and packaging materials, such as 
using eco bags when receiving cleaned goods. 
 
 
 
 Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of laundry and dry cleaning businesses that meet the criteria to the 
number of laundry and dry cleaning businesses commissioned in the fiscal year. 
  298 22-12 Installation of Vending Machines  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Installation of 
vending 
machines for 
beverages Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Energy consumption efficiency doesn’t exceed the amount of energy 
consumption efficiency calculated by using the formula listed in Table 1 
for each category. 
(2) Fluorocarbons are not used as refrigerant or expanding agent for 
insulation. 
(3) The implementations of environmentally conscious design defined in the 
evaluation criteria in Table 2 are made. Moreover, the states of 
implementations are published and can be easily confirmed on websites 
or public environmental reports. 
(4) Contents of specified chemical substances do not exceed the standard 
content rate. The content rates are published and can be easily confirmed 
on websites, etc. 
(5) A collection box for beverage containers is set up and separate 
collection and recycling should be done according to the material of 
beverage containers.  
(6) Systems for the collection and recycle of used vending machines and 
for the appropriate disposal of parts that cannot be recycled are in 
place. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) The information such as annual power consumption, accomplishment 
rate of energy consumption efficiency standard and refrigerant (kind, 
global warming potential and enclosed capacity) are displayed on the 
main body of vending machine so that it can be seen easily and it is also 
disclosed on websites. 
(2) In the case of indoors set up, the lighting should be turned off all the 
time, except when there is no lighting in surroundings at nighttime and it 
interferes to the selection and the purchase of the commodity. 
(3) In the case of outdoors set up, the consideration should be taken so that 
direct sunshine should not strike into the main body of vending 
machines. 
(4) For vending machines for beverage served in cups, user's own cup 
should be available. 
(5) The heat insulator with a low thermal conductivity such as the vacuum 
heat insulators should be used. 
(6) Take measures such as using fuel-efficient vehicles with low pollution 
and improving the efficiency of delivery when setup or recovery of the 
vending machines and replenishing beverages or collection of 
containers. 
(7) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon 
disposal. 
(8) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 299 Notes: 
1. Installation of vending machines for beverages under consideration in this section 
refer to those for canned/bottled beverages, those for beverage in paper containers, 
and those for beverage served in cups. However, it doesn't apply to installation of the 
one as follows: 
(1) Those having storage space for goods kept at or near room temperature. 
(2) Compact table-top models used on tables. 
(3) Those intended to be used at specific places such as in vehicles. 
(4) Those cooling beverages (raw materials) by means of an electronic cooling. 
(e.g., Peltier cooling) 
2. Evaluation Criteria in this section doesn't apply if there will be no replacement of the 
vending machines in the cases duration of the installation contract or renewal of the 
contract, etc. 
3. Evaluation Criteria (1) doesn't apply to vending machines for the ones preparing for a 
disaster, the universal design vending machines, and the social contribution type 
vending machines, which increases power consumption by having those functions. 
4. Fluorocarbons are the materials defined as the Fluorocarbons prescribed in Article 
2, Paragraph 1 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Proper Management of 
Fluorocarbons, (Act No. 64 of 2001). Available materials in Evaluation Criteria (2) 
are Carbon Dioxide, Hydrocarbon and Hydro-Fluoro-Olefin (HFO-1234fy), etc. 
5. Global warming potential denotes the numerical value that showed degree to which 
heat-trapping gas brings global warming in ratio to which carbon dioxide brings 
global warming. 
6. Evaluation criteria (4) does not apply to the reuse parts. 
7. Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, 
polybrominated biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
8. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specific chemical 
substances for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified 
chemical substances, chemical element symbol, substances applicable for 
calculation, and standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the 
standard is allowed are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above 
JIS. 
9. With regard to the evaluation criteria (5) , taking into account the number and place of 
vending machines to be installed and the amount of sales of beverages etc., it should 
be installed appropriately so as not to hinder collection. 
10. Accomplishment rate of energy consumption efficiency standard denotes the 
numerical value that showed by percentage which the product’s standard energy 
consumption efficiency calculated by the evaluation criteria (1) divided by the energy 
consumption efficiency (rounds off below the decimal point.). 
11. Each procurement organization is to take the following into careful account: 
aD Consider enough the number of consumers and the volume of sales, etc. and set 
up the vending machines adequate in number and size. 
bD Examine where to place vending machines so that the environmental impact is as 
low as possible because the load of environmental impact such as energy 
consumption varies according to the installation location (indoor, outdoor, sun or 
shade, etc.). 300 cD When setting up the vending machine available of user’s own cups, confirm the 
cleaning and hygienic conditions in the set up location and the surroundings, 
make it known to users, and determine responsibility in case the problem on the 
hygiene is caused. 
 301 Table1: Calculation Formula of Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Vending 
Machines for Beverages 
Category Calculation formula 
of standard energy 
consumption efficiency Beverages to 
be sold Type of Vending machines 
Canned 
or bottled 
beverages Machines serving cold only, or Machines 
serving hot or cold E=0.218V+401 
Machines serving hot and cold 
(Internal depth is below 400 mm) E=0.798Va+414 
Machines serving 
hot and cold 
(Internal depth is 
400mm or 
greater) Without electronic 
money processing 
Device E=0.482Va+350 
With electronic money 
processing 
Device E=0.482Va+500 
Beverages 
in paper 
container Type A 
(Dummy samples 
are used for 
selling 
goods) Machines serving cold 
only E=0.948V+373 
Machines serving hot 
and cold 
(having two internal 
compartments) E=0.306Vb+954 
Machines serving hot 
and cold 
(having three internal 
compartments) E=0.63Vb+1474 
Type B 
(Actual goods are 
used for visual 
display and 
selling goods) Machines serving cold 
only E=0.477V+750 
Machines serving hot 
and cold E=0.401Vb+1261 
Beverages 
served in cups - E=1020[T<1500] 
E=0.293T+580[T>1500] 
Notes: 
1. Machines serving cold only refers to vending machines that refrigerate the products 
sold. 
2. Machines serving hot or cold refers to vending machines that refrigerate or warm the 
products sold. 
3. Machines serving hot and cold refers to vending machines which have warm section 
and cold section separated by internal partitions, so that the products sold are kept 
refrigerated or warmed respectively. 
4. E, V, and Va express the following numeric values. 
E : Standard energy consumption efficiency (unit: kWh per year) 
V : Actual internal volume (indicates the numeric value calculated from the internal 
dimensions of the goods storage area) (unit: liter) 
Va : Adjusted internal volume (indicates numeric value acquired first by multiplying 
the actual internal volume of the hot storage compartment by 40, which is divided 302 by 11, and then by adding the result to the actual internal volume of the cold 
storage compartment) (unit: liter) 
Vb : Adjusted internal volume (numeric value acquired first by multiplying the actual 
internal volume of the hot storage compartment by 40, which is devided by 10, 
and then by adding the result to the actual internal volume of the cold storage 
compartment) (Unit: L) 
T : Adjusted heat capacity (numeric value obtained by totaling the hot-water tank 
capacity multiplied by 80, the cold-water tank capacity multiplied by 15, and the 
ice storage capacity multiplied by 95 and then divided by 0.917, and then 
multiplying the total sum by 4.19. (Unit: kJ) 
5. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods (2),” based on “Criteria for judgment of 
manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy 
consumption performance of vending machines (Ministry of Economy, Trade and 
Industry Notification No.289 of 2007). 
 
 
Table 2: Design Criteria for Environmental Consideration in Vending Machine for 
Beverages 
Objective Evaluation criteria Evaluation standard 
Reduce(reduction 
of resources) 
 Reduction of resource  The weight of product is reduced. 
Using of recycled 
materials Promotion of the use of recycled materials. 
Longer life of product Consideration for overhauling and renewal. 
Consideration and improvement for the 
separation. 
Consideration for repair and maintenance. 
Reduction of energy 
power consumption  The energy power consumption of product is 
reduced. Attempt is made for developing low 
energy consumption technology. 
Reuse(use again as 
parts) Selection of reused 
parts Consideration for communalization or 
standardization, selecting of reused parts from 
design stage. 
Consideration for 
products Consideration for separation and assembling 
of reusable parts. 
Design for parts reuse Consideration for ease of display, cleaning and 
washing, determination of longevity. 
Recycling(use 
again as materials) Material Selection of recyclable materials. 
Standardization and indication of materials of 
kind of plastics. 
Reduction of use of parts of difficult to 
recycle. 
Consideration of ease 
of separation The structure allows for easy dismantling of 
pre-separation parts. 
 
 303  
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of installation of vending machines for beverages installation by contract 
or licensing agreement that meet the criteria to the number of vending machines for beverages 
commissioned in the fiscal year. 
  304 22-13 Moving Transportation 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Moving 
Transportation Evaluation Criteria 
(1) As for products used for packing or curing, when applicable to the 
designated procurement items, are used which fulfill those evaluation 
criteria. 
(2) Materials for packing and curing that can be used repetitive are used.  
(3) The collection of materials for packing is executed after the moving 
ends.  
(4) In the case of transportation with a car, fulfill following criteria. 
a. The state of energy use, as well as the effects of energy efficiency 
efforts is being reviewed periodically. 
b. System and organization for environmental conservation is being 
developed. 
c. Measures are in place for eco-drive promotion. 
d. Inspection and maintenance of cars for environmental protection 
including reduction of environmental pollutant emission and 
maintenance of energy efficiency is being conducted. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) The appropriate proposal concerning the moving transportation method 
shall be made to contribute to decrease of environmental load. 
(2) As for packing and curing material, taking into account for saving 
resource such as aggregate packing or reduction of materials use. 
(3) As for packing and curing material, recycled material or plastic made 
from plant whose reduction effect of environmental load has been 
confirmed are used, also taking into consideration of ease of recycling 
and environmental load upon disposal.  
(4) In the case of transportation with a car, taking into consideration of 
following. 
a. Adequate and effective application for the efficient use of energy 
and measures to contribute to leveling of demand for electricity in 
moving transportation is arranged, with consideration for 
“Evaluation Criteria for Freight Transportation Companies in 
Relation to the Efficient use of Energy in Freight Transportation 
(Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry; Ministry of Land, 
Infrastructure and Transport, Notification No.7 of 2006) and 
“Guidelines for Freight Transportation Companies in Relation to 
the measures to contribute to leveling of demand for electricity in 
Transportation” (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry; 
Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transport (Notification No.2 
of 2014)), based on the Regulation for the Efficient Use of Energy 
(Act No.49 of 1979). 
b. Incorporation of fuel-efficient, low pollution cars are promoted. At 
the same time, transportation using fuel-efficient, low pollution 
cars is being conducted as much as possible. 
c. Measures are put in place for improved efficiency in moving 
transportation. 305 d. Devices to promote eco-drive are introduced as much as possible. 
e. Measures are taken for the incorporation of Intelligent Transport 
System (ITS) including Vehicle Information and Communication 
System (VICS) adaptable car navigation system, and Electronic 
Toll Collection System (ETC). 
f. Being conducted by car fills the emission standard as much as 
possible, when driving in the measures region of the Law 
concerning Special Measures for Total Emission Reduction of 
Nitrogen Oxides and Small Particles from automobiles in specified 
areas (June 3, 1992 No.70). 
Notes: 
1. Moving transportation under consideration in the evaluation criteria in this section 
denotes moving transportation business of the fixture and furniture, the article, and the 
document, etc., and service of packing, unpacking, arrangement, and care, etc. 
incidental to those, according to the moving of the public office building, etc. (includes 
the moving between the public office buildings, the moving within the public office 
building, and the moving in the floor of the public office building.)  However, the 
moving transportation to need special packing, transportation, and the management, 
etc. such as the work of art, the precision instrument, and animals and plants is 
excluded. 
2. Evaluation Criteria (3) applies when packing materials made of paper such as 
cardboards are offered by the business provider, and executes the collection according 
to purchaser's request. However, provide the collection time limit and the frequency 
beforehand. 
3. Evaluation Criteria (4) and Factors for Consideration (4) are applied to the business 
that does transportation using the car, regardless of the main contractor or subcontract 
of the moving transportation business.  
4. Establishment of mechanisms and systems for environmental conservation means to 
formulate plans and targets related to the environment, establish implementation 
systems for such plans, and promote efforts toward environmental conservation. 
5. Eco-drive refers to “Recommendation for Eco-drive 10” published by Eco-drive 
Popularization Network (October 2012). 
Notes: (1) Soft accelerator e-start; (2) Keep a distance between cars and driving with 
little acceleration and deceleration; (3) Early stopping of acceleration when  
deceleration; (4) Appropriate use of air conditioner; (5) Stop a useless idling; (6) 
Avoid getting congested, have time and leave; (7) Inspection and maintenance of cars 
start from air pressure in the tires; (8) Removal of unnecessary load from car; (9) Stop 
parking that disturbs running.; and (10) Understand own fuel cost. 
6. Measures are in place for eco-drive promotion noted in the evaluation criteria (4) c. 
requires the fulfillment of the following: 
a. The driver has been informed of eco-drive. 
b. A manager responsible for eco-drive has been assigned, manual has been created 
(including the use of an existing manual), and a system for promoting eco-drive 
has been put in place. 
c. Education and training regarding eco-drive is being performed. 
d. Energy use is being maintained through the maintenance of operation records 
under the categories of driver and car type. 306 7. Inspection and maintenance of cars in the evaluation criteria (4) d. refers to the 
observance of the items outlined in the Regulations for Road Transportation and 
Delivery, including daily and regular inspections, as well as the establishing and 
execution of voluntary maintenance standards based on inspection and maintenance 
factors listed in Table. The objective here is to secure an environment that can maintain 
energy efficiency in automobiles. 
8. The appropriate proposal concerning the move transportation method of Factors for 
Consideration (1) applies to the contract type when the concrete suggestion is possible. 
9. Recycled material denotes part or all of material once used as a part of a product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles. (This excludes plastic that has been recycled in the 
same process of manufacturing the product.) 
10. Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed 
denotes material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by 
a third party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the 
product throughout its lifecycle. 
11. Fuel-efficient, low pollution cars in Factors for Consideration (4) b. should be 
referred to “13-1 Automobiles” in this Basic Policy. 
12.  Measures are put in place for improved efficiency in moving transportation noted in 
Factors for Consideration (4)c. requires the fulfillment of the following: 
a. An energy efficient delivery route is selected beforehand, and the driver is notified 
thereof. 
b. A system for an appropriate delivery route, taking into account traffic information, 
is put in place. 
c. An adequate automobile type, taking into account amount of delivery items and 
regional characteristics, is selected. 
13. Each procurement organization notes the following enough. 
a. It is necessary to consign the following respectively when collection, transport 
or disposal of the waste generated along with the moving is requested from the 
third party; the municipal waste to the municipality or the municipal waste 
disposal business person (The one that corresponds to Article 2, paragraph 1 
and Article 2-3, paragraph 1 (Ministry of Health and Welfare Ordinance No. 
35of 1971) in the Waste Management and Public Cleaning Law Ordinance for 
Enforcement is included.), Industrial waste to the industrial waste disposal 
trader (The one that corresponds to Article 9, paragraph 1 and Article 10-3, 
paragraph 1 in the Waste Management and Public Cleaning Law Ordinance for 
Enforcement is included.). It is possible to request the collection or the 
transportation of the municipal waste from the moving business after the letter 
of attorney is delivered. 
b. It is necessary to follow the consignment standard when collection, transportation 
or disposal of the waste along with the moving transportation business is 
consigned, and to contract industrial waste to the industrial waste disposal 
contractor who consigns the industrial waste collection transportation trader and 
disposal that consigns the collection or transportation beforehand, with confirm 
the address and the disposal method of the industrial waste disposal facility that is 
the transportation destination also. Moreover, it is necessary to confirm the 307 address in the final disposal dump when it is disposed finally. It is preferable to do 
the confirmation of the municipal waste based on industrial waste. 
c. In the delivery of waste, about industrial waste, it is necessary to confirm 
transportation by delivering the control manifest for industrial waste at the same 
time as handing it over, and receiving sending the copy of the control manifest for 
industrial waste that described from the processing trader so after transportation 
and disposal are ended like the content of the consignment it, and disposal. 
Moreover, it is preferable to do the confirmation of the municipal waste based on 
industrial waste. 
 
 
Table: Inspection and Maintenance Items for Environmental Preservation, Including 
Maintenance of Automobile Energy Efficiency, etc. 
Promotional structure for inspection and maintenance 
   Inspection and maintenance is conducted in accordance with specified operation 
plan, and the results are recorded. 
  A system is put in place to review the contents of inspection and maintenance, based 
on the results of inspection and maintenance. 
Adequate inspection and maintenance of automobiles 
 ¡ When commissioning inspection and maintenance to a maintenance business, 
maintain an understanding of the automobile condition on a daily basis, and relay the 
condition when commissioning. 
¡ Conduct inspection and maintenance when an increase in black smoke is confirmed 
by the eye. 
¡ When the air-conditioner gas is considered to have decreased, based on the 
effectiveness of the car air-conditioner, conduct inspection and maintenance of the car 
air-conditioner, in order to prevent the discharge of chlorofluorocarbon into the 
atmosphere. 
Inspection and maintenance based on voluntary maintenance standards 
 (Air cleaner element-related) 
¡ For cleaning and replacement of air cleaner element, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance 
standard based on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since 
the previous maintenance. Conduct inspection and maintenance accordingly. 
(Engine oil related) 
¡ For the change of engine oil, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by the 
manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on either the 
distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous maintenance. 
Conduct oil change accordingly. 
¡ For the replacement of engine oil filter, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based 
on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct replacement accordingly. 
(Fuel equipment related) 
  For overhauling or replacement of fuel equipment, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance 308 standard based on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since 
the previous maintenance. Conduct overhaul or replacement accordingly. 
(Related to equipment for the reduction of gas emission) 
¡ For the inspection of equipment for the reduction of gas emission (DPF, Oxidized 
catalyst), refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and 
determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on either the distance driven or the 
amount of time that has passed since the previous maintenance. Conduct inspection 
accordingly. 
(Others) 
 ¡ For the inspection and adjustment of tire air-pressure, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance 
standard based on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since 
the previous maintenance. Conduct adjustment in accordance with the actual 
measurement of air-pressure. 
  For the inspection of transmission oil leakage, refer to the maintenance notebook, 
etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard 
based on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the 
previous maintenance. Conduct maintenance accordingly. 
  For changing the transmission oil, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided 
by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on either 
the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct change accordingly. 
  For the inspection of deferential oil leakage, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based 
on either the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct maintenance accordingly. 
  For changing the deferential oil, refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by 
the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on either the 
distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous maintenance. 
Conduct change accordingly. 
¡ refers to items that must be conducted for inspection and maintenance of automobiles. 
  refers to items for which execution is desirable for inspection and maintenance of 
automobiles. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of moving transportation businesses that meet the criteria to the number 
of moving transportation businesses commissioned in the fiscal year.  309 22-14 Meeting Operation 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Meeting 
Operation Evaluation Criteria 
Meet the applicable following criteria when executing the business 
including meeting operation by the consignment contract, etc. 
(1) If the documents are distributed, to promote reduction of paper 
consumption though the printing of proper number of paper handouts 
and double-sided copies for a meeting. If the paper correspond to the 
designated procurement items, is used which fulfill those evaluation 
criteria. 
(2) Meet the evaluation criteria of printing when printing such as poster, 
leaflet and pamphlet.  
(3) The rest of handouts and printed matter shall be recycled. 
(4) Providing following information about the approach to decrease of 
environmental load to the meeting participant. 
aD Use of the public transportation 
bD Cool Biz and Warm Biz. 
cD Bring pens 
(5) If serving beverages, meet the following. 
aD Do not use single-use plastic products, containers and packaging. 
bD Served in the reusable cups or returned and collected container 
and packages. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) For goods to be used for conferences, use existing items as much as 
possible. As for products used for packing or curing, when applicable 
to the designated procurement items, are used which fulfill those 
evaluation criteria.  
(2) To reduce paper resources by using terminals such as laptop computers 
and tablets. 
(3) In the case of transportation with a car, use fuel-efficient, low pollution 
cars possibly, to carry material, machinery and participants, with 
eco-driving.  
(4) When providing meals, do not use single-use plastic products, 
containers and packaging. 
(5) Materials for the packing used to transport of the material and 
machinery, it is to be as simple as possible and take into account ease of 
recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Fuel-efficient, low pollution cars in Factors for Consideration should be referred to 
13-1. Vehicles in this Basic Policy. 
2. Eco-drive refers to “Recommendation for Eco-drive 10” published by Eco-drive 
Popularization Network (October, 2012). 
Notes: (1) Soft accelerator e-start; (2) Keep a distance between cars and driving with 
little acceleration and deceleration; (3) Early stopping of acceleration when  
deceleration; (4) Appropriate use of air conditioner; (5) Stop a useless idling; (6) Avoid 
getting congested, have time and leave; (7) Inspection and maintenance of cars start 310 from air pressure in the tires; (8) Removal of unnecessary load from car; (9) Stop 
parking that disturbs running.; and (10) Understand own fuel cost. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of commissioned businesses including the meeting operation that meet 
the criteria to the total number of commissioned businesses including the meeting operation 
contracted in the fiscal year. 
  311 22-15. Providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Providing imaging 
equipment, etc., as 
a service Evaluation Criteria 
(1) When installing devices related to providing imaging equipment, 
etc., as a service, the following requirements shall be satisfied. 
a. Copiers, Multifunction devices and Upgradeable digital 
copiers satisfy the evaluation criteria concerned in this basic 
policy. 
b. Printers and Multifunction Printers satisfy the evaluation 
criteria concerned in this basic policy. 
c. Fax machines satisfy the evaluation criteria concerned in this 
basic policy. 
d. Scanners satisfy the evaluation criteria concerned in this basic 
policy. 
e. Digital duplicators satisfy the evaluation criteria concerned in 
this basic policy. 
f. Collecting the provided equipment after the contract of 
providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service. Also recovery 
of parts and material recycling are put in place. In addition, for 
parts that cannot be reused or recycled from the collected 
equipment, after being reduced, etc., they are properly 
processed and not simply landfilled. 
(2) In the case of supplying cartridges, etc., it is necessary to meet the 
evaluation criteria concerned in this basic policy. 
(3) In the case of supplying paper, it is necessary to meet the evaluation 
criteria concerned in this basic policy if the paper corresponds to 
specified procurement goods. 
(4) To grasp the actual results of use of equipment related to providing 
imaging equipment, etc., as a service and make the following 
proposals based on the situation. 
a. Measures to reduce the amount of paper and toner or ink used 
in the case of equipment related to providing imaging 
equipment, etc., as a service. 
b. Product specifications and installed number of equipment 
related to providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service for 
reducing environmental impact. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) When introducing copiers, multifunction devices and upgradeable 
digital copiers, use reproducing machines or partial reuse type 
machine as much as possible. 
(2) To recover used cartridges, toner containers, ink containers or 
photoconductors, and reuse or recycle the recovered parts. In 
addition, with regard to parts that cannot be reused or recycled, 
such as collected used cartridges, toner containers, ink containers, 
or photoreceptors, after being reduced, etc., they are properly 
processed and not simply landfilled. 
(3) Packaging materials used for equipment introduction and supply of 312 consumables in providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service, are 
reused as much as possible, easy to reuse, and considered for 
recycling at the time of disposal and reduction of environmental 
impact. 
Notes:  
1. Devices related to providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service means Copiers, 
Multifunction devices, Upgradeable digital copiers, Printers, Multifunction Printers, 
Fax machines and Scanners subject to 5. Imaging Equipment, etc. in this basic policy, 
and Digital duplicators subject to 7. Office Equipment, etc. in this basic policy. 
2. Cartridge, etc. means toner cartridges and ink cartridges subject to 5-6 Cartridges, etc. 
in this basic policy. 
3. Introduction of devices related to providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service 
means that the contractor introduces all or a part of the equipment related to providing 
imaging equipment, etc., as a service, and the contractor introduces items other than 
equipment at the same time. 
4. Providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service subject to the evaluation criteria in this 
section is the provision of functions related to printing and output by the equipment 
providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service, either one of the following. 
a. Introduction of equipment, maintenance work and supplies of consumable used 
by the equipment concerned providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service. 
b. Introduction of equipment and maintenance work concerned providing imaging 
equipment, etc., as a service. 
c. Maintenance work of equipment and supplies of consumable used by the 
equipment concerned providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service. 
5. Evaluation criteria (1) f. applicable to specified recycling industries under the Act on 
Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. 
6. With regard to proposals of the evaluation criteria (4) a. and b., if it is possible to 
propose after consultation between the purchaser and the contractor, implement it at an 
appropriate time or periodically within the performance period of the business. 
7. Measures to reduce the amount of paper and toner or ink of the evaluation criteria (4) 
a. includes double-sided printing (only in the case of equipment that do not apply the 
requirements for automatic duplexing function), reduction printing, promotion of 
consolidated printing, visualization of environmental load information (number of 
printed sheets, color printing ratio, duplex utilization rate, aggregate utilization rate, 
paper reduction rate, etc.) by the equipment panel, management of paper reusing 
function, toner or ink saving by software, user authentication and so on. 
8. Evaluation criteria (4) b, taking into consideration the environmental impact reduction 
effect (reduction of power consumption, reduction of greenhouse gas emissions, 
consumption of consumable items, etc.), cost effectiveness and efficiency of 
procurement affairs, etc. This item applies when quantitative proposal is possible. 
9. Factors for consideration (2) are applied when the contractor supplies a cartridge, a 
toner container, an ink container or a photoreceptor. 
10. Each organization that procures will make efforts to examine countermeasures for 
reducing environmental impact, such as implementation of management by user 
authentication, suppression of usage of paper, etc. 
 
 313 (2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of commissioned businesses including providing imaging equipment, 
etc., as a service that meet the criteria to the total number of commissioned businesses 
including providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service contracted in the fiscal year. 
 
  314 23. Trash bags, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Plastic Trash bags Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Fulfill one of the following. 
a. Plant based plastics whose reduction effect of environmental 
load has been confirmed shall be used at least 10% of the 
weight of the plastic. 
b. Recycled plastic shall be used at least 10% of the weight of 
plastic. 
(2) Information on the above pair or pair must be displayed. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) To reduce the weight of a sheet as much as possible by make it thin. 
(2) A plant based plastic whose reduction effect of environmental load 
has been confirmed shall be used as high content rate as possible. 
(3) Product packaging or packaging should be as simple as possible, 
with consideration given to ease of recycling and reduction of 
disposal load. 
1. Plastic Trash bags that are subject to the Evaluation criteria in this section are plastic 
trash bags intended to be used for the incineration of waste generated in general 
administrative affairs. This does not apply to cases where the quality and standards to be 
satisfied are specified in, where local governments have specified for waste disposal, or 
when they are used for special purposes. 
2. Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental load has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objective and scientific analysis and 
evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
3. Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate based on the bio-based synthetic polymer 
content is multiplied by the bio-based synthetic polymer content rate (ratio of the weight 
of the plant-derived material component contained in the plastics based on the plant to the 
plastic weight). 
4. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic that has been recycled 
in the process of manufacturing the product.) 
5. Display information in Evaluation Criteria (2) means that the content ratio of plant based 
plastic in Evaluation Criteria (1) a. or recycled plastic in Evaluation Criteria (1) b. 
indicated on the product itself or product packaging, provided in catalogs or websites, etc. 
6. The standard for content ratio of plant based plastic in Evaluation Criteria (1) will 
consider the market trends of products that meet the criteria and carry out examinations 
and raise them appropriately based on the Plastic Resource Recycling Strategy (May 31, 
2019). 
 
 315 (2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of plastic trash bags that meet the criteria to the total number of plastic 
trash bags purchased in the fiscal year.